T

J61334BB - 00

USER'S MANUAL

FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

FMS220

Name Function Date Visa

FMS 220
Established by L. PAILLET
System Manager
FMS220
Approved by C. HARLEZ
Design Authorithy
FMS220 Work
Approved by FX. LEGRAND
Package Manager
P. FMS220
Approved by
BLANCHEMAISON Quality Manager
CCMF / FMS200
Authorized by F. MONDESERT
Department Leader

Product : FMS220 Classif. : Proprietary reserve Date : 15-MAR-12

Category : Deliverable Document Language : English
Pages : 346

J61334BB - 00
Page 2
FMS220 - USER'S MANUAL
PROPRIETARY NOTICE
T

PROPRIETARY NOTICE

Use of this document is subjected to the following limitations:

This document is the THALES AVIONICS property and contains proprietary and confidential
informations. This copy is furnished on the express condition that, neither wholly nor part of its
content herein, shall neither be reproduced, nor be disclosed to other party, nor be used without
the written permission of THALES AVIONICS. Moreover, this document shall be returned upon
request.

This document and any data included are the property of Thales Avionics. They cannot be reproduced, disclosed or utilized without the company’s prior written approval.

 THALES AVIONICS 2012

J61334BB - 00
 T FMS220 - USER'S MANUAL
List OF REVISIONS
Page 3

LIST OF REVISIONS

Issue Modified On Modified by Description Approval

BA00 31/05/2010 AKKA First issue for ATR-600 AMS/10/001760

(L. MAGNAT)

BA01 15/10/2010 N.R. FOURNY Second issue including the operational pilot procedures
with cockpit display impact and flight phase related
procedures. This issue takes into account:
- Remarks from ATR pilots and design authority
AMS/10/003757
- Remarks from ATR pilot (T. GRUFFAZ)
AMS/10/006591
- Remarks from peers and design authority
AMS/10/006184
- PCRs with user manual impact applied on the AVS
release L2B*: ABL V265 Issue
04
This document and any data included are the property of Thales Avionics. They cannot be reproduced, disclosed or utilized without the company’s prior written approval.

FM2XX00004543, FM2XX00004743, FM2XX00004786,

FM2XX00005038, FM2XX00005193, FM2XX00005218,
FM2XX00005233, FM2XX00005276, FM2XX00005278,
FM2XX00005315, FM2XX00005537, FM2XX00005538,
FM2XX00005595, FM2XX00005657

BB00 15/03/2012 L. PAILLET Third issue including User Manual Impacts applied on AMS/11/006800
release L2B-2, P/N Software G6225ABB09:
ABL V315 Issue
FM2XX00003070, FM2XX00004702, FM2XX00004795, 03
FM2XX00005292, FM2XX00006139, FM2XX00006487,
FM2XX00006496, FM2XX00006551, FM2XX00006602,
FM2XX00006603, FM2XX00006605, FM2XX00006706,
FM2XX00006756, FM2XX00006837, FM2XX00007220,
FM2XX00007659, FM2XX00007666, FM2XX00007928,
FM2XX00008002, FM2XX00008545, FM2XX00008604,
FM2XX00008705, FM2XX00008848, FM2XX00008897,
FM2XX00009088, FM2XX00009093, FM2XX00009244

 THALES AVIONICS 2012

J61334BB - 00
Page 4
FMS220 - USER'S MANUAL
TABLE OF CONTENTS
T

TABLE OF CONTENTS

1 SCOPE.............................................................................................................. 13
1.1 Document overview.............................................................................................................. 13
1.2 System overview .................................................................................................................. 14
1.3 System interfaces................................................................................................................. 15
1.3.1 General ............................................................................................................................ 15
1.3.2 Air Data Unit..................................................................................................................... 16
1.3.3 Attitude and Heading Reference System ........................................................................ 16
1.3.4 GPS configuration............................................................................................................ 16
1.3.5 Radio navigation architecture .......................................................................................... 16
1.4 Navigation modes ................................................................................................................ 17
1.5 Conventions ......................................................................................................................... 17

This document and any data included are the property of Thales Avionics. They cannot be reproduced, disclosed or utilized without the company’s prior written approval.
1.5.1 Text format....................................................................................................................... 17
1.5.1.1 Pilot's actions .......................................................................................................... 17
1.5.1.2 Cautions, notes and cockpit effect .......................................................................... 18
1.5.2 Supplementary information.............................................................................................. 18
1.5.3 Foreword.......................................................................................................................... 18
1.5.4 Terminology ..................................................................................................................... 18
2 OPERATIONAL PRINCIPLES.......................................................................... 19
2.1 Definitions............................................................................................................................. 19
2.1.1 Flight Area........................................................................................................................ 19
2.1.2 Flight Phase ..................................................................................................................... 21
2.1.3 VNAV section................................................................................................................... 23
2.1.4 Departure procedure........................................................................................................ 24
2.1.5 Arrival procedure ............................................................................................................. 25
2.1.6 Airways ............................................................................................................................ 25
2.1.7 Approach identification .................................................................................................... 27
2.1.8 Direct to............................................................................................................................ 28
2.1.8.1 Direct to fix .............................................................................................................. 29
2.1.8.2 Direct to abeam ....................................................................................................... 30
2.1.8.3 Direct to / Intercept.................................................................................................. 31
2.1.8.4 Direct to moving waypoint ....................................................................................... 32
2.1.9 Holding pattern ................................................................................................................ 33
2.1.10 Offset ........................................................................................................................... 35
2.1.11 Required Time of Arrival.............................................................................................. 35
2.1.12 Non Return Point (NRP) .............................................................................................. 35
2.1.13 Mark............................................................................................................................. 36

 THALES AVIONICS 2012

J61334BB - 00
 T FMS220 - USER'S MANUAL
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Page 5

2.1.14 Required Navigation Performance (RNP) ................................................................... 37

2.1.14.1 Actual Navigation performance (ANP)................................................................ 37
2.1.14.2 Horizontal Integrity Limit (HIL) ............................................................................ 39
2.2 Modes of operation .............................................................................................................. 39
2.2.1 Dual Mode........................................................................................................................ 40
2.2.2 Independent Mode........................................................................................................... 41
2.2.3 Single Mode ..................................................................................................................... 42
2.3 Flight management principles .............................................................................................. 43
2.3.1 Database.......................................................................................................................... 43
2.3.1.1 Standard data.......................................................................................................... 43
2.3.1.2 Pilot data ................................................................................................................. 43
2.3.1.3 Data harmonization ................................................................................................. 44
2.3.2 Flight planning ................................................................................................................. 44
2.3.2.1 General description ................................................................................................. 44
This document and any data included are the property of Thales Avionics. They cannot be reproduced, disclosed or utilized without the company’s prior written approval.

2.3.2.2 Active flight plan ...................................................................................................... 45

2.3.2.3 Temporary flight plan .............................................................................................. 45
2.3.2.4 Secondary flight plan............................................................................................... 47
2.3.2.5 Relations between flight plans ................................................................................ 48
2.3.3 Predictions ....................................................................................................................... 49
2.3.3.1 PRAIM ..................................................................................................................... 50
2.3.3.2 Wind Management .................................................................................................. 51
2.4 Flight guidance principles..................................................................................................... 53
2.4.1 Lateral navigation ............................................................................................................ 53
2.4.1.1 Lateral navigation parameters ................................................................................ 53
2.4.1.2 Waypoint Alert ......................................................................................................... 53
2.4.2 Vertical navigation ........................................................................................................... 54
2.4.2.1 Vertical navigation sections..................................................................................... 54
2.4.2.2 Climb profile ............................................................................................................ 54
2.4.2.3 Step and level interception...................................................................................... 55
2.4.2.4 Descent profile ........................................................................................................ 55
2.4.2.5 Vertical Track Alert.................................................................................................. 57
2.4.2.6 Altitude .................................................................................................................... 57
2.4.2.7 Vertical profile error................................................................................................. 58
2.4.2.8 Vertical navigation parameters ............................................................................... 59
2.4.3 Managed speed ............................................................................................................... 61
2.4.3.1 Managed speed inputs............................................................................................ 61
2.4.3.2 Managed speed phase............................................................................................ 62
2.4.3.3 Managed speed value............................................................................................. 63
2.5 Flight control principles ........................................................................................................ 68

 THALES AVIONICS 2012

J61334BB - 00
Page 6
FMS220 - USER'S MANUAL
TABLE OF CONTENTS
T

2.5.1 Autopilot engagement conditions .................................................................................... 68

2.5.2 Autopilot disengagement conditions ................................................................................ 68
2.5.3 Turn limitations ................................................................................................................ 69
3 PILOT INTERFACE .......................................................................................... 70
3.1 MCDU interface.................................................................................................................... 70
3.1.1 MENU page ..................................................................................................................... 71
3.1.2 Keys and annunciators description.................................................................................. 72
3.1.3 MCDU display description ............................................................................................... 74
3.1.4 Colors meaning................................................................................................................ 75
3.1.5 Character attributes meaning .......................................................................................... 76
3.1.6 Scratchpad messages ..................................................................................................... 77
3.1.7 Data entry ........................................................................................................................ 78
3.1.8 Clearing data ................................................................................................................... 79
3.2 MCDU pages hierarchy........................................................................................................ 80

This document and any data included are the property of Thales Avionics. They cannot be reproduced, disclosed or utilized without the company’s prior written approval.
3.2.1 General organisation ....................................................................................................... 80
3.2.2 INITIALIZATION .............................................................................................................. 80
3.2.3 FLIGHT PLAN.................................................................................................................. 83
3.2.4 PROGRESS..................................................................................................................... 90
3.2.5 DIRECT TO...................................................................................................................... 92
3.2.6 PERFORMANCES .......................................................................................................... 93
3.2.7 RADIO NAVIGATION ...................................................................................................... 95
3.2.8 MESSAGE ....................................................................................................................... 97
3.2.9 MARK............................................................................................................................... 98
3.2.10 DATA ........................................................................................................................... 98
3.2.11 STATUS .................................................................................................................... 103
3.3 MCDU pages description ................................................................................................... 106
3.3.1 INITIALIZATION ............................................................................................................ 106
3.3.1.1 Power On page ..................................................................................................... 106
3.3.1.2 INIT page............................................................................................................... 107
3.3.1.3 POS INIT page ...................................................................................................... 109
3.3.1.4 UNITS page .......................................................................................................... 110
3.3.1.5 DATUM page ........................................................................................................ 111
3.3.1.6 GEO DATUM page ............................................................................................... 112
3.3.2 FLIGHT PLAN................................................................................................................ 113
3.3.2.1 FPLN page ............................................................................................................ 113
3.3.2.2 FPLN INIT page .................................................................................................... 121
3.3.2.3 ROUTE SEL page................................................................................................. 122
3.3.2.4 SEC INIT page ...................................................................................................... 126
3.3.2.5 SEC FPLN page.................................................................................................... 127

 THALES AVIONICS 2012

J61334BB - 00
 T FMS220 - USER'S MANUAL
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Page 7

3.3.2.6 LTRL REV page at PPOS ..................................................................................... 128

3.3.2.7 LTRL REV page at WPT ....................................................................................... 129
3.3.2.8 VERT REV page ................................................................................................... 131
3.3.2.9 DEPARTURE page ............................................................................................... 133
3.3.2.10 ARRIVAL page ................................................................................................. 135
3.3.2.11 AIRWAY page................................................................................................... 137
3.3.2.12 AIRWAYS page ................................................................................................ 138
3.3.2.13 TO LIST page ................................................................................................... 140
3.3.2.14 WIND page ....................................................................................................... 141
3.3.2.15 HOLDING AT page........................................................................................... 143
3.3.3 PROGRESS................................................................................................................... 145
3.3.3.1 PROG 1/3 page..................................................................................................... 145
3.3.3.2 PROG 2/3 page..................................................................................................... 146
3.3.3.3 PROG 3/3 page..................................................................................................... 147
This document and any data included are the property of Thales Avionics. They cannot be reproduced, disclosed or utilized without the company’s prior written approval.

3.3.3.4 BCP NAV page ..................................................................................................... 148

3.3.3.5 GPS NAV page ..................................................................................................... 149
3.3.3.6 PRAIM 1/2 page .................................................................................................... 150
3.3.3.7 PRAIM 2/2 page .................................................................................................... 152
3.3.3.8 RESULT page ....................................................................................................... 153
3.3.3.9 VNAV page 1/2 ..................................................................................................... 155
3.3.3.10 VNAV page 2/2 ................................................................................................. 156
3.3.4 DIRECT TO.................................................................................................................... 157
3.3.4.1 DIRECT TO page (LIST)....................................................................................... 157
3.3.4.2 DIRECT TO page.................................................................................................. 159
3.3.4.3 DTO ABEAM page ................................................................................................ 160
3.3.4.4 DIRECT TO page (moving WPT).......................................................................... 162
3.3.5 PERFORMANCES ........................................................................................................ 162
3.3.5.1 PERF INIT page .................................................................................................... 162
3.3.5.2 WEIGHT page ....................................................................................................... 165
3.3.5.3 TAKE OFF page.................................................................................................... 167
3.3.5.4 CRUISE page........................................................................................................ 169
3.3.5.5 APPROACH page ................................................................................................. 171
3.3.5.6 SEC PERF page ................................................................................................... 172
3.3.6 RADIO NAVIGATION .................................................................................................... 173
3.3.6.1 NAV FRQ page ..................................................................................................... 173
3.3.6.2 NEAREST page .................................................................................................... 175
3.3.6.3 DESELECTED NAVAIDS page ............................................................................ 176
3.3.7 MESSAGE ..................................................................................................................... 177
3.3.7.1 MESSAGE page ................................................................................................... 177

 THALES AVIONICS 2012

J61334BB - 00
Page 8
FMS220 - USER'S MANUAL
TABLE OF CONTENTS
T

3.3.8 MARK............................................................................................................................. 178

3.3.8.1 MARK page ........................................................................................................... 178
3.3.9 DATA ............................................................................................................................. 180
3.3.9.1 DATA MENU page ................................................................................................ 180
3.3.9.2 NAV DATA page ................................................................................................... 181
3.3.9.3 DATABASE page .................................................................................................. 182
3.3.9.4 STD APT page ...................................................................................................... 183
3.3.9.5 STD NAVAID page................................................................................................ 184
3.3.9.6 STD WPT page ..................................................................................................... 185
3.3.9.7 STD NDB page ..................................................................................................... 186
3.3.9.8 STD DATA page (CO-ROUTE)............................................................................. 187
3.3.9.9 PILOT DATA page (AIRPORTS) .......................................................................... 188
3.3.9.10 PLT APT page .................................................................................................. 189
3.3.9.11 PILOT DATA page (NAVAIDS) ........................................................................ 190

This document and any data included are the property of Thales Avionics. They cannot be reproduced, disclosed or utilized without the company’s prior written approval.
3.3.9.12 PLT NAVAID page............................................................................................ 191
3.3.9.13 PILOT DATA page (WAYPOINTS)................................................................... 192
3.3.9.14 PLT WPT page ................................................................................................. 193
3.3.9.15 PILOT DATA page (ROUTE)............................................................................ 195
3.3.9.16 PLT ROUTE page............................................................................................. 196
3.3.9.17 DATA LIST page............................................................................................... 199
3.3.9.18 NEW DATA page.............................................................................................. 200
3.3.9.19 DUPLICATE page............................................................................................. 201
3.3.10 STATUS .................................................................................................................... 202
3.3.10.1 FUEL FLOW page ............................................................................................ 202
3.3.10.2 SENSOR STS page.......................................................................................... 203
3.3.10.3 FMS BITE page ................................................................................................ 204
3.3.10.4 DISCRETES page ............................................................................................ 206
3.3.10.5 AIR / RA page................................................................................................... 207
3.3.10.6 HDG / ATT page ............................................................................................... 208
4 FLIGHT PHASE RELATED PROCEDURES .................................................. 210
4.1 Preflight .............................................................................................................................. 210
4.1.1 FMS Initialization ........................................................................................................... 210
4.1.1.1 Power-on ............................................................................................................... 210
4.1.1.2 Date/Time Initialization.......................................................................................... 211
4.1.1.3 Position initialization.............................................................................................. 212
4.1.1.4 Checking navigation database .............................................................................. 214
4.1.1.5 Checking units....................................................................................................... 215
4.1.1.6 Navigation mode selection .................................................................................... 215
4.1.2 Navigation initialization .................................................................................................. 218

 THALES AVIONICS 2012

J61334BB - 00
 T FMS220 - USER'S MANUAL
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Page 9

4.1.2.1 Primary flight plan setup........................................................................................ 218

4.1.2.1.1 Flight plan selection ......................................................................................... 218
4.1.2.1.2 Flight plan initialization..................................................................................... 219
4.1.2.1.3 Selecting a departure....................................................................................... 223
4.1.2.1.4 Selecting an arrival .......................................................................................... 225
4.1.2.1.5 Inserting an airway........................................................................................... 227
4.1.2.2 Secondary flight plan setup................................................................................... 232
4.1.2.3 Radio Navigation................................................................................................... 234
4.1.2.3.1 NAV FRQ page ................................................................................................ 234
4.1.2.3.2 Deselecting navaids......................................................................................... 235
4.1.2.3.3 Reselecting navaids......................................................................................... 236
4.1.3 Performances initialization............................................................................................. 236
4.1.3.1 Initialization............................................................................................................ 236
4.1.3.2 Weight entering ..................................................................................................... 238
This document and any data included are the property of Thales Avionics. They cannot be reproduced, disclosed or utilized without the company’s prior written approval.

4.1.3.3 Take Off performances ......................................................................................... 239

4.1.3.4 Cruise performances............................................................................................. 243
4.1.3.5 Vertical wind profile insertion ................................................................................ 244
4.1.3.6 Secondary performances initialization .................................................................. 246
4.1.4 Checking the predictions ............................................................................................... 247
4.2 Take off and climb.............................................................................................................. 247
4.2.1 Monitoring the take-off ................................................................................................... 248
4.2.2 Monitoring the vertical guidance .................................................................................... 249
4.2.3 Monitoring the predictions.............................................................................................. 250
4.2.4 Monitoring the transition altitude.................................................................................... 250
4.2.5 Monitoring the vertical Track.......................................................................................... 251
4.3 Cruise ................................................................................................................................. 251
4.3.1 Cruise altitude ................................................................................................................ 252
4.3.2 Monitoring the predictions.............................................................................................. 252
4.3.3 Entering a step climb or a step descent ........................................................................ 254
4.3.4 Monitoring the vertical track (during a step) .................................................................. 255
4.3.5 Entering the approach data ........................................................................................... 256
4.4 Descent .............................................................................................................................. 257
4.4.1 Descent initiation ........................................................................................................... 257
4.4.2 Monitoring the transition level ........................................................................................ 258
4.4.3 Monitoring the vertical guidance .................................................................................... 258
4.4.4 Monitoring the vertical track........................................................................................... 259
4.4.5 Monitoring the predictions.............................................................................................. 260
4.4.6 Inserting a holding pattern ............................................................................................. 261
4.4.7 Entering the approach flight area .................................................................................. 263

 THALES AVIONICS 2012

J61334BB - 00
Page 10
FMS220 - USER'S MANUAL
TABLE OF CONTENTS
T

4.5 Approach ............................................................................................................................ 263

4.5.1 Vertical Track Alert ........................................................................................................ 263
4.5.2 Initiating the approach speed ........................................................................................ 264
4.5.3 Monitoring the vertical guidance .................................................................................... 265
4.6 Go around .......................................................................................................................... 266
4.6.1 Missed approach ........................................................................................................... 266
4.7 Done................................................................................................................................... 267
5 MULTI PHASE RELATED PROCEDURES .................................................... 268
5.1 Lateral functions ................................................................................................................. 268
5.1.1 Flight plan revision......................................................................................................... 268
5.1.1.1 Revision of a departure procedure........................................................................ 268
5.1.1.2 Revision of an arrival procedure ........................................................................... 269
5.1.1.3 Inserting a Waypoint ............................................................................................. 270
5.1.1.3.1 LAT/LON crossing ........................................................................................... 274

This document and any data included are the property of Thales Avionics. They cannot be reproduced, disclosed or utilized without the company’s prior written approval.
5.1.1.3.2 Along Track Offset ........................................................................................... 275
5.1.1.4 Clearing a Waypoint.............................................................................................. 276
5.1.1.5 Inserting a discontinuity......................................................................................... 277
5.1.1.6 Clearing a discontinuity ......................................................................................... 278
5.1.2 Secondary Flight Plan.................................................................................................... 278
5.1.2.1 Secondary flight plan initialization ......................................................................... 278
5.1.2.2 Copy active Flight plan in the secondary flight plan.............................................. 279
5.1.2.3 Activation of the secondary Flight plan ................................................................. 279
5.1.2.4 Swap of the active and of secondary flight plan ................................................... 280
5.1.2.5 Cancellation of the secondary flight plan .............................................................. 280
5.1.2.6 Secondary performances initialization .................................................................. 280
5.1.3 Monitoring the horizontal guidance................................................................................ 281
5.1.4 Holding pattern .............................................................................................................. 282
5.1.4.1 Inserting a holding pattern..................................................................................... 282
5.1.4.2 Editing a holding pattern ....................................................................................... 282
5.1.4.3 Exiting from a holding pattern ............................................................................... 283
5.1.4.4 Clearing a holding pattern ..................................................................................... 283
5.1.5 Offset ............................................................................................................................. 284
5.1.5.1 Offset insertion or modification.............................................................................. 284
5.1.5.2 Offset deletion ....................................................................................................... 286
5.1.6 Direct to.......................................................................................................................... 287
5.1.6.1 Direct to waypoint.................................................................................................. 287
5.1.6.1.1 The "TO" WPT is in the FPLN ......................................................................... 287
5.1.6.1.2 The "TO" WPT does not belong to the FPLN .................................................. 288
5.1.6.1.3 The "TO" WPT is moving................................................................................. 289

 THALES AVIONICS 2012

J61334BB - 00
 T FMS220 - USER'S MANUAL
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Page 11

5.1.6.2 Direct to closest airport ......................................................................................... 290

5.1.6.3 Direct to abeam point ............................................................................................ 291
5.1.6.4 Direct to / Intercept................................................................................................ 293
5.1.7 Mark ............................................................................................................................... 294
5.1.7.1 Marking the present position ................................................................................. 294
5.1.7.2 Updating the position ............................................................................................ 295
5.1.8 RNP insertion................................................................................................................. 296
5.1.9 Predictive RAIM ............................................................................................................. 297
5.1.9.1 Launching the RAIM prediction along the flight plan ............................................ 297
5.1.9.2 Canceling the predictive RAIM computation ......................................................... 299
5.2 Vertical functions ................................................................................................................ 299
5.2.1 Monitoring the vertical guidance .................................................................................... 299
5.2.2 RTA insertion or modification......................................................................................... 300
5.2.3 Constraint insertion or modification ............................................................................... 302
This document and any data included are the property of Thales Avionics. They cannot be reproduced, disclosed or utilized without the company’s prior written approval.

5.2.4 Vertical wind profile modification ................................................................................... 303

5.3 Other functions ................................................................................................................... 305
5.3.1 Radio Navigation ........................................................................................................... 305
5.3.1.1 Navaid Manual Tuning .......................................................................................... 305
5.3.1.2 Navaid Autotuning................................................................................................. 305
5.3.1.3 Deselecting navaids .............................................................................................. 306
5.3.1.4 Reselecting navaids .............................................................................................. 306
5.3.2 Database operation ....................................................................................................... 307
5.3.2.1 Creation, modification, deletion, rename of pilot data........................................... 307
5.3.2.2 Pilot route creation ................................................................................................ 309
5.3.2.3 Pilot route modification.......................................................................................... 312
5.3.2.4 Saving data ........................................................................................................... 313
5.3.2.5 Standard database selection................................................................................. 313
6 ABNORMAL PROCEDURES ......................................................................... 316
6.1 Failures............................................................................................................................... 316
6.1.1 List of message codes ................................................................................................... 316
6.1.2 Meaning of alert messages............................................................................................ 318
6.1.2.1 AIM ........................................................................................................................ 318
6.1.2.2 AIR ........................................................................................................................ 318
6.1.2.3 APP ....................................................................................................................... 319
6.1.2.4 CFG....................................................................................................................... 319
6.1.2.5 CMD ...................................................................................................................... 320
6.1.2.6 CTK ....................................................................................................................... 321
6.1.2.7 DTA ....................................................................................................................... 323
6.1.2.8 FAL........................................................................................................................ 323

 THALES AVIONICS 2012

J61334BB - 00
Page 12
FMS220 - USER'S MANUAL
TABLE OF CONTENTS
T

6.1.2.9 FFF........................................................................................................................ 324

6.1.2.10 FMS .................................................................................................................. 324
6.1.2.11 FPL ................................................................................................................... 325
6.1.2.12 GPS .................................................................................................................. 325
6.1.2.13 HDG .................................................................................................................. 325
6.1.2.14 HIL .................................................................................................................... 325
6.1.2.15 INI ..................................................................................................................... 326
6.1.2.16 ISA .................................................................................................................... 326
6.1.2.17 LAB ................................................................................................................... 326
6.1.2.18 POS .................................................................................................................. 327
6.1.2.19 R/N.................................................................................................................... 328
6.1.2.20 RNP .................................................................................................................. 328
6.1.2.21 VAR................................................................................................................... 329
6.1.2.22 WGT.................................................................................................................. 330

This document and any data included are the property of Thales Avionics. They cannot be reproduced, disclosed or utilized without the company’s prior written approval.
6.2 Operational Checking......................................................................................................... 330
6.2.1 Performing FMS resynchronization ............................................................................... 330
6.2.2 Checking procedures..................................................................................................... 331
6.2.2.1 Checking sensors.................................................................................................. 331
6.2.2.2 Uploading configuration data ................................................................................ 331
6.2.2.3 Downloading of FMS status .................................................................................. 332
7 MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES.................................................................... 333
7.1 Standard data maintenance ............................................................................................... 333
7.1.1 Uploading navigation database ..................................................................................... 333
7.2 Company routes maintenance ........................................................................................... 334
7.2.1 Company route list......................................................................................................... 334
7.2.2 Review of a company route ........................................................................................... 335
7.2.3 Editing a company route ................................................................................................ 337
7.2.3.1 Deleting a company route ..................................................................................... 338
7.2.3.2 Modifying a company route ................................................................................... 338
7.2.3.3 Creating a company route..................................................................................... 339
7.3 User data maintenance ...................................................................................................... 340
7.3.1 Erasing user data........................................................................................................... 340
8 ACRONYMS AND ABBREVIATIONS ............................................................ 341

 THALES AVIONICS 2012

J61334BB - 00
 T FMS220 - USER'S MANUAL
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Page 13

1 SCOPE

1.1 DOCUMENT OVERVIEW

The aim of the present user manual is to provide a general description of the flight management
principles, the interface between the user and the Flight Management System, the operational
procedures to be applied by crews during normal and abnormal situations that may occur on ground,
and in flight and maintenance procedures to be applied by skilled users to perform basic maintenance
operations.

The user manual is applied on:

Flight Management System

System
FMS 220
Abbreviation
This document and any data included are the property of Thales Avionics. They cannot be reproduced, disclosed or utilized without the company’s prior written approval.

ATR
Program
G6225ABB09
P/N FMS 220

The document is composed of the following chapters:

§ Title Object

Overview of the system and description of the document

1 SCOPE
structure and presentation rules
OPERATIONAL Description of the FMS operational principles and
2 definitions of the main concepts
PRINCIPLES
Description of the pilot interface on the MCDU including
3 PILOT INTERFACE
hierarchy and detailed description of the pages
FLIGHT PHASE RELATED Description of the pilot operational procedures related to
4
PROCEDURES flight phases
MULTI PHASE RELATED Description of the pilot operational procedures that are not
5
PROCEDURES related to a specific flight phase
ABNORMAL Description of the alarm messages, operational checking
6
PROCEDURES procedures and analysing status
MAINTENANCE Description of the maintenance procedures and technical
7
PROCEDURES information for skilled users

8 GLOSSARY Glossary

 THALES AVIONICS 2012

J61334BB - 00
Page 14
FMS220 - USER'S MANUAL
TABLE OF CONTENTS
T

1.2 SYSTEM OVERVIEW

The FMS is a pilot interactive system which provides the following main functions:
− Multi-sensor localisation.
− Flight planning.
− Guidance (lateral & vertical).
− Database management.
− Radio navigation.
− Performances management.
− Predictions.

The FMS is composed of :

Software application (called FMC in this document) located in the IAD.

Pilot interfaces:
− MCDU with dual capability (2 MCDU for 1 FMC)
− MFD, PFD (display only)

This document and any data included are the property of Thales Avionics. They cannot be reproduced, disclosed or utilized without the company’s prior written approval.

Data transfer media (Compact Flash memory) including:
− Navigation data (standard, company and pilot databases)
− Secondary flight plan
− Magnetic variation model
Note: Configuration data (performances and FM configuration) are managed at IAD level.

OPERATIONAL DOMAIN

Coordinates:
− Performances of navigation are guaranteed in the range:
♦ Latitude: [S89, N89],
♦ Longitude: no restriction [W180, E180].
− UTM or MGRS coordinates are limited to the range:
♦ Latitude: [S80, N84],
♦ Longitude: no restriction [W180, E180].

Ground Speed (GS) max: 750 kts

Altitude: [-1500 ft, 65000 ft]

Temperature: [-60 °C, 99 °C]

 THALES AVIONICS 2012

J61334BB - 00
 T FMS220 - USER'S MANUAL
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Page 15

1.3 SYSTEM INTERFACES

1.3.1 GENERAL
The FMS is built on a dual cockpit system architecture and is designed to operate in dual mode to
insure that both FMC are continuously synchronized.

PFD1 MFD1 MFD2 PFD2

ARINC 661
This document and any data included are the property of Thales Avionics. They cannot be reproduced, disclosed or utilized without the company’s prior written approval.

Compact Compact
Flash FMC1 FMC2 Flash
Cross Talk

ARINC 739

SENSORS1 SENSORS2

MDCU1 MDCU2

In the cockpit, switches enable to set the mode of reversion for the air data parameters source and
for the attitude and heading parameters source.

The normal reversion means that each FMC uses and manages data from its own side sources for its
navigation computations. If the own side equipment is failed, the FMC will automatically use the
equipment of the opposite side. In case the reversion is both on 1 (respectively both on 2), both FMC
receive the same source side 1 (respectively side 2), even if data provided by this equipment is
invalid.

Note: For other sensors, no reversion is managed at cockpit level.

 THALES AVIONICS 2012

J61334BB - 00
Page 16
FMS220 - USER'S MANUAL
TABLE OF CONTENTS
T

1.3.2 AIR DATA UNIT

The FMC handles two Air Data Units (dual configuration) to provide the air data primary parameters
(air speed, air temperature and baro altitude). In case of reversion at cockpit level, the FMC select the
air data source according to the selected reversion. Without reversion at cockpit level, the air data
source is the own side ADU if the air data parameters are valid, the opposite side otherwise.

1.3.3 ATTITUDE AND HEADING REFERENCE SYSTEM

The FMC handles two AHRS (dual configuration) to provide attitude and heading primary parameters
(attitude angles & magnetic heading). In case of reversion at cockpit level, the FMC select the attitude
and heading source according to the selected reversion. Without reversion at cockpit level, the attitude
and heading source is the own side AHRS if the attitude and heading parameters are valid, the
opposite side otherwise.

1.3.4 GPS CONFIGURATION

The FMS handles GPS as localization source.

This document and any data included are the property of Thales Avionics. They cannot be reproduced, disclosed or utilized without the company’s prior written approval.
GPS source is the own side GPS if GPS parameters are valid, the opposite side otherwise.

1.3.5 RADIO NAVIGATION ARCHITECTURE

For localization function, FMC handles 2 VOR and 3 - channels DME radio navigation receivers.

FMC also handles 2 ADF receivers.

Each FMC can manage the radio navigation receivers but commands are only transmitted by the
active FMC to the radio navigation receivers.

Note: The active FMC features the FMC coupled with the autopilot.

 THALES AVIONICS 2012

J61334BB - 00
 T FMS220 - USER'S MANUAL
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Page 17

1.4 NAVIGATION MODES

The following navigation modes are available:

− BCP, Best Computed Position (selected by default).
− GPS, Global Positioning System.
Each one provides:
− Horizontal position, latitude and longitude.
− Ground speed.
− Track Angle.
− Speed and origin of the wind.
Navigation computations are done in WGS84 datum reference, and so Standard and Pilot data are
assumed to be defined in WGS84 reference.

The BCP parameters are calculated by a specific filter weighted by the estimated errors, of the values
provided by different sources.

The sources used by the BCP computation are:

This document and any data included are the property of Thales Avionics. They cannot be reproduced, disclosed or utilized without the company’s prior written approval.

− GPS of selected side.

− Radio navigation receivers: 2 VOR, 3 - channels DME.
Note: The BCP backup mode, DR mode (Dead reckoning), is automatically triggered when there is
neither ground speed nor position available. In that case, TAS, heading and wind information are
used.

1.5 CONVENTIONS

1.5.1 TEXT FORMAT

1.5.1.1 Pilot's actions

 Highlights a precondition to apply an action (IF).

 Hilghlights the moment when the action is to be applied (WHEN).

Highlights an action from the user (DO). All of the pilot's actions in this guide are
presented with a verb. These actions are written using a bold font.

When its has been considered nice to give further information which may be of interest about the
current step of the followed procedure, this is identified by an additional comment below the action
written using a basic font.

 THALES AVIONICS 2012

J61334BB - 00
Page 18
FMS220 - USER'S MANUAL
TABLE OF CONTENTS
T

1.5.1.2 Cautions, notes and cockpit effect

Note: When its has been considered necessary to include a note for example to give further
information about the current step of the followed procedure, this is identified by a Note indication and
the text is written in italic.

CAUTION: When it has been considered necessary to include a caution for example to
advise of the consequences of an incorrect action, this is identified by a CAUTION indication
and the text is written with a amber font.

COCKPIT: When the followed procedure has a cockpit impact,

this is identified by a COCKPIT indication and the text is written in
magenta.

1.5.2 SUPPLEMENTARY INFORMATION

This document and any data included are the property of Thales Avionics. They cannot be reproduced, disclosed or utilized without the company’s prior written approval.
The "PILOT INTERFACE" chapter describes the user interface with all the details (nice to know).

The FLIGHT PHASE RELATED PROCEDURES and the MULTI PHASE RELATED PROCEDURES
described the essential information needed for operational use of the FMS (need to know).

The ABNORMAL PROCEDURES are described with all the details necessary for an operational or not
operational use of the Flight Management System.

The MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES are described with all the details necessary for the maintenance
of the Flight Management System by a skilled operator.

1.5.3 FOREWORD

CAUTION: In the MCDU examples: Some parameters values displayed may be not
representative of operational functioning. Positions (and associated commentaries) are given
in Geographical coordinates (latitude and longitude).

1.5.4 TERMINOLOGY
In the present document some terms may be used with a extended signification (versus database
organization for example):

The term "Waypoint" is not used only for the database fixes but also to describe the pseudo-
waypoints or temporary waypoints computed by the FMC to built path, flight plan, and vertical
profile.

 THALES AVIONICS 2012

J61334BB - 00
 T FMS220 - USER'S MANUAL
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Page 19

2 OPERATIONAL PRINCIPLES

2.1 DEFINITIONS

2.1.1 FLIGHT AREA

The FMC manages the following flight areas:
− Enroute
− Terminal
− Approach

Direct distance A/C to Departure < 30Nm

Standard Altitude < 15000ft above Departure
This document and any data included are the property of Thales Avionics. They cannot be reproduced, disclosed or utilized without the company’s prior written approval.

OR Missed approach activated

Direct distance A/C to DEST < 30Nm (direct to missed approach fix or go-
Standard Altitude < 15000ft above DEST around)

Terminal area En route area Terminal area Approach area Terminal area

FAF Go-around

2Nm

Departure airport Destination airport

Neither departure airport nor DEST airport Approach procedure selected

OR Distance along track A/C to FAF < 2Nm
Direct distance A/C to Departure > 30Nm XTK < 0.3Nm
Standard Altitude > 16000ft above Departure TKE < 90°
AND Integrity criteria: true
Direct distance A/C to DEST > 30Nm
Standard Altitude > 16000ft above DEST

 THALES AVIONICS 2012

J61334BB - 00
Page 20
FMS220 - USER'S MANUAL
TABLE OF CONTENTS
T

The "enroute" flight area becomes "terminal" when one of the following conditions is met:

The direct distance from aircraft to departure airport is smaller than 30 NM and the aircraft
standard altitude is smaller than 15 000 feet above departure airport (converted into a standard
altitude).

The direct distance from aircraft to destination airport is smaller than 30 NM and the aircraft
standard altitude is smaller than 15 000 feet above destination airport (converted into a standard
altitude).

Note: Therefore, at take-off, the flight area is "terminal"

The flight area becomes "approach" when all the following conditions are met:

A Final Approach Fix (FAF) exists in the flight plan (either an approach procedure has been
selected or the fix preceding destination is located less than 10NM in direct distance from
destination), and,

The along track distance between the aircraft and the FAF is smaller than 2 NM, and,

This document and any data included are the property of Thales Avionics. They cannot be reproduced, disclosed or utilized without the company’s prior written approval.

The geometry aircraft/procedure is acceptable: lateral error (XTK) smaller than 0.3 NM and
angular error (TKE) less than 90 degrees, and,

the GPS is used in aircraft position computation and GPS HIL is smaller than 0.3 NM and HIL is
predicted to be available at FAF (Final Approach Fix) and MAP (Missed Approach Point) and lower
than 0.3 NM (GPS integrity criteria), or, the radionavigation data are used in aircraft position
computation and EPE_radio is smaller than 0.5 NM (radionav integrity criteria).

The "approach" flight area becomes "terminal" if the missed approach procedure is activated.

The flight area becomes "enroute" when there is nor departure neither destination airport or if both
following conditions are verified:

the direct distance from aircraft to departure airport is greater than 30 NM or the aircraft standard
altitude is greater than 16 000 feet above departure airport (converted into a standard altitude)

the direct distance from aircraft to destination airport is greater than 30 NM or the aircraft standard
altitude is greater than 16 000 feet above destination airport (converted into a standard altitude)

Note: At power up or when a new flight plan is activated, the flight area is "enroute".

 THALES AVIONICS 2012

J61334BB - 00
 T FMS220 - USER'S MANUAL
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Page 21

2.1.2 FLIGHT PHASE

The FMC manages the following flight phases: Ground, Take-off, Climb, Descent, Approach and
Go around according to the following logic:

Direct distance to DEST < 10Nm

Active leg ∈ Approach
Take-off OR TO = DEST
phase

Ground Climb Cruise Descent Approach Go-around

phase phase phase phase phase phase

TOD

TOC Go-around

1500ft
This document and any data included are the property of Thales Avionics. They cannot be reproduced, disclosed or utilized without the company’s prior written approval.

Approach
procedure
Departure airport Destination airport

10Nm

WOW = Ground Not another flight phase

Radio Alt. < 5m DEST or approach procedure modified
New FPLN
DTO a missed approach fix

 THALES AVIONICS 2012

J61334BB - 00
Page 22
FMS220 - USER'S MANUAL
TABLE OF CONTENTS
T

FMC determines the flight phase by testing the following conditions, in that priority order, until one is
satisfied. At power up, the flight phase is "ground" if condition applies, otherwise is "cruise".

The flight phase is "ground" when Weight On Wheel (WOW) discrete status is "GROUND" and
aircraft radio height is less than 5 m (or invalid)

The flight phase is "take-off" when the aircraft altitude is less than 1500 ft above the take off
altitude.

The flight phase is "climb" when the aircraft is located before or at the Top Of Climb (TOC) in the
flight plan.

The flight phase is "descent" when the aircraft is located at or after the Top Of Descent (TOD) in
the flight plan.

The flight phase is "approach" when:

− The direct distance to the destination airport is smaller than 10 NM, and,
− The flight plan active leg is part of an approach procedure to the destination airport, or the
TO waypoint is the destination airport.

This document and any data included are the property of Thales Avionics. They cannot be reproduced, disclosed or utilized without the company’s prior written approval.

The flight phase is "go around" when the crew has engaged the Go Around mode.

The flight phase is "cruise" if one of the following conditions is met:

− None of the other flight phases conditions is met
− Destination or approach procedure is modified
− A new FPLN is initiated
− A DTO a missed approach fix is performed

 THALES AVIONICS 2012

J61334BB - 00
 T FMS220 - USER'S MANUAL
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Page 23

2.1.3 VNAV SECTION

The FMC manages the following VNAV sections: Climb, Cruise, Cruise climb, Cruise descent and
Descent

After TOC ALT SEL = ALT ALT SEL = ALT AP go-around After TOC

Climb Cruise Cruise Cruise Cruise Cruise Descent Climb Cruise

climb descent

TOC TOD

TOC

Go-around
This document and any data included are the property of Thales Avionics. They cannot be reproduced, disclosed or utilized without the company’s prior written approval.

Departure Destination

WOW = GND
Or Before TOC ALT SEL > ALT ALT SEL < ALT After TOD ALT SEL > ALT

 THALES AVIONICS 2012

J61334BB - 00
Page 24
FMS220 - USER'S MANUAL
TABLE OF CONTENTS
T

2.1.4 DEPARTURE PROCEDURE

A departure procedure is composed of 3 elements:
− Runway (RWY)
− Standard Instrument Departure (SID)
− Enroute Transition (TRANS) between the SID and the route.
The figure below illustrates the RWY, SID, TRANS and route sequence of legs. In case of overlapping
legs, between SID and TRANS or TRANS and route, some legs may be suppressed due to stringing
rules application (automatic stringing with common waypoint, discontinuity otherwise).

TRANS

search search

This document and any data included are the property of Thales Avionics. They cannot be reproduced, disclosed or utilized without the company’s prior written approval.
RWY

RWY
SID ROUTE

If a discontinuity exists in the procedure, the discontinuity should be cleared manually.

CAUTION: Before clearing a discontinuity, the leg stringing has to be checked to avoid
having inconsistent FPLN.

Example: After clearing a discontinuity, a go back to the previous trajectory could exist in the FPLN.

 THALES AVIONICS 2012

J61334BB - 00
 T FMS220 - USER'S MANUAL
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Page 25

2.1.5 ARRIVAL PROCEDURE

An arrival procedure is composed of 4 elements:
− Approach (APP).
− Approach Transition (VIA) between the STAR and the approach.
− Standard Terminal Arrival Route (STAR)
− Enroute STAR Transition (TRANS) between the STAR and the route.
The figure below illustrates the route, TRANS, STAR, VIA and APP sequence of legs. In case of
overlapping legs, between VIA and APP or VIA and STAR or TRANS and STAR or TRANS and route,
some legs may be suppressed due to stringing rules application (automatic stringing with common
waypoint, discontinuity otherwise).

ROUTE STAR APP

This document and any data included are the property of Thales Avionics. They cannot be reproduced, disclosed or utilized without the company’s prior written approval.

search search

RWY

search

TRANS VIA

If a discontinuity exists in the procedure, the discontinuity should be cleared manually.

CAUTION: Before clearing a discontinuity, the leg stringing has to be checked to avoid
having inconsistent FPLN.

Example: After clearing a discontinuity, a go back to the previous trajectory could exist in the FPLN.

2.1.6 AIRWAYS
An airway segment is a sequence of legs from a FROM fix to a TO fix, belonging to an airway defined
in standard database. Inserting an airway segment into a flight plan needs the identification of the
airway, an entry waypoint (FROM fix) and an exit waypoint (TO fix). The FROM fix is the waypoint of
the flight plan where to insert the airway segment. This fix must belong to the flight plan and to the
airway. The TO fix is the waypoint of the airway where to stop the airway segment to insert. This fix
can be a waypoint that exists in the flight plan or that does not exist in the flight plan. In that case, a
discontinuity will appear. See examples below.

 THALES AVIONICS 2012

J61334BB - 00
Page 26
FMS220 - USER'S MANUAL
TABLE OF CONTENTS
T

Example: TO fix (D point) exists in the flight plan

AWY

D D
C

FPLN FPLN

A A
B E B E

Example: TO fix (F point) does not exist in the flight plan

This document and any data included are the property of Thales Avionics. They cannot be reproduced, disclosed or utilized without the company’s prior written approval.
AWY F F

D Discontinuity D
C C

FPLN FPLN

A A
B E B E

ARINC 424 defines three "levels" of enroute airways. These levels are relative to the Flight Information
Region and Upper Information Region of airspace with defined dimensions within which Flight
Information Service and alerting service are provided:

High level Airways: Routes that exist only in the "Upper Airspace", or officially designated as
"Upper" or "High", or routes that must be charted as high level routes.

Low level Airways: Routes that exist only in the "Lower Airspace", or routes that must be charted
in lower airspace only.

Both level Airways: Routes that are not defined into either the upper or lower airspace, or routes
that exists without a "level designator", or routes that exist in a structure that has Upper and Lower
Airspace.

 THALES AVIONICS 2012

J61334BB - 00
 T FMS220 - USER'S MANUAL
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Page 27

2.1.7 APPROACH IDENTIFICATION

The 3 first characters describe the type of approach:
− FMS: Flight Management System
− GLS: GNSS Landing System
− GPS: Global Positioning System
− IGS: Instrument Guidance System
− ILS: Instrument Landing System
− LBC: Localizer / Backcourse
− LDA: Localizer Directional Aid
− LOC: Localizer Only
− MLS: Microwave Landing System
− NDB: Non-Directional Beacon
− NDM: Non-Directional Beacon + DME (NDB+DME)
− RNV: Area Navigation (RNAV)
− SDF: Simplified Directional Facility
− TAC: TACAN
− VDM: VOR / DME
− VOR: VOR or VOR using VORDME / VORTAC
This document and any data included are the property of Thales Avionics. They cannot be reproduced, disclosed or utilized without the company’s prior written approval.

The 3 following characters describe the runway identification: runway axis in tens of degrees
followed by a character.

Example: 04R

The last character is the multiple indicator: Z or Y or "Blank"

Example: RNV04RZ = Charted approach 'RNAV (GPS) Z RWY 4R'

Note:
a) All the approaches are not identified according to the format described here above. Other
formats also exist.

Example: VOR-A approach

b) In ROUTE SELECT, IFR FPLN, PLT ROUTE and CO-ROUTE pages, approaches are
displayed on 6 char. If the last character (multiple indicator) of the approach is empty, the last
char is removed. Else, the type of approach is represented by 2 char (the third char of the
approach type is removed).

Example: 'RNV08LZ' is displayed on ARRIVAL page and 'RN08LZ' is displayed on ROUTE SELECT
page.

 THALES AVIONICS 2012

J61334BB - 00
Page 28
FMS220 - USER'S MANUAL
TABLE OF CONTENTS
T

2.1.8 DIRECT TO
This function enables to define a "direct" trajectory from the present position to a specified waypoint or
to engage a rally navigation.

The DIRECT TO function provides the following services:

Basic DIR TO function to define a direct trajectory from the present position to a specified
waypoint.

DIR TO/ABEAM function to define the abeam waypoints along the direct path. These waypoints
are the projection on the direct path of the initial FPLN waypoints located between the aircraft
position and the specified waypoint.

DIR TO/INTCP function allowing the definition of a specified RADIAL INBOUND inserted
waypoint. The current aircraft track is used to compute the INTCPT point with the specified radial.

Note: DIRECT TO function is not allowed if A/C position, A/C track or A/C ground speed is invalid.

The DIRECT TO trajectory is computed as following:

This document and any data included are the property of Thales Avionics. They cannot be reproduced, disclosed or utilized without the company’s prior written approval.

If the distance from the Turn Center to the specified waypoint is lower than the turn radius and if
|Xf - A/C track| < 60 deg (see next figure), the trajectory computed is a segment from the A/C
position to the specified waypoint position.

where Xf is the bearing from A/C position to the specified waypoint position.

Else if the current speed does not allow to complete the turn before reaching the TO waypoint
(see next figure), the trajectory is computed with a "delayed" turn.

Else the "direct" trajectory is computed with a "direct" turn of track variation angle.

Segment from
A/C to WPT

Else,
“Direct” turn

Turn
PPOS Center
Turn Radius
“Delayed” turn

 THALES AVIONICS 2012

J61334BB - 00
 T FMS220 - USER'S MANUAL
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Page 29

Direct To WPT1

WPT1

WPT1

PPOS
WPT1
PPOS PPOS

Segment from A/C to WPT1 “Direct” turn “Delayed” turn

DIRECT TO trajectory (example)

2.1.8.1 Direct to fix

This document and any data included are the property of Thales Avionics. They cannot be reproduced, disclosed or utilized without the company’s prior written approval.

This function enables to define a trajectory from the present position to a selected waypoint, which can
be part of the flight plan, or selected from the navigation database, or defined by its position; or to
engage a rally navigation (to rally a moving waypoint).

The "TO" waypoint may be entered by its identifier (if it is stored in the database) or by a
latitude/longitude, place/bearing/distance, or a place-bearing/place-bearing.

W0 Direct To W3

PPOS

New FPLN
W3 W4
W1

W2
Original FPLN

DIR TO a waypoint of the FPLN (example)

 THALES AVIONICS 2012

J61334BB - 00
Page 30
FMS220 - USER'S MANUAL
TABLE OF CONTENTS
T

2.1.8.2 Direct to abeam

When a "Direct To abeam" is performed to a waypoint belonging to the active flight plan, flight plan
waypoints prior to the selected waypoint are projected onto the direct-to path. Flight plan waypoints on
the active flight plan that are downpath of the aircraft and prior to the direct-to waypoint are projected
onto the direct-to path abeam the original position.

W0 Direct To Abeam W3

PPOS
ABW1 New FPLN
ABW2
W3 W4
W1

W2
Original FPLN

This document and any data included are the property of Thales Avionics. They cannot be reproduced, disclosed or utilized without the company’s prior written approval.
DIR TO ABEAM (example)

Abeam points are inserted in the flight plan with ABxxxxx identification (xxxxx being the identification
of the projected waypoint)

Note: If a RTA or speed or altitude constraint is defined on a flight plan waypoint, the constraint will
no more exist on the corresponding abeam point. Only the vertical wind profile is retained.

 THALES AVIONICS 2012

J61334BB - 00
 T FMS220 - USER'S MANUAL
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Page 31

2.1.8.3 Direct to / Intercept

When performing a direct to waypoint, it is possible to specify the desired track and distance to
intercept the selected waypoint by entering an inbound course value and a distance.

Note: If no distance is entered, a FMS computed distance, which depends on TAS and altitude will
be used.

Direct To / Intercept
N

W E

S
Intercept
Distance
A/C
This document and any data included are the property of Thales Avionics. They cannot be reproduced, disclosed or utilized without the company’s prior written approval.

TO WPT

Intercept
Inbound course

The FMS inserts an intercept leg (Course to Fix) before the Direct To fix.

Note: Direct To / Intercept is not possible when the selected fix is a moving waypoint.

 THALES AVIONICS 2012

J61334BB - 00
Page 32
FMS220 - USER'S MANUAL
TABLE OF CONTENTS
T

2.1.8.4 Direct to moving waypoint

The Direct to function allows selecting a moving waypoint (with a defined speed) as TO waypoint. If
the TO waypoint is moving, the FMC computes a rallying waypoint that is used as TO fix (as for a
basic direct to) in order to guide the aircraft in order to rally the moving waypoint.

Direct to moving waypoint

Moving
WPT

WPT
Speed

A/C
TAS

Rallying
WPT

This document and any data included are the property of Thales Avionics. They cannot be reproduced, disclosed or utilized without the company’s prior written approval.
This rallying waypoint is a temporary waypoint refreshed according to meteorological conditions
(wind), the moving waypoint speed and the aircraft position. Calculation is done in 2D geometry with a
constant rally navigation TAS equal to 130kt during rallying.

The rallying waypoint is named with the ident of the moving waypoint to reach, followed by an asterix
except if the interception is impossible with the current TAS or in high latitudes (|current latitude| or
|interception latitude| > 89°). In such case the ra llying waypoint is the moving waypoint. A discontinuity
is inserted in the flight plan after the moving waypoint.

 THALES AVIONICS 2012

J61334BB - 00
 T FMS220 - USER'S MANUAL
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Page 33

2.1.9 HOLDING PATTERN

The FMS can fly Holding Pattern defined in departure or arrival procedures (SID, STAR or Missed
Approach) or defined by the crew.

If an Holding Pattern is inserted manually in the procedure, the holding will not use holding data of the
map. The holding data default values are set by the FMS without taking into account the map data.

Depending on the holding inbound course and the previous leg heading or track, there are three types
of entry procedure in a holding pattern.
This document and any data included are the property of Thales Avionics. They cannot be reproduced, disclosed or utilized without the company’s prior written approval.

 THALES AVIONICS 2012

J61334BB - 00
Page 34
FMS220 - USER'S MANUAL
TABLE OF CONTENTS
T

Those types are represented here below:

This document and any data included are the property of Thales Avionics. They cannot be reproduced, disclosed or utilized without the company’s prior written approval.
If the discontinuity after the holding has been cleared, the holding pattern is sequenced when the
Entry point is overflown a second time, if all the holding sections have been sequenced.

 THALES AVIONICS 2012

J61334BB - 00
 T FMS220 - USER'S MANUAL
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Page 35

2.1.10 OFFSET
This function allows the aircraft to fly parallel to the original flight plan by entering the value of the
parallel offset (positive or negative). Refer to "MULTI PHASE RELATED PROCEDURES / Lateral
functions / Offset" for more details about the restrictions.

TO+1 TO+1 TO+1

TO TO TO

FROM FROM OFST FROM OFST

This document and any data included are the property of Thales Avionics. They cannot be reproduced, disclosed or utilized without the company’s prior written approval.

No offset Right offset Left offset

2.1.11 REQUIRED TIME OF ARRIVAL

This function allows to insert a time constraint on a flight plan waypoint. When a RTA is defined on a
flight plan waypoint, an IAS target speed is computed in order to respect the RTA. This computed
value is used for cruise, cruise descent and descent sections and nominal predictions are used for
climb and cruise climb sections (refer to "Flight guidance principles / Vertical navigation" paragraph).
The target IAS displayed on VNAV 1/2 page will be in accordance with this computation.

The minimum value of IAS will be computed with wind limitations: the drift must be less than 45°, the
front wind must be less than half of predicted TAS and back wind must be less than twice the
predicted TAS. So, the minimum value of the IAS can be greater than Vmin.

A RTA can be defined for a waypoint in climb sections but no IAS will be computed if the constraint is
missed with FMS usual predictions.

2.1.12 NON RETURN POINT (NRP)

NRP is the point located along the active flight plan at which EFOB at alternate airport is equal to the
fuel reserve. FMC computes the location of the Non Return Point and generates the NRP alert. The
time to reach the NRP is also computed by the FMC.

Note: NRP also is computed for the temporary flight plan but no alert is generated. NRP is not
computed for the secondary flight plan.

 THALES AVIONICS 2012

J61334BB - 00
Page 36
FMS220 - USER'S MANUAL
TABLE OF CONTENTS
T

2.1.13 MARK
This function allows marking the present position by creating a new pilot waypoint and also updating
the localization solution by entering a new position. The new position can be entered through a
database identifier, a position latitude and longitude, or a position relative to a database fix by entering
the identifier point, bearing, and distance from this fix.

North

Bearing

Database fix Distance ∆POS

Updating point

This document and any data included are the property of Thales Avionics. They cannot be reproduced, disclosed or utilized without the company’s prior written approval.

 THALES AVIONICS 2012

J61334BB - 00
 T FMS220 - USER'S MANUAL
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Page 37

2.1.14 REQUIRED NAVIGATION PERFORMANCE (RNP)

The Required Navigation Performance (RNP) is a statement of the navigation performance accuracy,
integrity, continuity and availability necessary for operations within a defined airspace.

The current navigation performance accuracy is provided through the ANP parameter provided by
the FMC. The monitoring of the ANP is a performance accuracy criteria of the navigation capability
(RNP alert).

The current navigation integrity is provided through the HIL parameter and monitoring is provided
by the AIM alert (failure is detected by the RAIM or if the HIL is not below the alert limit based on
the RNP criteria corresponding to the current flight area).

The predicted integrity availability is provided through the PRAIM (PRAIM page 1/2). The
comparison between the predicted HIL and the alert limit based on the RNP criteria allows
verifying the integrity monitoring availability at destination or at any fix.

The navigation performance integrity availability and continuity are provided also through the
PRAIM along the flight plan (PRAIM page 2/2). The comparison between the predicted HIL and
the RNP based limit and the check of the FDE availability flag for each point of the flight plan allow
This document and any data included are the property of Thales Avionics. They cannot be reproduced, disclosed or utilized without the company’s prior written approval.

verifying the integrity monitoring availability and continuity along the flight plan according to the
selected RNP criteria.

The default values of the RNP depends on the flight area and on the sensors used for positioning
according to the following rules:

When GPS is used for positioning:

− 5 NM when the flight area is enroute area,
− 1 NM when the flight area is terminal.
− 0.3 NM when the flight area is approach and GPS integrity criteria was fullfilled.
− 0.7 NM when the flight area is approach and GPS integrity criteria was not fullfilled.

When GPS is not used for positioning:
− 5 NM when the flight area is enroute area,
− 2 NM when the flight area is terminal
− 0.7 NM when the flight area is approach
Note: The Required Navigation performance (RNP) default value is set to 5 Nm after a long power
interruption

2.1.14.1 Actual Navigation performance (ANP)

The navigation capability monitoring is performed by comparison between both ANP and RNP
parameters (RNP parameter is managed by FMC according to the flight area and pilot selection). The
ANP corresponds to bound the Total System Error (TSE).

TSE: Total System Error = Difference between the true position and the desired position on the
trajectory (desired path). This error is equal to the vector sum of the path steering error, path
definition error and position estimation error.

PSE: Path Steering Error = Distance from the estimated position to the defined path. The PSE
includes both FTE and display error. The display error is not taken into account in the ANP
computation.

 THALES AVIONICS 2012

J61334BB - 00
Page 38
FMS220 - USER'S MANUAL
TABLE OF CONTENTS
T

− FTE: Flight Technical Error = Accuracy with which the aircraft is controlled as measured by
the indicated aircraft position with respect to the indicated command or desired position. It
does not include blunder errors.

PDE: Path Definition Error = Difference between the defined path and the desired path at a
specific point.

PEE: Position Estimation Error = Difference between true position and estimated position.

EPE: Estimated Position Error is an estimated of the horizontal position uncertainty which bounds
the true error with a probability of 95%. It is a function of the geometry between the A/C and the
satellites (or navaids) and the actual accuracy of the measurements. This parameter may be
misleading when a failure occurs, therefore the HIL is also monitored to verify the integrity of the
navigation solution.

Desired Path

Path Defintion Error

Defined Path

This document and any data included are the property of Thales Avionics. They cannot be reproduced, disclosed or utilized without the company’s prior written approval.
Path Steering Error
Total System Error Estimated Position

Position Estimation Error

True Position

ANP = Quadratic sum of PDE, FTE and EPE.

Position Estimated
Estimation Error Position

True
Position

Estimated Position
Error (EPE)

Position Estimation Error < EPE with a 95% probability

 THALES AVIONICS 2012

J61334BB - 00
 T FMS220 - USER'S MANUAL
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Page 39

2.1.14.2 Horizontal Integrity Limit (HIL)

The Horizontal Integrity Limit (HIL) is the radius of a circle in the horizontal plane (local plane
tangent to the WGS-84 ellipsoid), centered on the true position, that describes the region where
assured to contain the indicated horizontal position computed by the GPS with a probability of
99.9%. It is a horizontal region where the required probabilities of missed alert (non detected
failure) and false alert (alert without failure) are met for the chosen set of satellites when
autonomous fault detection is used. It is a function of the satellite and user geometry and the
expected error characteristics: it is not affected by actual measurements. Its value is predictable
given reasonable assumptions regarding the expected error characteristics.

Position Estimated
Estimation Error Position
This document and any data included are the property of Thales Avionics. They cannot be reproduced, disclosed or utilized without the company’s prior written approval.

True
Position

Horizontal integrity
Limit (HIL)

If a failure leads to a GPS Position Estimation Error > HIL, an alert is raised with a 99.9%
probability

2.2 MODES OF OPERATION

There are three possible modes of operation: dual, independent, and single.

 THALES AVIONICS 2012

J61334BB - 00
Page 40
FMS220 - USER'S MANUAL
TABLE OF CONTENTS
T

2.2.1 DUAL MODE

This is the normal mode, both FMC are synchronized. Both achieve their own computation and
exchange data through the cross talk link.

FMC1 FMC2

This document and any data included are the property of Thales Avionics. They cannot be reproduced, disclosed or utilized without the company’s prior written approval.
MCDU1 MCDU2

At initialization, the Cross Talk INIT synchronizes the both FMC. Then, the Cross Talk monitoring is
done to send the data updated on one FMC to the other one.

Note:
a) Both FMC are in single mode if a standard database discrepancy is found.

b) To resynchronize the FMC, use CTK INIT command in FMS BITE page (refer to "Performing
FMS resynchronization" paragraph in "ABNORMAL PROCEDURES / Operational Checking"
chapter).

c) A short power interruption is transparent to the operator from a functional point of view.
But, if a short power interruption occurs during a Cross Talk INIT, a new Cross Talk INIT has
to be launched manually or the MFD has to be restarted (long power interruption).

 THALES AVIONICS 2012

J61334BB - 00
 T FMS220 - USER'S MANUAL
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Page 41

2.2.2 INDEPENDENT MODE

This is a degraded mode, automatically selected when a CTK alert with one of this following message
is triggered:
− CROSS TALK FAILURE NO COMMUNICATION FMS1/2.
− CROSS TALK INIT CONFIRM ON THE OTHER FMS.
− CROSS TALK INIT PRESS CTK TO CONFIRM.
− CTK DATA DISCREPANCY UPLOAD STD DATABASE.
Data are not exchanged between the two FMC. Each FMC works independently, and takes into
account entries of the connected MCDU only.

COCKPIT: An Independent mode flag is provided to be displayed

on the MFD in order to warn the crew when both FMS are not
synchronised.
This document and any data included are the property of Thales Avionics. They cannot be reproduced, disclosed or utilized without the company’s prior written approval.

FMC1 FMC2

MCDU1 MCDU2

 THALES AVIONICS 2012

J61334BB - 00
Page 42
FMS220 - USER'S MANUAL
TABLE OF CONTENTS
T

2.2.3 SINGLE MODE

This degraded mode is selected in the event of one FMC failure. In this case, connect the MCDU to
the remaining FMC. Then both MCDU as all other equipments are managed by the remaining FMC.

FMC1 FMC2

MCDU1 MCDU2

This document and any data included are the property of Thales Avionics. They cannot be reproduced, disclosed or utilized without the company’s prior written approval.
Note: In this mode, flight plan modifications on one MCDU change the displayed page on the other
MCDU, in order to inform the operator that modifications have occurred.

 THALES AVIONICS 2012

J61334BB - 00
 T FMS220 - USER'S MANUAL
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Page 43

2.3 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT PRINCIPLES

2.3.1 DATABASE
The compact flash memory contains the following data:
− Standard database and possibly an additional standard database (STD DATA), Pilot
database (PILOT DATA) and Company database (CO-RTE DATA)
− Magnetic variation reference model (MAG VAR)
− Secondary flight plan (SEC FPLN)

FMC

COMPACT FLASH
This document and any data included are the property of Thales Avionics. They cannot be reproduced, disclosed or utilized without the company’s prior written approval.

SEC FPLN SEC FPLN

PILOT DA TA PILOT DATA
CO-RTE DA TA CO-RTE DATA
STD DA TA* STD DATA
MAG VAR MAG VAR

: Data transfer at start up

XXX : Modifiable data using MCDU

* : Up to two standard databases, only one transferred

2.3.1.1 Standard data

The standard data is divided in 5 types of data: AIRPORT, NAVAID, WAYPOINT, NDB and CO-
ROUTE. The standard data is not modifiable.

The FMS allows to manage up to two standard databases (typically two AIRAC cycles). Only one
database is selected at a same time (called used database). The crew has the capability to select the
other one (called additional database). Refer to "MULTI PHASE RELATED PROCEDURES / Other
functions / Database Operation / Standard database selection".

2.3.1.2 Pilot data

The pilot data is divided in 4 types of data: AIRPORT, NAVAID, WAYPOINT and ROUTE. Airport,
Navaid and Route type contains up to 100 items whereas Waypoint type contains up to 300 items.
The pilot data can be consulted, modified, created or erased.

 THALES AVIONICS 2012

J61334BB - 00
Page 44
FMS220 - USER'S MANUAL
TABLE OF CONTENTS
T

2.3.1.3 Data harmonization

At power on, a cross talk initialization happens to ensure consistency between both FMC. When
discrepancy is found between the compact flash contents (pilot database and/or secondary flight plan)
of each side, a data transfer is performed between the two compact flash memories according to the
following principles:

If both FMC are started up at the same time (delay lower than 5 seconds), the transfer shall be
performed from FMC side 1 to FMC side 2.

If both FMC are started up with a delay greater than 5 seconds, the transfer shall be performed
from the first powered up FMC to the last powered up FMC.

In case the transfer fails, no data harmonization is performed and DTA alert will be raised (refer to
"ABNORMAL PROCEDURE / Failures" )

CAUTION: The compact flash has to be included in the FMS. If the compact flash is
missing, the save function is degraded.

This document and any data included are the property of Thales Avionics. They cannot be reproduced, disclosed or utilized without the company’s prior written approval.
Note: When discrepancy is found between the used standard databases and/or between the
additional standard databases and/or between the company databases and/or between the magnetic
variation reference models, no data harmonization is performed and specific alerts are generated
(refer to "ABNORMAL PROCEDURE / Failures" chapter).

2.3.2 FLIGHT PLANNING

2.3.2.1 General description

A flight plan is a succession of legs (path and termination). The user may create a flight plan by
selecting airports, navigation aids and other waypoints. The user can use pre-stored departure
procedures, waypoints, navaids, and arrival procedures, but can also create pilot data (waypoints,
navaids, airports and routes) and use these data to build a flight plan.

 THALES AVIONICS 2012

J61334BB - 00
 T FMS220 - USER'S MANUAL
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Page 45

2.3.2.2 Active flight plan

The active flight plan (FPLN) is the flown flight plan used for A/C guidance purposes. It contains up to
100 legs. When modified by the crew, a copy of the active flight plan is built, called temporary flight
plan. The aircraft is guided by the active flight plan, even when a temporary exists or a secondary
flight plan is initialized.

Once a temporary flight plan is created and until its activation or deletion, any flight plan revision is
performed on the temporary flight plan and the active flight plan is not modified by crew revisions.

Note: For temporary flight, the FPLN page becomes TMPY page and associated data are displayed
in yellow.

If any flight plan revision cannot be completed due to limit in the number of legs, the attempted
revision is aborted with a the following scratchpad message:
FPLN FULL

After a cold start, the active flight plan is initialized as following:

This document and any data included are the property of Thales Avionics. They cannot be reproduced, disclosed or utilized without the company’s prior written approval.

2.3.2.3 Temporary flight plan

The temporary flight plan (TMPY) is used to check flight plan modifications before activation. Any
revision of a flight plan creates a temporary and multi-revisions are allowed on this temporary before
its activation. By default, no temporary FPLN exists.

 THALES AVIONICS 2012

J61334BB - 00
Page 46
FMS220 - USER'S MANUAL
TABLE OF CONTENTS
T

When a revision is performed on the active flight plan and if no temporary flight plan exists, then a
temporary flight plan is created as a copy of the active flight plan by taking into account this first
revision. A temporary is created upon following actions :
− Departure or arrival procedures insertion or modification,
− New destination selection,
− Waypoint insertion: next waypoint function or direct insertion,
− Direct to,
− Holding pattern insertion or modification,
− Leg or discontinuity deletion,
− Discontinuity insertion,
− Offset insertion or modification,
− Overfly status modification,
− Vertical revision: step altitude, altitude constraint, FPA constraint, speed constraint
insertion, deletion or modification or step mode modification,
− RTA modification,
− Airway insertion,
− Vertical wind profile revision for a leg: insertion, update or deletion of a wind group,
− UNDO activation: a temporary flight plan is created with the recovery flight plan.

This document and any data included are the property of Thales Avionics. They cannot be reproduced, disclosed or utilized without the company’s prior written approval.
As soon as a temporary flight plan is created and as long as this temporary flight plan exists, the
EXEC green annunciator is lighting on and the user can activate it from any page by pressing the
EXEC key on MCDU.

CAUTION: The impact of modifications on TMPY FPLN has to be checked before

pressing the EXEC key.

When the active flight plan is sequenced, the temporary flight plan is automatically sequenced if the
first leg of the temporary flight plan matches the active leg being sequenced. The temporary flight plan
is no longer sequenced when the first leg of the temporary no longer matches the active leg.

When a temporary exists, the crew is able to activate it. In such a case, the active flight plan is
replaced with the temporary flight plan and then the temporary flight plan is deleted. The temporary
flight plan doesn't exist any more until a new temporary flight plan creation.

If the FROM of the temporary flight plan is the Turning Point (T-P) and aircraft parameters (position,
track, GS, TAS) are not all valid, then the activation command is rejected with the following scratchpad
message:
NOT ALLOWED

When a temporary exists, it can be cancelled in the following cases:

− The crew manually cancels the temporary flight plan
− The crew manually cancels the active flight plan
− A flight plan initialization is performed directly from the active flight plan
− A DATA ERASE is performed
In such cases, the temporary flight plan is deleted and is not activated. The temporary flight plan
doesn't exist any more until a new temporary flight plan creation.

 THALES AVIONICS 2012

J61334BB - 00
 T FMS220 - USER'S MANUAL
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Page 47

2.3.2.4 Secondary flight plan

The secondary Flight Plan (SEC) is used to:

− Save the current flight plan for an eventual futur re-engagement,
− Prepare an alternate flight plan,
− Prepare a return flight plan or a flight plan to be flown after the current flight plan (and so to
double the capacity of the flight plan)
The secondary flight plan page can be reached from the primary flight plan by pressing the FPLN Key.

The following actions can be done on the secondary flight plan :

− Copy of the active flight plan,
− Swap with the active flight plan,
− Activation: secondary FPLN replaces active flight plan,
− Cancellation: delete the secondary FPLN,
− Route initialization: FROM/TO, route selection
− Lateral revisions (except Holding Pattern at PPOS, DIRECT-TO, OFFSET),
− Vertical revisions.
This document and any data included are the property of Thales Avionics. They cannot be reproduced, disclosed or utilized without the company’s prior written approval.

When the secondary FPLN is initialized as a copy of the active flight plan, any modification performed
on the secondary flight plan makes both flight plans differ. The waypoint preceding the first divergence
is the alternate waypoint. Before the alternate waypoint, the modifications made on the active flight
plan are reported on the secondary flight plan.

Active
FPLN

Alternate
Waypoint Secondary
FPLN

Note: If the secondary FPLN was initialized as a copy of the active flight plan before the swap, the
revisions of the active flight plan keeps being reported on the secondary flight plan after the swap.

The secondary flight plan is saved by the data Save action in the DATA MENU page (refer to "MULTI
PHASE RELATED PROCEDURES / Other functions / Database operation / Saving data").

Note: Saving the secondary flight plan is not possible when it has been initialized as a copy of the
active flight plan.

 THALES AVIONICS 2012

J61334BB - 00
Page 48
FMS220 - USER'S MANUAL
TABLE OF CONTENTS
T

After a cold start, the secondary flight plan is initialized from the secondary flight plan contained in the
Compact Flash. When this secondary flight plan is not found, corrupted or not consistent with the
loaded standard and pilot databases, FMC will initialize this flight plan with:

2.3.2.5 Relations between flight plans

This document and any data included are the property of Thales Avionics. They cannot be reproduced, disclosed or utilized without the company’s prior written approval.
Here are the relations between flight plans:

EXEC, >CLR TMPY

FPLN TMPY
Revision, >UNDO

SWAP<
ACTIVATE<
>COPY
Revision

SEC Revision

The following colors are retained on the displayed pages:

− Green for active flight plan,
− Yellow for temporary flight plan,
− White for secondary flight plan

 THALES AVIONICS 2012

J61334BB - 00
 T FMS220 - USER'S MANUAL
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Page 49

2.3.3 PREDICTIONS
The FMS computes various prediction and updates them continually during flight:

Pseudo waypoints:
− Altitude intercepts (Top Of Climb...) & Top Of Descent (TOD)
Time and fuel predictions:
− Estimated Fuel On Board at each waypoint of the flight plan
− Predicted Gross Weight at Landing
− Estimated Time at each waypoint of the flight plan:
♦ Estimated Time of Arrival (ETA)
♦ Estimated Time En route (ETE)
RAIM Availability predictions:
− Predicted Receiver Autonomous Integrity Monitoring (PRAIM) at destination (DEST), Final
Approach Fix (FAF) & Missed Approach Point (MAP), Alternate airport (ALTN) and along
the flight plan.
This document and any data included are the property of Thales Avionics. They cannot be reproduced, disclosed or utilized without the company’s prior written approval.

 THALES AVIONICS 2012

J61334BB - 00
Page 50
FMS220 - USER'S MANUAL
TABLE OF CONTENTS
T

2.3.3.1 PRAIM

The predictive RAIM function allows predicting the availability of the RAIM algorithms at a given fix
and a given time through a dedicated protocol between the FMC and the GPS sensor. This capability
allows providing the following services:

Monitoring the RAIM availability at destination (destination and alternate airport) or at any fix (on
request).

Verifying automatically the RAIM availability at destination, Final Approach Fix and Missed
Approach Point in order to allow the approach using GPS as localization source.

Verifying on request the RAIM and/or FDE (Failure Detection and Exclusion) availability and
continuity along the flight plan (active or secondary).

The calculation principle used to evaluate the RAIM and/or FDE availability along the flight plan is the
following:

The FMC uses T/O TIME and performances data to compute predictions on the flight plan.

This document and any data included are the property of Thales Avionics. They cannot be reproduced, disclosed or utilized without the company’s prior written approval.

The FMC generates the point list to be computed (points located every 5 minutes along the
trajectory).

The FMC sends PRAIM request to the GPS for each point of the list (at ETA ± 15 minutes) and,
according to the chosen prediction criterion, determines the RAIM and/or FDE availability using the
request responses.

Each prediction criterion is briefly described hereafter:

RNAV10 oceanic: FDE shall not be unavailable more than 34 minutes (i.e. 5 consecutive points of
the computed list).

RNP4: FDE shall not be unavailable more than 25 minutes (i.e. 4 consecutive points) and HIL
shall be less than 8 NM for all the flight plan (i.e. each point).

RNAV 5-2-1: RAIM shall not be unavailable more than 5 minutes (i.e. each point).

RNP1: HIL shall be less than 2 NM for all the flight plan (i.e. each point).

 THALES AVIONICS 2012

J61334BB - 00
 T FMS220 - USER'S MANUAL
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Page 51

2.3.3.2 Wind Management

In flight, the short-term predictions are computed using the current wind parameters provided by the
selected sensors. The predictions for the rest of the flight plan or the predictions on ground use a wind
modelization defined here below:

Two methods are available for wind modelization:

SIMPLIFIED WIND MODEL

This model uses the cruise mean wind and destination wind defined in the CRUISE and APPROACH
pages (refer to "Cruise performances" and "Approach performances" in "FLIGHT PHASE RELATED
PROCEDURES / Preflight / Performances initialization") as follow:

On ground:
− For the climb phase: half the cruise mean wind.
− For the cruise phase: cruise mean wind.
− For the descent phase: average wind between cruise mean wind and destination airport
wind.
This document and any data included are the property of Thales Avionics. They cannot be reproduced, disclosed or utilized without the company’s prior written approval.

In flight, during climb:

− For the climb section: average wind between current wind and cruise mean wind
− For the cruise and descent sections: computed as on ground.
In flight, during cruise (for cruise and descent sections): computed as on ground.

In flight, during descent: average wind between current and destination airport wind.

 THALES AVIONICS 2012

J61334BB - 00
Page 52
FMS220 - USER'S MANUAL
TABLE OF CONTENTS
T

PRECISED WIND MODEL

This model uses a vertical wind profile defined by the crew along the flight plan. It is possible to define
a vertical wind profile for each waypoint of the flight plan. The vertical wind profile contains up to 4
groups defined by:
− The direction of the wind origin
− The wind speed
− The flight level

Altitude

FL4

FL3

FL2

This document and any data included are the property of Thales Avionics. They cannot be reproduced, disclosed or utilized without the company’s prior written approval.
FL1

Wind speed

Example of a vertical wind profile

The vertical wind profile are propagated along the flight plan:
− The first vertical wind profile is propagated upstream and downstream
− The following vertical wind profiles are propagated downstream

wpt1 wpt2 wpt3 wpt4 wpt5

Vertical wind Vertical wind

Upstream wind
profile 1 profile 2
propagation
Downstream wind
propagation

Vertical wind profile propagation

When a lateral revision leads to the deletion of a vertical wind profile, the lost profile is transfered to
the next downstream waypoint. (in our example, if wpt2 is deleted or if a direct-to wpt3 is performed,
the vertical profile 1 is recovered on wpt3).

 THALES AVIONICS 2012

J61334BB - 00
 T FMS220 - USER'S MANUAL
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Page 53

2.4 FLIGHT GUIDANCE PRINCIPLES

2.4.1 LATERAL NAVIGATION

2.4.1.1 Lateral navigation parameters

This document and any data included are the property of Thales Avionics. They cannot be reproduced, disclosed or utilized without the company’s prior written approval.

− TO: TO waypoint.
− DTK: Desired Track to reach the TO waypoint, course between the FROM wapoint
and the TO waypoint.
− BRG: Bearing between the FMS position and the TO waypoint.
− DIST: Direct Distance between the FMS position and the TO waypoint.
− TK: Track angle provided by the selected navigation mode.
− GS: Ground Speed provided by the selected navigation mode.
− TAS: True Air Speed.
− DRIFT: Drift angle.
− XTK: Cross Track Error
− TKE: Track Angle Error.

2.4.1.2 Waypoint Alert

COCKPIT: When FMS is coupled to the autopilot (LNAV is

engaged), the Waypoint Alert is provided to warn the crew when
the aircraft is about to sequence the current leg (10s before turn or
waypoint) or when LNAV is soon going to be disengaged (60s
before flight plan discontinuity or end of flight plan).

 THALES AVIONICS 2012

J61334BB - 00
Page 54
FMS220 - USER'S MANUAL
TABLE OF CONTENTS
T

2.4.2 VERTICAL NAVIGATION

2.4.2.1 Vertical navigation sections

The vertical navigation profile is defined by the following sections:

Climb section, defined by the portion of the active flight plan located between the A/C position or
departure airport and the Top Of Climb (TOC).

Cruise section, defined by the portion of the active flight plan located between the TOC and the
Top Of Descent (TOD). It includes "cruise climb" and "cruise descent" subsections, corresponding
to flight level changes in cruise phase.

Descent section, defined by the portion of the active flight plan located between the TOD and the
destination airport.

Default
Altitude ↑ Level FPA FPA of the first contraint
Constraints interception Step of the descent if any,

This document and any data included are the property of Thales Avionics. They cannot be reproduced, disclosed or utilized without the company’s prior written approval.
WPT else Default FPA
TOC

Step TOD
WPT
Descent
profile FPLN
↓ Level FPA
Climb Climb
interception
profile profile

Arrival
Departure

Climb Cruise Cruise Cruise Cruise Cruise Descent

Climb Descent

Sections

2.4.2.2 Climb profile

A climb profile is computed whenever A/C is in climb section or cruise climb subsection. FMC takes
into account the altitude constraints of the flight plan to build the climb profile.

 THALES AVIONICS 2012

J61334BB - 00
 T FMS220 - USER'S MANUAL
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Page 55

2.4.2.3 Step and level interception

FMC computes specific altitude interception points: TOC, to locate the point where the A/C will reach
the cruise altitude and TOD, to locate the point where the A/C will intercept the descent profile.

The cruize altitude and the descent profile are frozen as soon as the time to reach the TOD is lower
than 5 minutes.

The crew can plan up to two level changes in cruise phase by entering step altitudes in climb (resp.
descent). Cruise climb (resp. cruise descent) subsection starts at a step waypoint. In those cases,
FMC computes level interception points to locate the place where A/C is predicted to reach the step
altitude.

Cruise climb and cruise descent subsections cannot be computed if the descent profile is frozen.

In cruise phase, when A/C altitude is 300 feet above (respectively below) the cruise altitude, a cruise
level interception point is computed and current section becomes "cruise descent" (respectively
"cruise climb").
This document and any data included are the property of Thales Avionics. They cannot be reproduced, disclosed or utilized without the company’s prior written approval.

COCKPIT: TOC, TOD, Step and level interception points data are
provided to be displayed on the Navigation Display.

2.4.2.4 Descent profile

A descent profile is computed whenever A/C is in descent section or cruise descent subsection. In
descent section, the descent profile is computed according to altitude constraints and flight path angle
provided by the database or entered by the crew and the default flight path angle. In cruise descent
subsection, the descent profile is computed from the default flight path angle.

If the descent profile (see "Step and level interception" part) is frozen or the A/C is in descent section,
the FMC computes:

the Descent Profile Intercept point : the point along the flight path where the selected flight level
intercept the computed descent profile.

the Selected Altitude capture point : the point along the flight path where the the A/C will capture
the selected flight level.

COCKPIT: Descent Profile Intercept and Selected Altitude

capture points data are provided to be displayed on the Navigation
Display.

 THALES AVIONICS 2012

J61334BB - 00
Page 56
FMS220 - USER'S MANUAL
TABLE OF CONTENTS
T

NORMAL DESCENT PROFILE

This profile is defined when one or several altitude constraints have been entered by the crew or
extracted from the arrival procedure.

DFLT FPA value defined

on PERF INIT page

First contraint of
TOD the descent

VZ

Vertical
flight plan
Selected Altitude

Selected Altitude
capture point
Profile
Intercept point
TOD
WPT ALT SEL value

This document and any data included are the property of Thales Avionics. They cannot be reproduced, disclosed or utilized without the company’s prior written approval.
Horizontal
flight plan

DEFAULT DESCENT PROFILE

This profile is defined when there is no altitude constraint extracted from the arrival procedure or
entered by the crew.

DFLT FPA value defined

on PERF INIT page

TOD Published slope of the

runway, or 3°
VZ

Vertical
flight plan
Selected Altitude

Selected Altitude Airport or

Profile
capture point runway
Intercept point
WPT
7 NM

Horizontal TOD
ALT SEL value
flight plan

Note: If there is a Holding pattern with Manual termination (HM leg) in the descent profile, the
descent slope assigned to the HM leg is null: the computed altitude is constant on a HM leg in the

 THALES AVIONICS 2012

J61334BB - 00
 T FMS220 - USER'S MANUAL
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Page 57

descent profile. As soon as the discontinuity is cleared, the HM leg becomes a HF leg and the descent
slope is not null.

2.4.2.5 Vertical Track Alert

COCKPIT: The Vertical Track Alert (VTA) is provided to warn the

crew whenever it is required to change the selected altitude in
order to follow the computed climb or descent profile or to
acknowledge a step.

2.4.2.6 Altitude

TRANSITION ALTITUDE

The departure and destination transition altitudes, TRANS ALT, are provided by the standard
This document and any data included are the property of Thales Avionics. They cannot be reproduced, disclosed or utilized without the company’s prior written approval.

database according to the departure and destination airports. The crew can override it on the
APPROACH page (Refer to "Approach performances" paragraph in "Multi phase related procedures"
chapter) for destination airport and on the TAKE-OFF page (Refer to "Take-off performances"
paragraph in "FLIGHT PHASE RELATED PROCEDURES / Preflight / Performances initialization") for
departure airport.

BARO-SETTING

The crew can insert the destination QNH on the APPROACH page. This QNH is used by the FMS for
internal conversions of altitudes during the descent section when A/C is above the destination
transition altitude (Refer to "Approach performances" in "FLIGHT PHASE RELATED PROCEDURES /
Preflight / Performances initialization"). By default, the current baro setting is used.

CRUISE ALTITUDE

The cruise altitude CRZ ALT is used by the FMS to compute the TOC point and the possible level
interception points of the cruise section.

CEILING

The FMS computes a cruise ceiling according to the aircraft performances. This ceiling is used to limit
the cruise altitudes insertable by the crew (including step altitudes). If the A/C is flying above the
computed ceiling, all parameters computed according to performance database (predictions, speed
targets and speed bugs) are invalidated.

 THALES AVIONICS 2012

J61334BB - 00
Page 58
FMS220 - USER'S MANUAL
TABLE OF CONTENTS
T

LANDING ELEVATION

The Elevation of the landing runway is computed as following:

If the direct distance from A/C to departure is lower than 10NM,

Landing Elevation is filled with the elevation of the active flight plan departure runway or helipad
if selected, with the elevation of the departure airport otherwise.

Else, if the active flight plan destination is defined,

Landing Elevation is filled with the elevation of the active flight plan destination runway or helipad if
selected, with the elevation of the destination airport otherwise.

If temperature compensation is active, the runway or helipad geometric elevations are corrected.

2.4.2.7 Vertical profile error

During the vertical navigation profile computation, inconsistencies may appear in the following cases :

This document and any data included are the property of Thales Avionics. They cannot be reproduced, disclosed or utilized without the company’s prior written approval.
− Step waypoint located on a "fish-bird" leg (skipped during automatic trajectory
computation)
− Climb level interception point located after the TOD (Top Of Descent)
− Level interception point located after the last waypoint of the flight plan
− On ground, TOD located behind the A/C
Note: In such cases, the following message is displayed in the scratchpad line. Altitude constraints
or steps on the current flight plan must be checked in VNAV 1/2 page.

VERTICAL PROFILE ERROR

Note: Vertical profile error message is not displayed if step waypoint is located on climb, cruise
climb, descent or cruise descent section.

CAUTION: The message VERTICAL PROFILE ERROR is inhibited if the selected

altitude is increased less than 20Nm before the destination.

Note: If a descent level interception point is located after the TOD (Top Of Descent), the following
message is displayed in the scratchpad line:

ADJUST DESCENT

 THALES AVIONICS 2012

J61334BB - 00
 T FMS220 - USER'S MANUAL
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Page 59

2.4.2.8 Vertical navigation parameters

The target IAS, TGT IAS, the target vertical speed, TGT VS, and the vertical deviation,VDEV, are
displayed on the VNAV 1/2 page (+ PROG 2/3 page for TGT IAS) and are computed depending on
the current vertical navigation section:

CLIMB SECTION

TGT IAS is equal to a speed value computed by the FMC (Managed Speed function)

TGT VS is invalid.

VDEV is computed by comparison the A/C altitude with the minimum between the selected
altitude and the next altitude constraint defining the vertical profile.

CRUISE SECTION

TGT IAS is computed by the FMC (Managed Speed function).

This document and any data included are the property of Thales Avionics. They cannot be reproduced, disclosed or utilized without the company’s prior written approval.

TGT VS is invalid (as long as A/C current altitude is within 300ft from the cruise altitude).

VDEV is computed by comparison the A/C altitude with the selected altitude when Cruise altitude
is not frozen, or with the cruise level when the cruise altitude is frozen (refer to "Step and level
interception" part).

CAUTION: Before clearing a discontinuity, the leg stringing has to be checked to avoid
having inconsistent FPLN.

Example: After clearing a discontinuity, a go back to the previous trajectory could exist in the FPLN.

CRUISE CLIMB SECTION

TGT IAS is computed by the FMC (Managed Speed function).

TGT VS is invalid

VDEV is computed as in Climb section.

CRUISE DESCENT SECTION

TGT IAS is computed by the FMC (Managed Speed function).

TGT VS is computed by the FMC according to the descent profile.

VDEV is computed as in Cruise section.

 THALES AVIONICS 2012

J61334BB - 00
Page 60
FMS220 - USER'S MANUAL
TABLE OF CONTENTS
T

DESCENT SECTION

TGT IAS is equal to a speed value computed by the FMC (Managed Speed function)

TGT VS is computed by the FMC according to the descent profile.

VDEV is computed by comparison the A/C altitude with the descent profile.

CAUTION: VDEV switch from the previous FPA to the next FPA reference can be
displayed when sequencing legs on the FPLN. Indeed VDEV is computed in comparison with
the FPA constraint which can change when a leg is sequenced.

Example: In the following figure, when WPTA is sequenced, VDEV is computed in comparison with
the FPA constraint of WPTB. VDEV discontinuity appears when WPTA is sequenced.

FPA constraint

This document and any data included are the property of Thales Avionics. They cannot be reproduced, disclosed or utilized without the company’s prior written approval.
VDEV
Vertical
flight plan

Horizontal
flight plan
WPTB
WPTA

 THALES AVIONICS 2012

J61334BB - 00
 T FMS220 - USER'S MANUAL
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Page 61

2.4.3 MANAGED SPEED

A managed speed is computed for each phase of flight and is mainly used to define the target IAS
(displayed on VNAV 1/2 and PROG 2/3 pages) and to provide the speed bugs to the system. In order
to compute the target speed according to the current aircraft conditions, the FMC manages a phase
specific to the managed speed logic.

2.4.3.1 Managed speed inputs

The managed speed value depends on the following conditions:

− Managed Speed Approach Phase: Active / Inactive (this paramater can be manually set
on MCDU)
− Ground / Flight status: Ground if the flight phase is ground / Flight otherwise.
− AFCS mode: Auto Flight Control System mode
− Flaps Lever position: 0° / 15° / 25° (ATR42 only) / FULL
− Landing Flaps 25 option: Active / Inactive
− Flaps Unlock Status: Locked / Unlocked
− Operating Engines number: 2 engines / 1 engine out
This document and any data included are the property of Thales Avionics. They cannot be reproduced, disclosed or utilized without the company’s prior written approval.

− Power Management selection: TO / MCT / CLB / CRZ

− Icing condition: Normal / Icing
A/C switches to:
− A/C AT the selected altitude if AFCS mode is ALT and selected altitude - 50ft < A/C
altitude < selected altitude + 50ft.
− A/C altitude above the selected altitude if A/C is AT the selected altitude and A/C
altitude > selected altitude + 300ft.
− A/C altitude below the selected altitude if A/C is AT the selected altitude and A/C
altitude < selected altitude - 300ft.

 THALES AVIONICS 2012

J61334BB - 00
Page 62
FMS220 - USER'S MANUAL
TABLE OF CONTENTS
T

2.4.3.2 Managed speed phase

The managed speed phases are the followings, with the activation and deactivation conditions
detailed:

Take Off (T/O phase)

T/O phase switches to "ACTIVE" when GA phase is "NOT ACTIVE" and A/C is On Ground.

T/O phase switches from "NOT ACTIVE" when one of the following conditions is met:
− GA phase is "ACTIVE"
− APP phase is "ACTIVE"
− STD phase is "ACTIVE".

If T/O phase is "ACTIVE" and A/C is On Ground, Ground T/O phase is "ACTIVE" and Flight T/O
phase is "NOT ACTIVE".

Else if T/O phase is "ACTIVE" and A/C is In Flight, Flight T/O phase is "ACTIVE" and Ground T/O

This document and any data included are the property of Thales Avionics. They cannot be reproduced, disclosed or utilized without the company’s prior written approval.
phase is "NOT ACTIVE".

Standard (STD phase)

STD phase switches to "ACTIVE" when one of the following conditions is met:
− T/O phase is "ACTIVE", A/C is In Flight and
♦ Power Management selection is CLB or CRZ, or
♦ Flaps Lever is 25° or FULL, or
♦ A/C has been airborne for at least 10 minutes
− APP phase is "ACTIVE" and
♦ Manual deselection is done by pressing APP SPD ACT Lsk on the APPROACH MCDU
page, or
♦ Destination airport is modified or cleared
− GA phase is "ACTIVE", Power Management selection is not TO, AFCS mode is not GA
(Go Around) and
♦ 2 engines running, or
♦ 1 engine is out and [Flaps Lever is 0° or AFCS mode is ALT (Altitude)].
STD phase switches from "NOT ACTIVE" when one of the following conditions is met:
− GA phase is "ACTIVE"
− APP phase is "ACTIVE"
− T/O phase is "ACTIVE".

Approach (APP phase)

APP phase switches to "ACTIVE" when A/C is In Flight and one of the following conditions is met:
− Manual activation by pressing APP SPD Lsk on the APPROACH MCDU page
− AFCS mode switches to LOC (LOCalizer engaged or armed) and [A/C is not below the
selected altitude or vertical speed is lower than -300 ft/mn]
− Flight phase switches to APPROACH (refer to "Definitions / Fight phase")
− Landing gear switches to down and [A/C is not below the selected altitude or vertical
speed is lower than -300 ft/mn].
APP phase switches from "NOT ACTIVE" when one of the following conditions is met:

 THALES AVIONICS 2012

J61334BB - 00
 T FMS220 - USER'S MANUAL
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Page 63

− GA phase is "ACTIVE"
− STD phase is "ACTIVE"
− T/O phase is "ACTIVE".

Go Around (GA phase)

GA phase switches to "ACTIVE" when A/C is In Flight and AFCS mode is GA (Go Around).
GA phase switches to "NOT ACTIVE" when STD phase is "ACTIVE".

2.4.3.3 Managed speed value

Detailed computation of the managed speed according to the conditions are described hereafter:

GROUND T/O PHASE IS "ACTIVE":

 If power management is "Take Off" and A/C altitude is below the selected altitude and
AFCS mode is not ALT and flaps lever is 15°:
Managed speed = V2 + 5kt with V2 computed by the FMC according to icing conditions,
This document and any data included are the property of Thales Avionics. They cannot be reproduced, disclosed or utilized without the company’s prior written approval.

flaps unlocked or entered by the crew.

 Otherwise: Managed speed is invalid

FLIGHT T/O PHASE IS "ACTIVE":

No engine is out:

 If A/C altitude is below the selected altitude and AFCS mode is not ALT:

 If power management is "Take Off":

If flaps lever is 15°:

Managed speed = V2 + 5kt with V2 computed by the FMC according to icing
conditions, flaps unlocked or entered by the crew.

Else if flaps lever is 0°:

Managed speed = VmHB computed for flaps lever 0° and according t o icing
conditions.

 Else if power management is MCT:

If flaps lever is 15° and conditions are normal (not icing):

Managed speed = VmHB computed for flaps lever 0° within normal c onditions.

Else if flaps lever is 15° and conditions are icing:

Managed speed = Final Take-Off speed (VFTO) computed for 15° fla ps lever
within icing conditions.

Else if flaps lever is 0°:

Managed speed = VmHB computed for flaps lever 0° and according t o icing
conditions.

 Otherwise:
Managed speed = Climb speed (170kt on ATR72 and 160kt on ATR42) upper limited by

 THALES AVIONICS 2012

J61334BB - 00
Page 64
FMS220 - USER'S MANUAL
TABLE OF CONTENTS
T

the next constraint encountered on climb section (if any).

4 NM before entry on Holding Pattern or if Holding Pattern is active:
Managed speed = Entered IAS on HOLDING page if one exists else Managed speed is
upper limited by min (170kt, next constraint encountered on climb section if any (including
holding leg)).

One engine is out:

 If A/C altitude is below the selected altitude and AFCS mode is not ALT:

 If flaps lever is 15°:

If power management is "Take Off":

Managed speed = V2 + 5kt with V2 computed by the FMC according to icing
conditions, flaps unlocked or entered by the crew.

Else if power management is MCT and conditions are normal (not icing):
Managed speed = Final Take-Off speed (VFTO) computed for 0° flap s lever
within normal conditions.

This document and any data included are the property of Thales Avionics. They cannot be reproduced, disclosed or utilized without the company’s prior written approval.

Else if power management is MCT and conditions are icing:
Managed speed = Final Take-Off speed (VFTO) computed for 15° fla ps lever
within icing conditions.

 Else if flaps lever is 0°:

If conditions are normal (not icing):

Managed speed = Final Take-Off speed (VFTO) computed for 0° flap s lever
within normal conditions.

Else if conditions are icing:

Managed speed = VmLB computed for 0° flaps lever within icing co nditions.

 Else if A/C altitude is below the selected altitude and AFCS mode is ALT:

 If flaps lever is 15° and conditions are normal (not icing):

Managed speed = Final Take-Off speed (VFTO) computed for 0° flap s lever within
normal conditions.

 Otherwise:
Managed speed = Climb speed (170kt on ATR72 and 160kt on ATR42) upper
limited by the next constraint encountered on climb section (if any).
4 NM before entry on Holding Pattern or if Holding Pattern is active:
Managed speed = Entered IAS on HOLDING page if one exists else Managed
speed is upper limited by min (170kt, next constraint encountered on climb section if
any (including holding leg)).

 Else if A/C altitude is above the selected altitude:

Managed speed = Climb speed (170kt on ATR72 and 160kt on ATR42) upper limited by
the next constraint encountered on climb section (if any).
4 NM before entry on Holding Pattern or if Holding Pattern is active:
Managed speed = Entered IAS on HOLDING page if one exists else Managed speed is
upper limited by min (170kt, next constraint encountered on climb section if any (including
holding leg)).

 THALES AVIONICS 2012

J61334BB - 00
 T FMS220 - USER'S MANUAL
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Page 65

STD PHASE IS "ACTIVE":

No engine is out:

 If flaps lever is 0°:

 If A/C altitude is below the selected altitude:

If power management is "Take Off" or MCT:

Managed speed = VmHB computed for flaps lever 0° according to ic ing
conditions.

Note: The managed speed is increased by 10kt if degraded performances are detected by the
Aircraft Performances Monitoring (APM).

Else if power management is "Climb" or "Cruise":

Managed speed = Climb speed (170kt on ATR72 and 160kt on ATR42) upper
limited by the next constraint encountered on climb section (if any).
4 NM before entry on Holding Pattern or if Holding Pattern is active:
Managed speed = Entered IAS on HOLDING page if one exists else Managed
This document and any data included are the property of Thales Avionics. They cannot be reproduced, disclosed or utilized without the company’s prior written approval.

speed is upper limited by min (170kt, next constraint encountered on climb

section if any (including holding leg)).

 Else if A/C altitude is above the selected altitude:

Managed speed = Descent speed (to match the RTA) upper limited by the
maximum cruise speed of the selected altitude.
4 NM before entry on Holding Pattern or if Holding Pattern is active:
Managed speed = Entered IAS on HOLDING page if one exists else Managed
speed is upper limited by min (170kt, next constraint encountered on descent
section if any (including holding leg)).

 Else if A/C altitude is AT the selected altitude:

Managed speed = Cruise speed computed to match the RTA if defined,
else set to max cruise speed - 5kt if cruise mode is MAX SPEED,
set to long range cruise speed if cruise mode is LONG RANGE
set to IAS value if cruise mode is IAS SELECTED.
4 NM before entry on Holding Pattern or if Holding Pattern is active:
Managed speed = Entered IAS on HOLDING page if one exists else Managed
speed is upper limited by min (170kt, next constraint encountered on cruise section
if any (including holding leg)).

 Else if flaps lever is 15°:

Managed speed = Climb speed (170kt on ATR72 and 160kt on ATR42) upper limited by
the next constraint encountered on climb section (if any).
4 NM before entry on Holding Pattern or if Holding Pattern is active:
Managed speed = Entered IAS on HOLDING page if one exists else Managed speed is
upper limited by min (170kt, next constraint encountered on climb section if any (including
holding leg)).

 Else if flaps lever is FULL or 25°:

Managed speed = Flaps Extension (VFE) - 10kt.

One engine is out:

 If flaps lever is 0°:

 THALES AVIONICS 2012

J61334BB - 00
Page 66
FMS220 - USER'S MANUAL
TABLE OF CONTENTS
T

 If A/C altitude is not AT the selected altitude:

Managed speed = VmLB computed for flaps lever 0° according to ic ing conditions.

Note: The Aircraft Performances Monitoring (APM) does not detect degraded performances when
one engine is out.

 Else if A/C altitude is AT the selected altitude:

Managed speed = VmHB + 10 kt with VmHB computed for flaps lever 0° within
icing conditions.

 Else if flaps lever is 15°:

 If A/C altitude is not AT the selected altitude:

If conditions are normal (not icing):

Managed speed = VmHB computed for flaps lever 15° within normal
conditions.

Else if conditions are icing:

Managed speed = Drift down computed for flaps lever 15° within i cing

This document and any data included are the property of Thales Avionics. They cannot be reproduced, disclosed or utilized without the company’s prior written approval.
conditions.

 Else if A/C altitude is AT the selected altitude:

Managed speed = VmHB computed for flaps lever 0° within icing co nditions.

 Else if flaps lever is FULL or 25°:

Managed speed = Flaps Extension (VFE) - 10kt.

 THALES AVIONICS 2012

J61334BB - 00
 T FMS220 - USER'S MANUAL
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Page 67

APP PHASE IS "ACTIVE":

 If flaps lever is 0°:

 If Radio height is higher than 1000ft:

Managed speed = MAX(170kt, VmHB + 5kts) with VmHB computed for flaps lever
0° according to icing conditions.

Note: VmHB is increased by 10kt if degraded performances are detected by the Aircraft
Performances Monitoring (APM), if no engine is out. The Aircraft Performances Monitoring (APM)
does not detect degraded performances when one engine is out.

 Otherwise:
Managed speed = VmHB + 5kts + Wind Factor with VmHB computed for flaps lever
0° according to icing conditions.

 Else if flaps lever is 15°:

 If Radio height is higher than 1000ft:

Managed speed = Intermediate speed flaps (140kt).
This document and any data included are the property of Thales Avionics. They cannot be reproduced, disclosed or utilized without the company’s prior written approval.

 Otherwise:
Managed speed = MAX(VmHB, VMCL) + Wind Factor with:
VmHB computed for flaps lever 15° according to icin g conditions.
VMCL computed for flaps lever 15°.

 Else if flaps lever is 25° and landing flaps 25 option is Inactive:

 If Radio height is higher than 1000ft:

Managed speed = Intermediate speed flaps (140kt).

 Otherwise:
Managed speed = MAX(VmHB, VMCL) + Wind Factor with:
VmHB computed for flaps lever 25° according to icin g conditions.
VMCL computed for flaps lever 25°.

 Else if flaps lever is 25° and landing flaps 25 option is Active:

Managed speed = MAX(VmHB, VMCL) + Wind Factor with:
VmHB computed for flaps lever 25° according to icin g conditions.
VMCL computed for flaps lever 25°.

 Else if flaps lever is FULL:

Managed speed = MAX(VmHB, VMCL) + Wind Factor with:
VmHB computed for flaps lever FULL according to icing conditions.
VMCL computed for flaps lever FULL.

 THALES AVIONICS 2012

J61334BB - 00
Page 68
FMS220 - USER'S MANUAL
TABLE OF CONTENTS
T

GA PHASE IS "ACTIVE":

 If flaps lever is 0° or flaps lever is 15° on ATR 42:

Managed speed = VmLB computed for 0° flaps lever according to ic ing conditions.

Note: Managed speed is increased by 10kt if degraded performances are detected by the Aircraft
Performances Monitoring (APM), if no engine is out. The Aircraft Performances Monitoring (APM)
does not detect degraded performances when one engine is out.

 Else if flaps lever is 15° on ATR 72 or flaps lever is 25° or flaps lever is FULL:

 If conditions are normal (not icing):

Managed speed = MAX(previous VmHB + 5kts, 1.1 VMCA, V2 min) + 10kt with:
Minimum Control Speed (VMCA)
V2 min computed within normal conditions.

 Else if conditions are icing:

Managed speed = MAX(previous VmHB + 5kts, 1.1 VMCA, Drift down) + 10kt with:
Minimum Control Speed (VMCA)
Drift down computed for flaps lever 15° within icin g conditions.

This document and any data included are the property of Thales Avionics. They cannot be reproduced, disclosed or utilized without the company’s prior written approval.
Note: The computed managed speed range is [minimum operating speed (Vmin ops); maximum
speed (Vmax)]

2.5 FLIGHT CONTROL PRINCIPLES

2.5.1 AUTOPILOT ENGAGEMENT CONDITIONS

When the active flight plan and lateral trajectory are valid, the LNAV engagement is possible if A/C is
inside the capture zone.

For heading legs and track legs, LNAV may be engaged at any time. For fixed path legs, the A/C must
be within 2 NM of the active leg prior to capture in the Terminal/Approach mode and within 4 NM when
Enroute.

2.5.2 AUTOPILOT DISENGAGEMENT CONDITIONS

When the LNAV is engaged, the disengagement happens when one of the following conditions is
verified:
− Active flight plan or lateral trajectory is not valid
− Active leg is a discontinuity
− Ground speed is less than 20kt
− Active leg is a holding leg (Hx leg) and A/C is not inside the capture zone extended to
45NM
− Active leg is a heading leg (Vx leg) or course leg (Cx leg except CF leg) and A/C is not
inside the capture zone
− Active leg is a curved leg (AF or RF leg) and A/C is not inside the capture zone extended
to 45NM
− Active leg is a CF, DF, TF, FA, FM or PI leg and A/C is not inside the capture zone
extended to 45NM

 THALES AVIONICS 2012

J61334BB - 00
 T FMS220 - USER'S MANUAL
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Page 69

Note: Capture zone is defined in the previous paragraph "Autopilot engagement conditions".

2.5.3 TURN LIMITATIONS

The maximum roll command value (Φmax) sent by the FMS to the Auto Flight Control System is
depending on :
− CAS
− AFCS Maximum Roll authorized (if valid)
Note: The roll command is limited to +/- 25° with a maxi mum variation of +/- 3°/s
This document and any data included are the property of Thales Avionics. They cannot be reproduced, disclosed or utilized without the company’s prior written approval.

 THALES AVIONICS 2012

J61334BB - 00
Page 70
FMS220 - USER'S MANUAL
TABLE OF CONTENTS
T

3 PILOT INTERFACE

The pilot interface is made of the Multi Function Display (MFD), the Primary Flight Display (PFD) and
the MCDU. Multi Function Display (MFD) including Navigation Display, to display alerts, and Primary
Flight Display (PFD), to display targets and speed bugs, are not described in this document. Only the
MCDU interface is described in the present chapter.

Trajectory, composed by the first 3 legs and transitions, and FPLN data are provided to be displayed
on the MFD (ND format and PFD format in case of outer PFD failure).

3.1 MCDU INTERFACE

The MCDU includes a full colour flat panel Active Matrix Liquid Crystal Display (AMLCD) and contains
message annunciators, brightness keys, line select keys, numeric and alphabetic keys, access keys
and function keys as shown below:

This document and any data included are the property of Thales Avionics. They cannot be reproduced, disclosed or utilized without the company’s prior written approval.
ANNUNCIATORS

LINE
LINE
SELECT
SELECT
KEYS
KEYS

Annunciator Annunciator
(MENU) (EXEC)

ACCESS EXEC KEY

KEYS
FUNCTION
KEYS
NUMERIC AND
ALPHABETIC
KEYS BRIGHTNESS
KEYS

 THALES AVIONICS 2012

J61334BB - 00
 T FMS220 - USER'S MANUAL
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Page 71

3.1.1 MENU PAGE

The MCDU page list the various systems which the user can access via the MCDU. The MCDU
displays the MENU page in the following cases:
− After power up, if no subsystem responds during init phase,
− After power up, if active subsystem is not the own side subsystem (FMS 1 for MCDU1,
FMS 2 for MCDU2),
− When the MENU key is pressed,
− When the communication breaks down with the active subsystem.
This document and any data included are the property of Thales Avionics. They cannot be reproduced, disclosed or utilized without the company’s prior written approval.

Example of MENU page with MCDU connected to two FMS subsystems and FMS1 active.

The names of the subsystems (e.g. FMS 1, FMS 2) connected to the MCDU are displayed, followed
by one of the following tags:
− <ACT>, when subsystem is active. It means that this subsystem manages the MCDU
display.
− <OFF>, when subsystem is lost.
− <REQ>, when subsystem is requesting attention.
− (Blank), when subsystem is inactive.
Only one subsystem manages the MCDU display at a time. The user selects a system by pressing the
Lsk beside the desired subsystem name. Then the selected subsystem becomes the active
subsystem.

 THALES AVIONICS 2012

J61334BB - 00
Page 72
FMS220 - USER'S MANUAL
TABLE OF CONTENTS
T

3.1.2 KEYS AND ANNUNCIATORS DESCRIPTION

BRIGHTNESS KEYS

Those keys control the brightness of the screen and annunciators. Press "BRT UP" (respectively "BRT
DOWN") to increase (respectively decrease) the luminance of the display.

MESSAGE ANNUNCIATORS

The MCDU provides five annunciators which the illumination has the following meaning:

MENU : Another system linked to the MCDU requests to be selected.

FAIL : Illuminates at maximum brightness with the display blank upon MCDU detection of a major
failure (annunciator managed by MCDU software).

MSG : A message of the system which manages the display has occurred.

OFST : An offset value has been inserted in the flight plan.

This document and any data included are the property of Thales Avionics. They cannot be reproduced, disclosed or utilized without the company’s prior written approval.

EXEC : The EXEC key is active. To confirm the execution of a command, press it.

CAUTION: Annunciators are only refreshed when the FMC is active on the MCDU (RMS
is not managed by the FMC). If FMC are in single mode and desynchronized, when the
MCDU is switching from one FMC to the other one, the annunciators are not automatically
refreshed.

NUMERIC AND ALPHABETIC KEYS

The numeric keys are used to enter numbers 0 to 9, “.”.

“+/-”, the first press displays “-” in the scratchpad and the next press displays alternatively “+” and
“-”.

“/”, writes a slash, used as a separator.

SP, writes a space.

The alphabetic keys enable to enter the 26 letters of the alphabet and a space. E, W, N, S have a
specific drawn key, because they are used to enter latitudes and longitudes.

CLR : This key allows to clear data (refer to "Clearing data" paragraph)

LINE SELECT KEYS

There are six Line Select keys (Lsk) on each side of the AMLCD screen. A push of a Lsk affects the
adjacent line for data entry, selection, or deletion. It allows, into the fields containing “<“ or “>” prompt,
to access to a function identified in that field. When a data is not modifiable or when neither data nor
prompt is displayed beside the Lsk, the following message is displayed in the scratchpad line:
NO ACTION DEFINED

FUNCTION KEYS

 THALES AVIONICS 2012

J61334BB - 00
 T FMS220 - USER'S MANUAL
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Page 73

Pressing a function key enables displaying a new MCDU page and accessing to the corresponding
function:

FPLN: Accessing to the FPLN pages (for instance: active, secondary flight plan pages).

PROG: Accessing to the PROG pages.

DTO: Accessing to the DIRECT TO pages.

PERF: Accessing to the PERF pages.

MSG: Accessing to the MSG pages.

DATA: Accessing to the DATA MENU page or the DATA LIST page (pressed twice)

MRK: Accessing to the MARK page, and the updated, stored position function.

VNAV: Accessing to the VNAV pages.

RMS: Accessing to the radio management system, not managed by the FMC.
This document and any data included are the property of Thales Avionics. They cannot be reproduced, disclosed or utilized without the company’s prior written approval.

ACCESS KEYS

The access keys are :

MENU: Accessing to the MCDU MENU page where the list of the equipment linked to MCDU are
displayed. Press it to change the equipment that monitors the display.

PREV: When there is more than one subpage, this key enables to scroll up the page.

NEXT: When there is more than one subpage, this key enables to scroll down the page.

EXEC: When the EXEC annunciator is illuminated, this key allows to confirm the execution of a
command.

Note:
a) When there is more than one page for a function (PERF, PROG...), the PREV and NEXT keys
also enable to display the pages of the function by circular permutation.

b) For all keys or Line Select keys, except for the CLR key, which has a specific treatment, a
press greater than 1 s has the same result as two consecutive presses.

c) BRT, MENU keys are linked to the use of the MCDU and are independent of the type of
equipment connected to it.

d) The MENU key is a way to change the equipment that monitors the MCDU display.

RETURN PROMPT

When a <RETURN prompt is present on a MCDU page, a push on the Lsk beside this prompt allows
to return to the previously displayed page, except when explicitly described.

 THALES AVIONICS 2012

J61334BB - 00
Page 74
FMS220 - USER'S MANUAL
TABLE OF CONTENTS
T

3.1.3 MCDU DISPLAY DESCRIPTION

The MCDU screen contains 14 lines, each having 24 characters.
− The first line is used as the title line.
− The bottom line (line 14) is the scratchpad line.
− The others lines (line 2 to 13) are data lines and define a page.

This document and any data included are the property of Thales Avionics. They cannot be reproduced, disclosed or utilized without the company’s prior written approval.
TITLE LINE

The title line is composed of 5 different fields, which are displayed on every page (except Power On
and MENU pages):
− Heading reference: True: T or Magnetic: M.
− Code of the highest triggered alerts. Refer to "ABNORMAL PROCEDURES / Failures /
Meaning of alert messages".
− Page title with possibly the number of subpages x/y.
− Sensor used by the active navigation mode to determine the FMS position (the used
sensor can be selected through the page PROG 3/3, otherwise, the most accurate sensor
is used) :

Active Navigation
Meaning Display
Mode
BCP data are mainly computed with GPS GPS
BCP data are mainly computed with Radio NAV data and is in
D-D
DME-DME mode
BCP data are mainly computed with Radio NAV data and is in
V-D
VOR-DME mode and is compliant with PRNAV
BCP BCP data are mainly computed with Radio NAV data and is in
V-D
VOR-DME mode not compliant with PRNAV
BCP data are mainly computed with Radio NAV data and is in
V-V
VOR-VOR mode
BCP data are mainly computed with Air Data (Dead Reckoning) D-R
Otherwise ---
GPS Position computed with GPS GPS

 THALES AVIONICS 2012

J61334BB - 00
 T FMS220 - USER'S MANUAL
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Page 75

− Estimated Position Error, EPE, of the FMS position.

CAUTION: The indicator is displayed in amber font when the sensors used by the active
navigation mode are not compliant with PRNAV requirements.

PAGE

The page is made of data and action lines or prompts. Each data line is adjacent to a line select key,
and a header line is above it.

SCRATCHPAD

The scratchpad line is used to display the keyboard insertions. The FMS may clear it and display on it
a message in reverse video. Pressing CLR key enables to erase this message and to restore the
content of the scratchpad. Whatever the page modification, the data of the scratchpad are retained.
This document and any data included are the property of Thales Avionics. They cannot be reproduced, disclosed or utilized without the company’s prior written approval.

3.1.4 COLORS MEANING

The displays are color coded to assist the operator in recognizing information.

The following table is a list of these colors and their meanings.

MCDU COLOR DATA

WHITE • Page titles.

• Headers.
• Prompts for page changes or commands.
• Units.
• Flight plan legs (header lines) : procedures, bearing/distance
between waypoints…
• Separation line (dashes).
• Minor messages and advisories.
• Special characters : <, >.

CYAN • Modifiable data.

• Selectable data.
• Brackets.
• Missed approach waypoints.
• Non active items in selections.

GREEN • Non modifiable data.

• Active data.
• Data with no specified color.
• Active items in selections.
• Reached constraints

 THALES AVIONICS 2012

J61334BB - 00
Page 76
FMS220 - USER'S MANUAL
TABLE OF CONTENTS
T

MCDU COLOR DATA

• Primary flight plan waypoints (except «fly to» waypoint).

AMBER • Mandatory data (boxes).

• Alerts.
• Missed constraints.
• Negative margins.

MAGENTA • Targets
• TO waypoint features

YELLOW • Temporary data.

• Temporary FPLN.

This document and any data included are the property of Thales Avionics. They cannot be reproduced, disclosed or utilized without the company’s prior written approval.
3.1.5 CHARACTER ATTRIBUTES MEANING
Beside the color, in order to point out the different types of information, the display uses four attributes
described in the following table.

SMALL FONT • Headers.

• Data name.
• Units.
• Default values for data.
• Flight plan legs (header lines) : procedures,
bearing/distance between waypoints…
• Non active items or data in selections (xxx/YYY/ zzz).

LARGE FONT • Title line, scratchpad.

• Data (except default values and some data in header
line).
• Active item or data in selections (xxx/YYY/zzz).
• Prompt

REVERSE VIDEO • Alert codes in title line.

• Messages in scratchpad line.
• Protected command prompt (requiring crew validation).
• Reversed route flag in ROUTE SEL page
• SID/TRANS, TRANS/STAR and VIA airways in route
pages.
• Used flag in the pilot data pages
• Prediction data (ETA/ETE) on FPLN page if a RTA
UNDERLINE
constraint exist on this data.

Note: REVERSE VIDEO and UNDERLINE are never used together.

 THALES AVIONICS 2012

J61334BB - 00
 T FMS220 - USER'S MANUAL
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Page 77

3.1.6 SCRATCHPAD MESSAGES

When a command or an insertion is rejected, or during the execution of a command, the FMS clears
the scratchpad and displays on it a message in reverse video. When this message can not be cleared,
presses on keyboard, except BRT and MENU keys, are not taken into account until the end of the
command. These messages are listed in the following table:

MESSAGE NAME CLEAR MEANING

CLEAR ? YES Pressing the desired Lsk will delete its field’s value
RANGE ERROR YES The data entry is out of range
FORMAT ERROR YES The format of data entry is wrong
NO ACTION DEFINED YES The Lsk is not active
NOT ALLOWED YES The command or the data entry is forbidden
NOT IN DATABASE YES The data is not found in the database
This document and any data included are the property of Thales Avionics. They cannot be reproduced, disclosed or utilized without the company’s prior written approval.

OFFSET CANCELLED YES On the active leg the offset is deleted

On the active leg the offset is postponed to the
OFFSET DELAYED YES
next leg
FPLN FULL YES The flight plan is full
SEC FULL YES The secondary flight plan is full
MEMORY FULL YES The pilot or company database is full
The ident (airport, navaid, waypoint) is already
IDENT ALREADY USED YES
used in the database
The navaid has been already deselected
ALREADY DESELECTED YES The satellite has been already deselected from
PRAIM
ERASING DATA NO The pilot data are being erased
XFER DATA IN PROGRESS NO The data transfer is being executed
The data uploading or downloading has failed, data
XFER FAIL YES
are not transferred
At least one pilot route contains a fix or an airway
INCONSISTENT NAV DB YES
that does not belong to the standard data base.
CROSSTALK INIT YES The two FMC are harmonizing their data
The confirmation of the command by pressing the
FPLN WILL BE DELETED YES
EXEC key will erase the flight plan
Pressing the EXEC key will confirm and execute
PRESS EXEC TO CONFIRM YES
the command
A temporary flight plan exists and
- a "secondary activation", or
TMPY EXIST YES
- a "secondary init as copy", or
- a "secondary swap" command is received.

 THALES AVIONICS 2012

J61334BB - 00
Page 78
FMS220 - USER'S MANUAL
TABLE OF CONTENTS
T

MESSAGE NAME CLEAR MEANING

An incoherence appeared in the vertical navigation
VERTICAL PROFILE ERROR YES
profile computation. See Vertical navigation
A descent level interception point is located after
ADJUST DESCENT YES
the TOD (Top Of Descent)
RTA MISSED YES The RTA constraint cannot be respected
A RTA already exists, press EXEC to delete the
DELETE OTHER RTA ? YES
previous RTA.
Password to enter the company route edition mode
INCORRECT PASSWORD YES
is incorrect
FMC does not find any valid intersection between
NO VALID INTERSECTION YES the flight plan and a latitude/longitude value
(LAT/LON crossing)

This document and any data included are the property of Thales Avionics. They cannot be reproduced, disclosed or utilized without the company’s prior written approval.
3.1.7 DATA ENTRY
Using the numeric and alphabetic keys write in the scratchpad the data to insert. Then press the Lsk
corresponding to the field of the data. If this field contains several data, the slash character has to be
used with the following rules:

Entry of first data only: DDDD

Entry of second data only: /DDDD

Entry of third data only: //DDDD

Entry of first and second data only: DDDD/DDDD

Entry of second and third data only: /DDDD/DDDD

Entry of first and third data only: DDDD//DDDD

«DDDD» is the data and «/» the separator of data fields. The maximum number of data included in a
set is limited to 4. The length of the format of data to insert is the same as the display format. The sign
is necessary but not the unit.

Example: To insert 14H22, enter 1422.

The point is only necessary for decimal data entry.

FOR LATITUDE OR LONGITUDE

GEO DMH coordinates: Entry of the indication N/S or E/W can begin or end the value.

Example: To insert S45°42.23, enter “S4542.23” or “4542.23S” .

In certain cases, the entered data can be shortened, as indicated in the following table of insertion
examples:

 THALES AVIONICS 2012

J61334BB - 00
 T FMS220 - USER'S MANUAL
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Page 79

PARAMETER ENTRY RESULT

S502 S05°02.00
LATITUDE
502N N05°02.00
E502 E005°02.00
LONGITUDE
W1234.5 W012°34.50
15000 15000
ALTITUDE -1000 -1000
FL200 FL200
40/30 040°/ 30
WIND 50 050°/ xx
/50 xxx°/ 50
40/30/20 040°/30/FL20
WIND GROUP 50 050°/xxx/FLyyy
//100 xxx°/yyy/FL100
122423 12H24:23
FMS TIME or RTA or ETA 1050 10H50:00
12 00H12:00
TIME 0115 01H15
TIME DIFFERENCE -0225 -02H25
This document and any data included are the property of Thales Avionics. They cannot be reproduced, disclosed or utilized without the company’s prior written approval.

DATE 25APR99 25-APR-99

112 112.00
FREQUENCY
134.2 134.20
069Y 069Y
CHANNEL
080X 080X
-20 -20
TEMPERATURE
40 +40
OFFSET L02 L02
SLOPE 2.5 2.5

3.1.8 CLEARING DATA

If the scratchpad is not empty, perform a brief press (< 1s) on the CLR key to erase the last character
of the scratchpad line or perform a long press (> 1s) on the CLR key to erase all characters contained
in the scratchpad line.

If the scratchpad is empty, pressing CLR key makes appear in reverse video the message “CLEAR ?”
in the scratchpad line. Press the Lsk beside the data field to clear. When the data overwrites a default
value, a clear action reverts the data to the default value. When a data is entered on a field without
default value, a clear action is not possible on that data, such a field can only be overwritten.

Note: The clear of a default value has no effect.

 THALES AVIONICS 2012

J61334BB - 00
Page 80
FMS220 - USER'S MANUAL
TABLE OF CONTENTS
T

3.2 MCDU PAGES HIERARCHY

3.2.1 GENERAL ORGANISATION

The Man Machine Interface contains the following volumes:

Volume Function

INITIALIZATION Initialization of preflight parameters.

FLIGHT PLAN Flight plan management

PROGRESS Navigation and position fixing management

DIRECT-TO Direct to navigation management

PERFORMANCE A/C performance management

This document and any data included are the property of Thales Avionics. They cannot be reproduced, disclosed or utilized without the company’s prior written approval.
RADIO NAVIGATION Radio-navigation management

MESSAGE Alert display and management

MARK A/C position updating or memorization of frozen position

DATA Standard, pilot database management

STATUS FMS input check and maintenance information display

The following paragraphs describe the pages hierarchy organized by volume.

3.2.2 INITIALIZATION
The INITIALIZATION volume contains the following pages:

Page Function

Displays the power on self test results and provides access to the INIT
POWER ON
page.

Displays time and date and gives access to the pages used for the FMC
INIT
parameter initialization.

POS INIT Initialization of the A/C position.

UNITS Choice of units for display.

DATUM Display of geodetic datum system list.

 THALES AVIONICS 2012

J61334BB - 00
 This document and any data included are the property of Thales Avionics. They cannot be reproduced, disclosed or utilized without the company’s prior written approval.

 THALES AVIONICS 2012

Page

GEO DATUM
T

Function

Display/selection of a geodetic data.

FMS220 - USER'S MANUAL
TABLE OF CONTENTS

J61334BB - 00
Page 81
Page 82
FMS220 - USER'S MANUAL
TABLE OF CONTENTS
T

FMC
POWER ON

>INIT Lsk
(DATA MENU page)

NAV DATA page

WEIGHT page

This document and any data included are the property of Thales Avionics. They cannot be reproduced, disclosed or utilized without the company’s prior written approval.
PERF INIT page

FPLN INIT page

Initialization volume

 THALES AVIONICS 2012

J61334BB - 00
 T FMS220 - USER'S MANUAL
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Page 83

3.2.3 FLIGHT PLAN

The FLIGHT PLAN volume contains the following pages:

Page Function

Displays flight plan legs and allows lateral or vertical revision on the
IFR FPLN
active or temporary flight plan

TMPY FPLN Displays the temporary flight plan

SEC FPLN Displays the secondary flight plan

DEPARTURE Displays and selection of the departure procedure

Selection of overfly or of a new destination modification or insertion of

LTRL REV a holding pattern, a waypoint or an airway in the flight plan, insertion
of an offset value, check position

AIRWAY Displays and selection of airway to insert in current flight plan

This document and any data included are the property of Thales Avionics. They cannot be reproduced, disclosed or utilized without the company’s prior written approval.

AIRWAY LIST Displays and selection of airway

AIRWAY TO LIST Displays and selection of airway TO fix

ARRIVAL Displays and selection of the arrival procedure

Displays the vertical navigation information and the constraints at the

VERT REV
revised point

WIND Display the wind set defined on the flight plan

FPLN INIT Selection of the type of active flight plan

SEC INIT Selection of the type of secondary flight plan

ROUTE SELECT Displays and selection of a route

Allows the modification or the insertion of an holding pattern in the

HOLDING
active flight plan

 THALES AVIONICS 2012

J61334BB - 00
Page 84
FMS220 - USER'S MANUAL
TABLE OF CONTENTS
T

NEW FPLN >

< FPLN INIT

See
SEC-FPLN

Empty scratchpad

This document and any data included are the property of Thales Avionics. They cannot be reproduced, disclosed or utilized without the company’s prior written approval.
Route identification insertion
FROM/TO insertion

FPLN Page EXEC

FPLN volume : FPLN init / Route select

 THALES AVIONICS 2012

J61334BB - 00
 This document and any data included are the property of Thales Avionics. They cannot be reproduced, disclosed or utilized without the company’s prior written approval.

 THALES AVIONICS 2012

T

FPLN

AIRWAY page

FPLN volume : FPLN revisions

FMS220 - USER'S MANUAL
TABLE OF CONTENTS

J61334BB - 00
Page 85
 This document and any data included are the property of Thales Avionics. They cannot be reproduced, disclosed or utilized without the company’s prior written approval.
T

 THALES AVIONICS 2012

Valid airway ident

If amber box

FPLN volume : Airway

LTRL REV page
FPLN

Empty scratchpad
FMS220 - USER'S MANUAL
TABLE OF CONTENTS

J61334BB - 00
Page 86
 This document and any data included are the property of Thales Avionics. They cannot be reproduced, disclosed or utilized without the company’s prior written approval.

 THALES AVIONICS 2012

T

EXEC
FPLN

FPLN volume : Departure procedure

IFR FPLN page
FMS220 - USER'S MANUAL
TABLE OF CONTENTS

J61334BB - 00
Page 87
 This document and any data included are the property of Thales Avionics. They cannot be reproduced, disclosed or utilized without the company’s prior written approval.
T

 THALES AVIONICS 2012

FPLN volume : Arrival procedure
FPLN

EXEC
FMS220 - USER'S MANUAL
TABLE OF CONTENTS

J61334BB - 00
Page 88
 This document and any data included are the property of Thales Avionics. They cannot be reproduced, disclosed or utilized without the company’s prior written approval.

 THALES AVIONICS 2012

T

: See next page

See FPLN init / Route select

FPLN volume : Secondary FPLN

FMS220 - USER'S MANUAL
TABLE OF CONTENTS

< FPLN INIT

J61334BB - 00
Page 89
Page 90
FMS220 - USER'S MANUAL
TABLE OF CONTENTS
T

FPLN
2

EXEC

FPLN

This document and any data included are the property of Thales Avionics. They cannot be reproduced, disclosed or utilized without the company’s prior written approval.
SEC INIT

FPLN volume : Secondary FPLN

3.2.4 PROGRESS
The PROGRESS volume contains the following pages:

Page Function

PROG 1/3 Displays the FROM, TO, NEXT and DEST fix of the active FPLN
and the NEXT vertical pseudo-waypoint information.

VNAV 1/2 Displays the VNAV information.

VNAV 2/2 Displays the temperature compensation function information.

PROG 2/3 Displays the navigation parameters.

PROG 3/3 Displays the localization modes (selected or not) and their related
information.

BCP NAV Displays the BCP localization parameters.

GPS NAV Displays the GPS localization parameters.

PRAIM 1/2 Displays predictive RAIM data for any fix of the navigation
database and for the destination

PRAIM 2/2 Displays function for predictive RAIM along the flight plan

 THALES AVIONICS 2012

J61334BB - 00
 T FMS220 - USER'S MANUAL
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Page 91

RESULT Displays result of predicitve RAIM along the flight plan

PROG

PREV

PREV
PROG / NEXT

PROG / NEXT
This document and any data included are the property of Thales Avionics. They cannot be reproduced, disclosed or utilized without the company’s prior written approval.

PREV

1 and 2 : see next page

PROG volume

 THALES AVIONICS 2012

J61334BB - 00
Page 92
FMS220 - USER'S MANUAL
TABLE OF CONTENTS
T

1 2

PREV

NEXT

This document and any data included are the property of Thales Avionics. They cannot be reproduced, disclosed or utilized without the company’s prior written approval.
PRAIM pages

VNAV

PREV

NEXT

VNAV

VNAV pages

3.2.5 DIRECT TO
The DIRECT TO volume contains the following pages:

Page Function

DIRECT TO (FPLN WPT) Selection of a fix identification for DIRECT TO

function.

DIRECT TO (AIRPORTS) Selection of an airport for DIRECT TO function.

 THALES AVIONICS 2012

J61334BB - 00
 T FMS220 - USER'S MANUAL
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Page 93

DTO ABEAM Selection of a fix identification for DIRECT TO

ABEAM function.

DIRECT TO Selection of parameters for DIRECT TO function.

DTO
This document and any data included are the property of Thales Avionics. They cannot be reproduced, disclosed or utilized without the company’s prior written approval.

Identification insertion
FPLN waypoint selection
Airport selection

DIRECT TO volume

3.2.6 PERFORMANCES
The PERFORMANCES volume contains the following pages:

Page Function

PERF INIT Displays performance database identification and allows

performance parameters initialization or modification.

 THALES AVIONICS 2012

J61334BB - 00
Page 94
FMS220 - USER'S MANUAL
TABLE OF CONTENTS
T

TAKE OFF Displays the take off performance parameters.

CRUISE Displays the cruise performance parameters.

APPROACH Displays the approach performance parameters.

SEC PERF Displays the performance parameters for the secondary flight plan.

WEIGHT Displays weight information for the A/C.

This document and any data included are the property of Thales Avionics. They cannot be reproduced, disclosed or utilized without the company’s prior written approval.

 THALES AVIONICS 2012

J61334BB - 00
 T FMS220 - USER'S MANUAL
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Page 95

PERF
(1) (2)

(2)
This document and any data included are the property of Thales Avionics. They cannot be reproduced, disclosed or utilized without the company’s prior written approval.

(1) depending on the flight phase

- take-off or ground  TAKE OFF page
- climb or cruise  CRUISE page
- descent or go around  APPROACH page
(2) NEXT/PREV or PERF key

PERFORMANCES volume

3.2.7 RADIO NAVIGATION

The RADIO NAVIGATION volume contains the following pages:

Page Function

NAV FRQ Displays identification, frequency, bearing (QDM) and

distance of the tuned navaids and the autotune state.

 THALES AVIONICS 2012

J61334BB - 00
Page 96
FMS220 - USER'S MANUAL
TABLE OF CONTENTS
T

NEAREST NAVAIDS Displays the nearest VHF or NDB navaids list.

DESELECTED NAVAIDS Allows selection or deselection of navaids.

NAV FRQ on the DATA MENU page

Cf next
page

This document and any data included are the property of Thales Avionics. They cannot be reproduced, disclosed or utilized without the company’s prior written approval.

RADIO NAVIGATION volume

 THALES AVIONICS 2012

J61334BB - 00
 T FMS220 - USER'S MANUAL
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Page 97

NAV FRQ on the DATA MENU page

Cf NAV FRQ
This document and any data included are the property of Thales Avionics. They cannot be reproduced, disclosed or utilized without the company’s prior written approval.

RADIO NAVIGATION volume : TUNE

3.2.8 MESSAGE
The MESSAGE volume contains the following page:

Page Function

MSG Displays the list of alerts.

MSG

Previous Page

 THALES AVIONICS 2012

J61334BB - 00
Page 98
FMS220 - USER'S MANUAL
TABLE OF CONTENTS
T

MESSAGE volume

3.2.9 MARK
The MARK volume contains the following page:

Page Function

MARK Displays the frozen position and allows the storage of this
position in the pilot database, the update at this position.

Previous Page MRK

This document and any data included are the property of Thales Avionics. They cannot be reproduced, disclosed or utilized without the company’s prior written approval.
Position or IDENT insertion

MARK volume

3.2.10 DATA
The DATA volume contains the following pages:

Page Function

DATA MENU Provides access to the INIT, STATUS and DATA volumes.

DATABASE Provides access to the standard, pilot, data.

STANDARD AIRPORT Displays information about the airports stored in the standard
database.

STANDARD NAVAID Displays information about ILS or VHF navaid stored in the
standard database.

STANDARD WAYPOINT Displays information about the waypoints stored in the standard
database.

STANDARD NDB Displays information about the NDB navaids stored in the standard
database.

 THALES AVIONICS 2012

J61334BB - 00
 T FMS220 - USER'S MANUAL
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Page 99

Page Function

STD DATA (CO-ROUTE) Displays the list of company routes stored in the company
database.

PILOT DATA (AIRPORTS) Displays the list of airports stored in the pilot database.

PILOT DATA (NAVAIDS) Displays the list of navaids stored in the pilot database.

PILOT DATA (WAYPOINTS) Displays the list of waypoints stored in the pilot database.

PILOT DATA (ROUTE) Displays the list of routes stored in the pilot database.

PILOT AIRPORT Displays information about an airport stored in the pilot database.
The crew can modify parameters of stored data or create new pilot
airport data.

PILOT NAVAID Displays information about a navaid stored in the pilot database.
The crew can modify parameters of stored data or create new pilot
navaid data.
This document and any data included are the property of Thales Avionics. They cannot be reproduced, disclosed or utilized without the company’s prior written approval.

PILOT WAYPOINT Displays information about a waypoint stored in the pilot database.
The crew can modify parameters of stored data or create new pilot
waypoint data.

ROUTE Displays information about a route stored in the pilot or company

database. The crew can modify or create a pilot route.

NAV DATA Displays information about the databases loaded in the FMS

DATA LIST Displays information about standard and pilot data. Information
displayed can be filtered (airports, VHF navaids,...).

NEW DATA Selection of the type of FIX to create.

DUPLICATE Allows the crew to choose the required data in database.this

DATA

INIT Volume DATABASE page

STATUS Volume NAV DATA page

UNITS page NAV FRQ page

DATA volume

 THALES AVIONICS 2012

J61334BB - 00
Page 100
FMS220 - USER'S MANUAL
TABLE OF CONTENTS
T

DATA / DATA

DATA volume : DATA LIST page

DATA / NAV DATA

This document and any data included are the property of Thales Avionics. They cannot be reproduced, disclosed or utilized without the company’s prior written approval.
Previous page

DATA volume : NAV DATA

 THALES AVIONICS 2012

J61334BB - 00
 This document and any data included are the property of Thales Avionics. They cannot be reproduced, disclosed or utilized without the company’s prior written approval.

 THALES AVIONICS 2012

T

DATA volume : Standard database

DATA / DATABASE
FMS220 - USER'S MANUAL
TABLE OF CONTENTS

J61334BB - 00
Page 101
Page 102
FMS220 - USER'S MANUAL
TABLE OF CONTENTS
T

PLT ROUTE
page (*)

This document and any data included are the property of Thales Avionics. They cannot be reproduced, disclosed or utilized without the company’s prior written approval.
PLT WPT
page (*)

PLT NAVAID
page (*)

PLT APT
page (*)

(*) see next page

DATA volume : Pilot database 1/2

 THALES AVIONICS 2012

J61334BB - 00
 T FMS220 - USER'S MANUAL
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Page 103

PILOT DATA
page (route)

PILOT DATA page

(waypoints)

PILOT DATA
page (navaids)
This document and any data included are the property of Thales Avionics. They cannot be reproduced, disclosed or utilized without the company’s prior written approval.

PILOT DATA
page (airports)

DATA volume : Pilot database 2/2

3.2.11 STATUS
The STATUS volume contains the following pages:

Page Function
STATUS Access to the different pages of the STATUS volume.
AIR/RA Displays the AIR parameters and the Radio-Altimeter height.

 THALES AVIONICS 2012

J61334BB - 00
Page 104
FMS220 - USER'S MANUAL
TABLE OF CONTENTS
T

Page Function
HDG/ATT Displays the heading and attitude parameters.
FUEL FLOW Displays the fuel flow information.
FMS BITE Displays the results of the built in test of the FMS.
SENSOR STATUS Displays GPS and DCF sensor status and modes.
DISCRETES Displays the FMC discrete status.
CONF DATA Allows the display of the system configuration table, the performance data
and the magnetic variation model. Allows to save the FMS status.

DATA / STATUS
AIR/RA FMS BITE
Page Page (*)

HDG/ATT SENSOR STS

This document and any data included are the property of Thales Avionics. They cannot be reproduced, disclosed or utilized without the company’s prior written approval.
Page Page (*)

FUEL FLOW DISCRETES

Page Page (*)

CONF DATA
Page (*)
Previous page

STATUS volume : DATA STATUS 1/3

 THALES AVIONICS 2012

J61334BB - 00
 T FMS220 - USER'S MANUAL
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Page 105

STATUS page
This document and any data included are the property of Thales Avionics. They cannot be reproduced, disclosed or utilized without the company’s prior written approval.

STATUS volume : DATA STATUS 2/3

STATUS page

STATUS volume : DATA STATUS 3/3

 THALES AVIONICS 2012

J61334BB - 00
Page 106
FMS220 - USER'S MANUAL
TABLE OF CONTENTS
T

3.3 MCDU PAGES DESCRIPTION

3.3.1 INITIALIZATION

3.3.1.1 Power On page

The "Power On" page is automatically displayed after the first activation of the FMC after power on
with FMS manufacturer name (THALES AVIONICS) in title line and the Product name (FMS 220) in
the following line.

This document and any data included are the property of Thales Avionics. They cannot be reproduced, disclosed or utilized without the company’s prior written approval.
The Power On page displays the following fields:

PERF DATA: Identification of the Performance database

STD DATA: Identification of the used Standard database with its expiration date

Note: If no standard database has been uploaded in the FMC, the data are green dashed.

SW P/N: Identification of the IAD software version

SYS CONF: CRC of the system configuration table

MAGVAR: Identification of the magnetic variation database

Power On tests status :

− CONF DATA: Integrity test status of configuration data (system configuration,
performances and magnetic variation databases)
− NAV DATA: Integrity and consistency test status of navigation data (used standard
database, company database and pilot database)

Note: Consistency test of navigation data: If the Pilot (resp. Company) Database makes reference to
a Standard Database which is not the used Standard Database loaded on the FMC, the NAV DATA
test is failed and the message INCONSISTENT NAV DB is displayed in the scratchpad line. Then the
concerned fix, airway or procedure element of a pilot (resp. company) route is displayed in amber
when the route is edited and replaced by a discontinuity when the route is engaged in a flight plan.

 THALES AVIONICS 2012

J61334BB - 00
 T FMS220 - USER'S MANUAL
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Page 107

 INIT >: This prompt is displayed if both test status are OK (green font). This promt allows
accessing to the INIT page to initalize the FMS.

 FMS BITE >: This prompt is displayed if at least one test status is FAIL (amber font). This promt
allows accessing to the FMS BITE page to check the Built In Test detailed results.

3.3.1.2 INIT page

The user accesses to the INIT page by pressing INIT Lsk from the "Power On" page.

The user can also call up this page by pressing DATA key then INIT Lsk.

This page displays the following fields:

DATE: Current DATE according to UTC used by the FMC.

UTC: Current UTC time according to UTC used by the FMC.

− (GPS) means that date and time are provided by the GPS sensor. In that case, DATE and
This document and any data included are the property of Thales Avionics. They cannot be reproduced, disclosed or utilized without the company’s prior written approval.

UTC values are displayed in green font.

− (FMS) means that those data are provided by the internal clock of the FMC. In that case,
DATE and UTC values are displayed in cyan font and can be overridden.

STD DATA : Expiration date of the used Standard Database:

− Green, when the date has not expired.
− Amber, when the date has expired.

Note: If no standard database has been uploaded in the FMC, the data are amber dashed.

CAUTION: When the database is expired, the use of the standard database is possible
but has to be avoided.

 THALES AVIONICS 2012

J61334BB - 00
Page 108
FMS220 - USER'S MANUAL
TABLE OF CONTENTS
T

 DIFF: This field allows the user to enter a time difference between the local time and the UTC
time. When the time DIFF is different from zero, all times are displayed on MCDU and ND using
the local time (L indicator), except when explicitly indicated in Zulu time (Z indicator).

 T/O TIME: This field displays the local time. The user can overwrite it by the scheduled take-off
time. The fied name is T/O TIME L if DIFF ≠ 0, T/O TIME Z otherwise.

Note:
a) T/O TIME is the starting time used for the predictions computation.

b) T/O TIME retrieves local time when local time becomes equal to T/O time or after a long power
interruption.

c) T/O TIME is not displayed in Flight.

d) T/O TIME insertion is not allowed while a predictive RAIM along flight plan computation is
running.

This document and any data included are the property of Thales Avionics. They cannot be reproduced, disclosed or utilized without the company’s prior written approval.

 THALES AVIONICS 2012

J61334BB - 00
 T FMS220 - USER'S MANUAL
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Page 109

3.3.1.3 POS INIT page

The user accesses to the POS INIT page by pressing POS INIT Lsk from the INIT page.

 > GPS POS: This prompt allows selecting the GPS position to initialize the sensors.

 > LAST POS: This prompt allows selecting the last known position.
This document and any data included are the property of Thales Avionics. They cannot be reproduced, disclosed or utilized without the company’s prior written approval.

 WPT: This field allows entering the identifier of a waypoint of the database to initialize the sensors
to its position.

 > WPT POS: This prompt allows selecting the position of a waypoint of the database.

 INIT POS: This field displays the selected position to initialize the sensors. The user can also
directly enter the latitude and the longitude.

Note:
a) Initialization by a position is only allowed on GROUND and when the corresponding position is
valid (not dashed). Otherwise, no prompt is displayed beside the Lsk and an attempt to press
the Lsk will display the message NO ACTION DEFINED in the scratchpad line.

b) GPS position is dashed if GPS EPE is lower than 0.1Nm. One can refer to the PROG 3/3 page
to check the current GPS EPE if initialization by GPS position is not allowed whereas GPS is
available.

c) If WPT Lsk is pressed with empty scratchpad, the DATA LIST page is displayed with filter
“ALL”.

When the initialization position is valid (INIT POS), the SENSORS INIT< prompt is displayed.

 THALES AVIONICS 2012

J61334BB - 00
Page 110
FMS220 - USER'S MANUAL
TABLE OF CONTENTS
T

 SENSORS INIT <: This prompt allows initializing the BCP (Best Computed Position) and the GPS
sensor position.

Then, the SENSORS STS> prompt replaces SENSORS INIT< prompt.

 SENSORS STS >: This prompt allows checking the sensors status.

Refer to "PILOT INTERFACE / MCDU Pages description / STATUS / SENSOR STS page" for more

This document and any data included are the property of Thales Avionics. They cannot be reproduced, disclosed or utilized without the company’s prior written approval.
details about the sensors status checking.

3.3.1.4 UNITS page

The user accesses to the UNITS page by pressing UNITS Lsk from the INIT page.

The user may also call up this page by pressing DATA key and UNITS Lsk from the DATA page.

 The user can select the unit(s) by pressing the Lsk beside the desired parameter(s). The selected
unit is displayed in large green font. The other selectable unit(s) is(are) displayed in small cyan
font.

Note:
a) Selectable units are HEADING, ALTITUDE, DATUM, TEMP and BARO SET. Their default
values are MAG, FT, WGS84, °C and INHG.

b) DISTANCE is always in NM unit, COORD is always in DMH unit and WEIGHT unit (LB or KG)
depends on aircraft configuration.

 THALES AVIONICS 2012

J61334BB - 00
 T FMS220 - USER'S MANUAL
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Page 111

3.3.1.5 DATUM page

The user accesses to the DATUM Page by pressing DATUM Lsk from the UNITS page.

The DATUM page lists the selectable DATUM displayed in cyan. The selected DATUM is displayed in
green.
This document and any data included are the property of Thales Avionics. They cannot be reproduced, disclosed or utilized without the company’s prior written approval.

 The user can access to the previous / next data by pressing the PREV / NEXT key.

 The user can also display the detailed information in the GEO DATUM page by pressing the Lsk
beside the desired geodetic system.

 THALES AVIONICS 2012

J61334BB - 00
Page 112
FMS220 - USER'S MANUAL
TABLE OF CONTENTS
T

3.3.1.6 GEO DATUM page

The user accesses to the GEO DATUM page by pressing the Lsk beside the desired geodetic system
from the DATUM page.

The SPHEROID identification associated to the geodetic DATUM is displayed on this page.

This document and any data included are the property of Thales Avionics. They cannot be reproduced, disclosed or utilized without the company’s prior written approval.
The following parameters of the DATUM and the SPHEROID are displayed :

∆A: This field displays the WGS84 semi-major axis minus the selected spheroid semi-major axis.
The user can also enter it if the USER SPHEROID is selected from the USER DATUM.

∆F: This field displays the WGS84 flattering minus the selected spheroid flattering.

If the USER SPHEROID is selected from the USER DATUM.geodetic, the spheroid parameters
(∆A and ∆F) are displayed in cyan font and the user can overwrite them.

∆X: This field displays the X-axis difference between the WGS84 geoid and the selected geoid.

∆Y: This field displays the Y-axis difference between the WGS84 geoid and the selected geoid.

∆Z: This field displays the Z-axis difference between the WGS84 geoid and the selected geoid.

If the USER DATUM is selected, the geodetic datum parameters (∆X, ∆Y and ∆Z) are displayed in
cyan font and the user can overwrite them.

 SELECT <: This prompt allows selecting the displayed geodetic system.

Note: The SELECT prompt is not displayed when the geodetic system is already selected.

CAUTION: The spheroid data should be modified with care ; the ranges of the data are
not monitored.

 > SPHEROID: If the USER DATUM is selected, this prompt allows selecting the GEO DATUM
SPHEROID.

Note: The USER data are recorded at the power off. By default, the USER Data are the WGS84
data (all data equal to zero).

 THALES AVIONICS 2012

J61334BB - 00
 T FMS220 - USER'S MANUAL
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Page 113

3.3.2 FLIGHT PLAN

3.3.2.1 FPLN page

The user accesses to the FPLN Page by pressing the FPLN key from the MCDU.

The flight plan page displays all legs of the active flight plan, with information on constraints, course,
heading and distance between each waypoint and predictions about ETA and EFOB. It also allows to
access to the lateral and vertical revisions.
This document and any data included are the property of Thales Avionics. They cannot be reproduced, disclosed or utilized without the company’s prior written approval.

 THALES AVIONICS 2012

J61334BB - 00
Page 114
FMS220 - USER'S MANUAL
TABLE OF CONTENTS
T

OVERVIEW

The active leg between the FROM waypoint and the TO waypoint is displayed in magenta on top of
the first FPLN page (1/N). The FROM waypoint is the departure airport on ground, the last sequenced
waypoint in flight, the T-P (Turning Point) after a Direct To or the PPOS (Present POSition) without
FROM (discontinuity before the TO).

TO
General case

FROM

This document and any data included are the property of Thales Avionics. They cannot be reproduced, disclosed or utilized without the company’s prior written approval.
TO TO not fix

FROM

TO
Direct to fix

FROM

TO FROM waypoint not specified

 THALES AVIONICS 2012

J61334BB - 00
 T FMS220 - USER'S MANUAL
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Page 115

The page provide the following data depending on the selected view (ETA/SPD/ALT or ETE/EFOB):

ETA: Estimated Time of Arrival at the corresponding fix, followed by the time reference. Refer to
"INITIALIZATION / INIT page" for local or zulu time setting.

SPD ALT : Speed and Altitude constraints.

ETE: Estimated Time En route = remaining flight time until the corresponding fix.

EFOB: Estimated Fuel On Board.

FLPN with ETA / SPD / ALT page FLPN with ETE / EFOB page
This document and any data included are the property of Thales Avionics. They cannot be reproduced, disclosed or utilized without the company’s prior written approval.

The FPLN page is a succession of a header line containing PROCEDURE NAME, LEG PATH, LEG
LENGTH and FPA fields and a data line composed by LEG TERMINATION, INDICATOR, ETA, ETE,
SPD, ALT and EFOB fields.

Estimated Time of Arrival Speed constraint

Altitude constraint

Leg termination

Procedure name Flight Path Angle constraint

Indicator
Leg path Leg length

 THALES AVIONICS 2012

J61334BB - 00
Page 116
FMS220 - USER'S MANUAL
TABLE OF CONTENTS
T

INDICATOR FIELD

OFST: indicates that an offset applies on the active leg.

∆ : this symbol appears when the status of the overfly is YES on this waypoint or when the
waypoint is a rallying waypoint (1) (an overfly is set on a rallying waypoint)

* : this symbol appears when the designated waypoint is a rallying waypoint (1)

← or → : those arrows specify the turn direction into the next leg.

12H03: ETA (resp. ETE) is underlined when a RTA is defined for this waypoint. If ETA (resp. ETE)
is displayed in amber, RTA is missed.

Note (1): Refer to "Direct to moving waypoint (OPERATIONAL PRINCIPLES / Definitions / Direct To /
Direct to a moving waypoint)" for further information.

PROCEDURE NAME FIELD

This document and any data included are the property of Thales Avionics. They cannot be reproduced, disclosed or utilized without the company’s prior written approval.
The procedure name field may contain different indications :

“HOLD ←” or “HOLD →” indicates a holding pattern with a left or right turn direction.

“TURN ←” or “TURN →” indicates a procedure turn with a left or right turn direction.

If the leg is part of a departure or an arrival procedure, the procedure name field displays the
procedure name except if there is yet one of the two preceding indicators (HOLD or TURN). A ditto
character " is displayed in place of the procedure name if the previous leg belongs to the same
procedure.

If the fix is defined as a part of an airway, the procedure name field displays the airway
identification.

 THALES AVIONICS 2012

J61334BB - 00
 T FMS220 - USER'S MANUAL
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Page 117

LEG PATH FIELD

XXX°: course from the starting waypoint to the term inating waypoint of the leg, measured at the
starting waypoint

CXXX°: indicates that the A/C follows a constant co urse (track angle) towards the leg termination.

HXXX°: indicates that the A/C follows a constant he ading towards the leg termination.

ARC XX: indicates that the A/C follows an arc path of XX distance around a fix.

XXNAV: indicates that the A/C follows an arc path of XX distance around a navaid (NAV being the
first three characters of the navaid ident)

Note:
a) When the north reference is switched (refer to "STATUS / ATT/HDG page"), all course and
heading values are converted using the magnetic variation associated to the leg.

b) On FPLN, SEC, TMPY and PROG 1/3 pages, following the degree symbol, a “T” is displayed
This document and any data included are the property of Thales Avionics. They cannot be reproduced, disclosed or utilized without the company’s prior written approval.

if the north reference is set to MAG and if the magnetic variation of the navaid or airport
associated to the leg is not defined (usually for navaids or airports in polar zone).

c) For the active leg (between FROM and TO waypoints) and if the format is “XXX°”, the path
field contains the bearing to go.

LEG LENGTH FIELD

For the active leg, this field displays the active distance to the TO waypoint, i.e. the distance between
A/C and the TO waypoint along the trajectory.

For other legs, this field contains distance from leg transition to leg transition (distance between
bisectors for straight legs).

LEG TERMINATION FIELD

XXXXXXX: indicates the waypoint name where the leg terminates (it is the most common case).

INTCP: indicates that the leg term is defined as an interception to the next leg.

HHHHH: represents an altitude leg termination.

MANUAL: used for a manual leg termination (except for a holding pattern entered by the crew).

NAV/DD: indicates that the leg terminates at a distance DD of a DME navaid (NAV being the first
three characters of the navaid ident)

NAVZZZ: indicates that the leg terminates at a radial ZZZ from a navaid (NAV being the first three
characters of the navaid ident)

 THALES AVIONICS 2012

J61334BB - 00
Page 118
FMS220 - USER'S MANUAL
TABLE OF CONTENTS
T

ETA/SPD/ALT AND ETE/EFOB FIELDS

ETE/EFOB & ETA/SPD/ALT cannot be displayed at the same time, the following prompts allows
commuting between both display modes.

 ETE/EFOB <: This prompt allows commuting the displayed fields from ETA/SPD/ALT to
ETE/EFOB.

 ETA/SPD/ALT <: This prompt allows commuting the displayed fields from ETE/EFOB to
ETA/SPD/ALT

At the FROM waypoint, all displayed values are the ones at the sequencing time of the leg. For other
remaining waypoints:

EFOB:Estimated fuel on board over the leg termination. This field is displayed in amber if EFOB at
waypoint is lower than the fuel reserve, and in green otherwise.

SPD: Speed (IAS) constraint on the leg. It can be modified by accessing to the VERT REV page.
SPD field is displayed in green.

This document and any data included are the property of Thales Avionics. They cannot be reproduced, disclosed or utilized without the company’s prior written approval.

ALT: Altitude constraint on the leg. The Altitude value or "FL" char followed by the Flight Level
value are displayed in ALT field.

If the altitude constraint is “AT or ABOVE”, the ALT value is followed by the char "A". If the altitude
constraint is “AT or BELOW”, the ALT value is followed by the char "B". Else if the altitude
constraint is “AT”, only the ALT value is displayed.

If an altitude constraint, except window altitude constraint, is corrected with the temperature
compensation (refer to "PROGRESS / VNAV page 2/2"), the char "c" is added before the first
character of the ALT constraint displayed.

ALT field is displayed in amber if it is a missed constraint, in magenta if the waypoint is the active
TO waypoint, and in green otherwise.

Altitude constraint can be modified by accessing to the VERT REV page.

Note:
a) “WINDOW” indicates a window altitude constraint.

b) SPD and ALT field could be linked without space character. Ex: "120c10651" represents a
speed constraint of 120 kt and an altitude constraint compensated of 10651 ft.

c) All These fields are displayed in cyan if they belong to legs defined as a part of a missed
approach procedure that is not activated in the flight plan.

 THALES AVIONICS 2012

J61334BB - 00
 T FMS220 - USER'S MANUAL
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Page 119

UNDO CAPABILITY

 > UNDO: When a modification has been made on the active flight plan (activation of the temporary
flight plan, activation of a route, activation or swap of the secondary flight plan or clear of the active
flight plan), it is possible to recover the flight plan before the modification during 1 minute by
pressing this Lsk to recover the previous flight plan (in the temporary flight plan).
This document and any data included are the property of Thales Avionics. They cannot be reproduced, disclosed or utilized without the company’s prior written approval.

Note: The UNDO capability is no more available after the following actions:
a) DATA ERASE

b) Standard database swapping.

 THALES AVIONICS 2012

J61334BB - 00
Page 120
FMS220 - USER'S MANUAL
TABLE OF CONTENTS
T

FPLN SCROLLING

 The user can scroll up/down the flight plan by pressing the PREV / NEXT key.

This document and any data included are the property of Thales Avionics. They cannot be reproduced, disclosed or utilized without the company’s prior written approval.

When Navigation Display mode is ARC or ROSE (mode selection at cockpit level), the scroll
corresponds to 4 legs and is managed as follow.

PREV PREV -DEST

-5 -1 -MA4
-MA1
-6 -2 -MA5 PREV
-MA2
-7 -3 -MA6
-MA3
-8 -4 -END OF FPLN-
-MA4
-9 -5
NEXT NEXT
FPLN
FPLN FPLN FPLN

When Navigation Display mode is PLAN (mode selection at cockpit level), the scroll corresponds
to 1 leg (on own side MCDU only) and is managed as follow:

PREV PREV -Z
-2 -1 -DEST
-DEST
-3 -2 -MA1 PREV
-MA1
-4 -3 -MA2
-MA2
-5 -4 -MA3
-MA3
-6 -5 -MA4
NEXT NEXT
Active FPLN in
Active FPLN in Active FPLN in Active FPLN in
PLAN mode
PLAN mode PLAN mode PLAN mode

When Navigation Display mode is PLAN, the FLPN page title becomes FPLN PLAN as follow:

 THALES AVIONICS 2012

J61334BB - 00
 T FMS220 - USER'S MANUAL
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Page 121

Note: When display mode transitions from PLAN to another mode, the first FPLN page (FPLN 1/x) is
displayed.

COCKPIT: The centering position is provided by the FMC to be

displayed on the Navigation Display. If the first fix of the FPLN is
invalid, the centering position is the A/C position.
This document and any data included are the property of Thales Avionics. They cannot be reproduced, disclosed or utilized without the company’s prior written approval.

3.3.2.2 FPLN INIT page

The user accesses to the FPLN INIT page through one of the following sequences:
− On INIT page, press FPLN INIT Lsk.
− On LTRL REV page, press NEW FPLN Lsk
− On active FPLN page, press NEW FPLN Lsk.
The FPLN INIT page allows selecting the flight plan to initialize among:
− Primary flight plan
− Secondary flight plan

 THALES AVIONICS 2012

J61334BB - 00
Page 122
FMS220 - USER'S MANUAL
TABLE OF CONTENTS
T

3.3.2.3 ROUTE SEL page

The user accesses to the ROUTE SEL page by pressing ROUTE Lsk from the FLPN INIT page.

The ROUTE SEL page allows initializing the selected flight plan from a route.

This page allows selecting a route by IDENT or FROM/TO:

This document and any data included are the property of Thales Avionics. They cannot be reproduced, disclosed or utilized without the company’s prior written approval.
 IDENT: This field allows entering the identifier of the selected route stored in database. When the
entered IDENT refers to a company route and a pilot route (1/ 2 below ROUTE SEL), the page
displays the company route. The user can display the pilot route by pressing the NEXT / PREV
key.

If the route identifier is unknown, the user can acces to the STD DATA page (CO-ROUTE) by
pressing the IDENT Lsk with an empty scratchpad then select a company route. The user can also
select a pilot route by pressing the PLT ROUTE Lsk on STD DATA page (CO-ROUTE) to access
PILOT DATA page (ROUTE), and then select the desired pilot route in the list.

Note: If no route is found with the corresponding IDENT, the following message is displayed in the
scratchpad line:

NOT IN DATABASE

 FROM/TO: This field allows entering the departure and arrival airport ICAO identifiers of the route.

The FMC will search in pilot and company database all routes begining with the FROM airport and
joining the TO airport and all routes with no departure or arrival procedures begining with the TO
airport and joining the FROM airport (reversed routes). The default direct route from selected
departure to selected destination is added to the list of company and pilot routes in last position
with an empty IDENT field.
If several routes are found, the field 1/N appears on the first line, with N the total number of routes
found.

 THALES AVIONICS 2012

J61334BB - 00
 T FMS220 - USER'S MANUAL
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Page 123

 The user can display the next/previous route by pressing the NEXT / PREV key.

Note:
a) To distinguish a pilot route from a company route, the bottom line displays "PLT ROUTE"
when the displayed route is a pilot route and displays "CO-ROUTE" when the displayed route
is a company route.

b) If the airport identification corresponds to several airports, the duplicate page is then displayed
to select the desired data.

c) The default direct route from selected departure to selected destination is only composed by
the departure and arrival airports. The identifier field is empty and no indication is displayed in
the bottom line.
This document and any data included are the property of Thales Avionics. They cannot be reproduced, disclosed or utilized without the company’s prior written approval.

 The user can scroll along the route content by pressing “- - - ->” or “< - - - -” Lsk.

 THALES AVIONICS 2012

J61334BB - 00
Page 124
FMS220 - USER'S MANUAL
TABLE OF CONTENTS
T

 REVERSE <: This prompt allows reversing the selected route. If the route is reversed, the route
waypoints are displayed in reverse order, and departure / arrival airport are swapped.

CAUTION: If the selected route contains a waypoint that does not belong to the selected
standard database, the reverse of the route is possible but has to be avoided. The reverse
route would be inconsistent.

Note:
a) REVERSE prompt is not available for routes which contain departure and/or arrival procedure.

b) If the selected route is reversed compared to the one stored in the database, the
“REVERSED” flag is displayed in reverse video.

This document and any data included are the property of Thales Avionics. They cannot be reproduced, disclosed or utilized without the company’s prior written approval.

 THALES AVIONICS 2012

J61334BB - 00
 T FMS220 - USER'S MANUAL
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Page 125

FLT ID: This field allows entering the flight number with up to 8 alphanumeric characters.

Note:
a) The FLT ID field is only available for active flight plan initialization (FPLN displayed in R6).

b) Allowed characters are A-Z letters and 0-9 decimal digits.

This document and any data included are the property of Thales Avionics. They cannot be reproduced, disclosed or utilized without the company’s prior written approval.

The Right 6th (R6) Line Selected Key proposes the suitable flight plan to initialize with the selected
route between active FPLN, SEC or TMPY (by circular permutation).

 FPLN <: This prompt allows initializing the active flight plan with the selected route.

 SEC <: This prompt allows initializing the secondary flight plan with the selected route.

 TMPY <: This prompt allows initializing the temporary flight plan with the selected route.

Note:
a) If the route contains airways, arrival and/or departure procedure(s), the legs of the airways
and/or procedure(s) are inserted in the flight plan. The airways identifiers are displayed in
reverse video, between FROM and TO fixes.

b) If the route contains airways, waypoints or procedure segments no longer belonging to the
current Standard Database, they are replaced in the flight plan by discontinuities (between
FROM and TO fixes in case of airways).

 THALES AVIONICS 2012

J61334BB - 00
Page 126
FMS220 - USER'S MANUAL
TABLE OF CONTENTS
T

3.3.2.4 SEC INIT page

The user accesses to the SEC INIT page by:

Pressing < SEC INIT Lsk from the FPLN INIT page.

Pressing < NEW FPLN Lsk from the SEC FPLN page.

This document and any data included are the property of Thales Avionics. They cannot be reproduced, disclosed or utilized without the company’s prior written approval.
 < ROUTE: This prompt allows accessing to the ROUTE SEL page associated to the secondary
flight plan

 > COPY FPLN: This prompt allows copying the active flight plan into the secondary flight plan
(after confirmation).

This action is taken into account only after confirmation by pressing the EXEC key. After
confirmation, the previous secondary flight plan is deleted. Then the following constraints are
applied:
− When the active flight plan is sequenced, the secondary flight plan is automatically
sequenced if the first leg of the secondary flight plan (which corresponds to an active leg)
matches the active leg being sequenced. The secondary flight plan is no longer sequenced
when the first leg of the secondary no longer matches the active leg.
− Revisions on active flight plan are applied on secondary flight plan, on common part with
not revised active flight plan. The secondary is used as an alternate in order to propagate
revisions on active to secondary flight plan for the common part, before the divergence of
the two flight plans.
Note: If a temporary flight plan exists, no copy is performed and the following message is displayed
in the scratchpad line:

TMPY EXIST

 SWAP FPLN <: This prompt allows swapping the active flight plan and the secondary flight Plan.

Note:
a) If the secondary FPLN was initialized as a copy of the active flight plan before the swap, the
revisions of the active flight plan keeps being reported on the secondary flight plan after the
swap.

b) If a temporary flight plan exists, no swap is performed and the following message is displayed
in the scratchpad line:
TMPY EXIST

 THALES AVIONICS 2012

J61334BB - 00
 T FMS220 - USER'S MANUAL
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Page 127

 ACTIVATE <: This prompt allows activating the secondary flight plan.

 CANCEL SEC <: This prompt allows cancelling the secondary flight Plan.

Note: The secondary flight plan is also cancelled when a DATA ERASE is performed. The
secondary flight plan is not cancelled (nor modified) when it has been initialized as a copy of the active
flight plan and the active flight plan is cancelled.

 SEC PERF >: This prompt allows displaying the SEC PERF page.

3.3.2.5 SEC FPLN page

The user accesses to the SEC FPLN page by pressing the FPLN key from the FPLN page.
This document and any data included are the property of Thales Avionics. They cannot be reproduced, disclosed or utilized without the company’s prior written approval.

Refer to "FPLN page" for the description of parameters displayed in the page and the actions allowed
from this page.

 THALES AVIONICS 2012

J61334BB - 00
Page 128
FMS220 - USER'S MANUAL
TABLE OF CONTENTS
T

3.3.2.6 LTRL REV page at PPOS

The user accesses to the LTRL REV page at PPOS by pressing the left Lsk beside FROM on the
FPLN page.

The page is composed of the following fields :

This document and any data included are the property of Thales Avionics. They cannot be reproduced, disclosed or utilized without the company’s prior written approval.

Position : Current computed position of the A/C.

OFFSET: This field allows entering an offset.

< HOLDING: This prompt allows accessing to the HOLDING AT page (at PPOS).

CHECK POS TO: This field allows getting the bearing/distance from the A/C position to a selected
waypoint by writing the waypoint identifier in the scratchpad then pressing the CHECK POS TO
Lsk.

When CHECK POS TO Lsk is pressed with an empty scratchpad, the DATA LIST page is
displayed with filter “ALL”.

Note: CHECK POS is not possible towards moving waypoints.

 NEW FPLN >: This prompt allows accessing to the FPLN INIT page to select a new flight plan

Note: If a leg sequencing or a flight plan modification happens, when the LTRL REV page is
displayed, then the first FPLN page is automatically displayed.

 THALES AVIONICS 2012

J61334BB - 00
 T FMS220 - USER'S MANUAL
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Page 129

3.3.2.7 LTRL REV page at WPT

The user accesses to the LTRL REV page at WPT by pressing, from the FPLN page, the left Lsk
beside any waypoint of the active flight plan but the FROM or the destination.

The page is composed of several fields which are described here below :
This document and any data included are the property of Thales Avionics. They cannot be reproduced, disclosed or utilized without the company’s prior written approval.

Position : coordinates of the revised waypoint in the selected navigation mode.

Revised waypoint identifier field : name of the revised waypoint. When this Lsk is pressed, the
corresponding database page is displayed.

< HOLDING: This prompt allows accessing to the HOLDING AT page (at the revised waypoint).

OVERFLY: This promt allows inserting an overfly constraint on the revised waypoint by pressing
the Lsk beside the prompt to commute the status.

If the overfly status is YES, the overfly symbol ∆ is displayed after the waypoint identification.

Note: HOLDING and OVERFLY fields are present only if able to be activated at the revised
waypoint.

< DEPARTURE / ARRIVAL: This prompt allows accessing to the DEPARTURE / ARRIVAL page.

This prompt is available only if the revised point is part of the departure procedure (<
DEPARTURE) or if the revised point is part of the arrival procedure (< ARRIVAL).

NEXT WPT: This field allows inserting a next waypoint in the flight plan by entering the waypoint
identifier in the scratchpad then pressing the Lsk next to this field.

The TMPY page is then displayed to check the flight plan and to confirm its activation. When
NEXT WPT Lsk is pressed with empty scratchpad, the DATA LIST page is displayed with filter
“ALL”.

This field is avalaible only if a waypoint can be inserted after the revised fix.

Note: This field can also be used to insert a LAT/LON crossing point or an Along Track Offset point
in the flight plan. Refer to "MULTI PHASE RELATED PROCEDURES / Lateral functions / Flight plan
revision / Inserting a waypoint / LAT/LON crossing" or "Along Track Offset" for description.

NEW DEST: This field allows selecting a new destination from the revised waypoint by entering
the airport identifier in the scratchpad then pressing the Lsk next to this field.

 THALES AVIONICS 2012

J61334BB - 00
Page 130
FMS220 - USER'S MANUAL
TABLE OF CONTENTS
T

The TMPY page is then displayed to check the flight plan and to confirm its activation. When NEW
DEST Lsk is pressed with an empty scratchpad, the DATA LIST page is displayed with standard
and pilot airports filter.

This field is not available for manual termination legs, and at FROM and destination. Thus, to
change destination when the TO waypoint is the destination, perform a DIRECT TO an airport
(refer to "DIRECT TO / DTO page)

Note: A discontinuity is inserted between the revised waypoint and the new destination.

AIRWAY: This field allows accessing to the AIRWAY page to insert an airway segment after the
revised waypoint by entering the airway identifier in the scratchpad then pressing the Lsk next to
this field and access the AIRWAY page.

The AIRWAY field is not present when the revised waypoint does not belong to any airway in the
standard database.

Note:
a) In LTRL REV page, if the airway, whose identifier has been entered in the Lsk beside the

This document and any data included are the property of Thales Avionics. They cannot be reproduced, disclosed or utilized without the company’s prior written approval.
AIRWAY field with bracket, does not contain the revised waypoint, the entry is rejected and
the following message is displayed in the scratchpad line:
NOT IN DATABASE

b) If the Lsk next to the AIRWAY field with bracket is pressed with an empty scratchpad, the
AIRWAY LIST page is displayed.

 > NEW FPLN: This prompt allows accessing to the FPLN INIT page to select a new flight plan.

Note: If a leg sequencing or a flight plan modification happens, when the LTRL REV page is
displayed, then the first FPLN page is automatically displayed.

 THALES AVIONICS 2012

J61334BB - 00
 T FMS220 - USER'S MANUAL
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Page 131

3.3.2.8 VERT REV page

The user accesses to the VERT REV page by pressing on the FPLN page the right Lsk beside any
waypoint of the active flight plan except the FROM.

The VERT REV page allows displaying the vertical navigation information and the constraints at the
revised waypoint. The user can also inserting or modifying a vertical step or a vertical constraint if
required.
This document and any data included are the property of Thales Avionics. They cannot be reproduced, disclosed or utilized without the company’s prior written approval.

The VERT REV page contains the following fields:

AT: Identification of the revised waypoint. If the overfly status is YES, the overfly symbol ∆ is
displayed next to the waypoint identification. When this Lsk is pressed, the corresponding
database page is displayed.

STEP TO: Step altitude at the revised point. The user can insert or modifying a step by entering
the altitude to intercept in the scratchpad then pressing the Lsk next to this field.

> STEP MODE: This prompt allows selecting the mode to perform the step.

 THALES AVIONICS 2012

J61334BB - 00
Page 132
FMS220 - USER'S MANUAL
TABLE OF CONTENTS
T

ALT CNSTR: Altitude constraint at the revised point. The user can insert a new constraint or
modify an existing one.

CAUTION: If the altitude constraint of a leg in altitude termination is modified, the altitude
constraint is updated and the altitude leg termination is kept, as defined in the database.

Note:
a) For ALT CNSTR greater than 36000 feet, some conversion errors may be introduced by the
FMC. Only conversions from “FLxxxx” formats are guaranteed.

b) If the altitude constraint is corrected with the temperature compensation (refer to "PROGRESS
/ VNAV page 2/2"), the char "c" is added before the first character of the ALT CNSTR
displayed.

c) If the altitude constraint is inserted while the temperature compensation is selected (refer to
"PROGRESS / VNAV page 2/2"), as the value of the altitude is compensated the value of ALT
CNSTR is not updated with the temperature compensation and the char "c" is added before
the first character of the altitude displayed. If the temperature compensation is becoming

This document and any data included are the property of Thales Avionics. They cannot be reproduced, disclosed or utilized without the company’s prior written approval.
deselected (rare operational case), the value of ALT CNSTR is not updated without the
temperature compensation and the char "c" is erased.

Example: "c3000" is displayed after the altitude constraint insertion and "3000" after the deselection
of the temperature compensation.

RTA L/Z ETA : Required Time of Arrival at the revised point (Local or Zulu) / discrepancy time.

SPD CNSTR : Speed constraint at the revised point.

FPA : Flight path angle used for the vertical guidance.

This parameter is displayed in cyan if it can be cleared or entered by the crew, in green otherwise.
FPA is purpose.

Note: If a leg sequencing or a flight plan modification happens, when this page is displayed, then the
first FPLN page is automatically displayed.

 < WIND: This prompt allows accessing to the WIND page for vertical wind profile management.

 THALES AVIONICS 2012

J61334BB - 00
 T FMS220 - USER'S MANUAL
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Page 133

3.3.2.9 DEPARTURE page

The user accesses on ground to the DEPARTURE page by pressing the Lsk beside the departure
from the FPLN page.

The DEPARTURE page displays the list of runways of the selected departure airport and their lengths
(if the runway has not been already selected).
This document and any data included are the property of Thales Avionics. They cannot be reproduced, disclosed or utilized without the company’s prior written approval.

 The user can access to the other elements of the list by pressing NEXT / PREV key to scroll
left/right the list.

 The user can select the runway by pressing the Lsk beside the desired one.

RWY field is completed with the selected runway identifier and the list of SID compatible with this
runway appears.

Note:
a) RWY selection on the primary flight plan (active or temporary flight plan) is only allowed on
ground.

b) When only a runway is selected, a waypoint along the runway course, 1500 ft above the
airport elevation is automatically inserted after the runway.

 THALES AVIONICS 2012

J61334BB - 00
Page 134
FMS220 - USER'S MANUAL
TABLE OF CONTENTS
T

 The user can select the SID by pressing the Lsk beside the desired one.

The SID field is completed with the selected SID identifier and the list of compatible TRANSITION
appears.

 The user can select the SID TRANSITION by pressing the Lsk beside the desired one.

This document and any data included are the property of Thales Avionics. They cannot be reproduced, disclosed or utilized without the company’s prior written approval.
The TRANS field is completed with the selected TRANS identifier and no more list is displayed.

 TMPY >: This prompt allow Checking the temporary flight plan before inserting the departure
procedure into the active flight plan.

Note:
a) It is allowed to activate the EXEC command even if SID or TRANS fields are not completed.

b) It is not allowed to enter a SID without a RWY or a TRANS without a SID.

 THALES AVIONICS 2012

J61334BB - 00
 T FMS220 - USER'S MANUAL
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Page 135

3.3.2.10 ARRIVAL page

The user accesses on ground to the ARRIVAL page by pressing the Lsk beside the arrival from the
FPLN page. The ARRIVAL page is displayed with, for each approach, its identifier. If the approach
has not been already selected (NONE), the ARRIVAL page displays the list of approachs of the
selected arrival.

Refer to "OPERATIONAL PRINCIPLES / Definitions / Approach identification" for a detailed

description of the identification rules for the approach.

Note: If a leg sequencing or a flight plan modification happens, when the ARRIVAL page is
displayed, then the first FPLN page is automatically displayed.

 The user can scroll left / right the list by pressing NEXT / PREV key.

 The user can select the approach procedure by pressing the Lsk beside the desired approach.
The APP field is completed with the selected approach identifier and the list of compatible STAR
appears. A specific field displays the recommended navaid ident and frequency for the selected
approach.
This document and any data included are the property of Thales Avionics. They cannot be reproduced, disclosed or utilized without the company’s prior written approval.

Note: This navaid is retrieved from the navigation database and is defined as the recommended
navaid at the approach FAF if such a fix exists, else it is defined as the recommended navaid of the
first leg of the initial approach section of the flight plan (approach transition legs excluded). In case
FAF and first approach route leg have no recommended navaid, this field is blank and approach
procedure will have no recommended navaid.

 The user can selecting the STAR by pressing the Lsk beside the desired STAR. The STAR field is
completed with the selected STAR identifier and the list of compatible VIA appears.

 THALES AVIONICS 2012

J61334BB - 00
Page 136
FMS220 - USER'S MANUAL
TABLE OF CONTENTS
T

 The user can select the VIA (junction between the end of the STAR and the approach) by pressing
the Lsk beside the desired VIA. The STAR field is completed with the selected STAR identifier and
the list of compatible VIA appears.

 The user can select the TRANS (junction between the last en route waypoint and the first
waypoint of the STAR) the Lsk beside the desired TRANS . The TRANS field is completed with the
selected TRANS identifier and no more list is displayed.

This document and any data included are the property of Thales Avionics. They cannot be reproduced, disclosed or utilized without the company’s prior written approval.
 TMPY >: This prompt allow Checking the temporary flight plan before inserting the departure
procedure into the active flight plan.

 The user activates the arrival procedure by pressing the EXEC key on the MCDU.

Note:
a) Once the EXEC key is pressed, the procedure is validated, even if all fields are not completed.

b) At the insertion of an arrival procedure, stringing rules apply then some waypoints of the flight
plan may be deleted as a consequence of the stringing procedure. For more details about the
stringing rules refer to "OPERATIONAL PRINCIPLES / Definitions / Arrival procedure".

 THALES AVIONICS 2012

J61334BB - 00
 T FMS220 - USER'S MANUAL
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Page 137

3.3.2.11 AIRWAY page

The user accesses to the AIRWAY page through one of the following sequences:

From the AIRWAYS page, press the Lsk beside the VIA field with brackets with empty scratchpad

From the LTRL REV page, press AIRWAY Lsk with empty scratchpad

From the PLT ROUTE page, enter ‘/’ on the Lsk following the FROM fix Lsk

This page lists all airways that contain the FROM fix, sorted by alphanumeric order, whose level
corresponds to the filter value displayed beside R6 key.
This document and any data included are the property of Thales Avionics. They cannot be reproduced, disclosed or utilized without the company’s prior written approval.

 The NEXT / PREV key allows scrolling left or right within the airway list.

 LEVEL <: This promt allows selecting the level filter by circular permutation.
− HIGH+LOW: for high and low level airways
− HIGH: for high and both level airways
− LOW: for low and both level airways
Note: After a long power interruption, the default level filter value is «HIGH+LOW».

 The user can selecting the airway by pressing the relevant Lsk.

Note: If the FROM fix is sequenced or if a flight plan modification happens when the AIRWAY LIST
page is displayed, then the FPLN page is automatically displayed.

 THALES AVIONICS 2012

J61334BB - 00
Page 138
FMS220 - USER'S MANUAL
TABLE OF CONTENTS
T

3.3.2.12 AIRWAYS page

The user accesses to the AIRWAYS page by entering the airway identifier on the Lsk beside the
AIRWAY field from the LTRL REV page.

The page is composed of the following fields:

− VIA: Identification of the airway,
− FROM: Identification of the FROM fix of the airway,
− TO: Identification of the TO fix of the airway.
This field allows entering the TO fix identifier or going to the TO LIST page by pressing it with
empty scratchpad.

This document and any data included are the property of Thales Avionics. They cannot be reproduced, disclosed or utilized without the company’s prior written approval.
Note:
a) If the entered TO fix ident does not belong to the selected airway, the entry is rejected and the
following message is displayed in the scratchpad line:
NOT IN DATABASE

b) If a TO fix ident is entered and several TO fixes of the airway have the same ident, the TO
LIST page is displayed (refer to "TO LIST page").

 The user can insert the airway segment into the previously displayed flight plan:
− TMPY >: This prompt allows inserting the airway segment into the temporary flight plan.
− SEC >: This prompt allows inserting of the airway segment into the secondary flight plan.
− The user shall press the EXEC key to confirm the insertion of the the airway segment into
the active flight plan.
 The user can also link another airway segment by entering an airway identifier or pressing the Lsk
beside the brackets with empty scratchpad, to access to the AIRWAY LIST page and choose
another airway.

 THALES AVIONICS 2012

J61334BB - 00
 T FMS220 - USER'S MANUAL
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Page 139

Note:
a) Up to 5 airway segments can be inserted.
If more than 5 segments have to be inserted, PRESS EXEC on the FPLN page then add the
other segments.

b) If the airway, whose identifier has been entered in the Lsk beside the VIA field with bracket,
does not contain the FROM fix, the entry is rejected and the following message is displayed in
the scratchpad line:
NOT IN DATABASE

c) If a leg sequencing occurs and the FROM fix is sequenced or if a flight plan modification
happens, when the AIRWAYS page is displayed, then the previously displayed FPLN page is
automatically displayed.
This document and any data included are the property of Thales Avionics. They cannot be reproduced, disclosed or utilized without the company’s prior written approval.

 THALES AVIONICS 2012

J61334BB - 00
Page 140
FMS220 - USER'S MANUAL
TABLE OF CONTENTS
T

3.3.2.13 TO LIST page

The user accesses to the TO LIST page through one of the following sequences:

From AIRWAY LIST page (if accessed from PLT ROUTE page) by pressing a Lsk beside an
airway.

From PLT ROUTE page by entering an airway identification followed by ‘/’ on the Lsk following the
FROM fix Lsk.

From AIRWAYS page by pressing the Lsk beside the TO field with amber boxes with empty
scratchpad.

This document and any data included are the property of Thales Avionics. They cannot be reproduced, disclosed or utilized without the company’s prior written approval.
Sequence order

This page displays all the TO fixes that belong to the airway, sorted by sequence order (according to
the above picture). Each fix is displayed in cyan font with its ICAO code except the FROM fix which is
displayed in green font without prompt.

 NEXT / PREV key allows scrolling left or right the TO fixes list.

 The user can select the TO waypoint among the fixes of the selected airway by pressing the Lsk
beside the desired fix.

Note: If the Lsk beside the FROM fix is pressed, the following message is displayed in the
scratchpad line:

NO ACTION DEFINED

Note: If the FROM fix is sequenced or if a flight plan modification happens when the TO LIST page
is displayed, then the previously displayed FPLN page is automatically displayed.

 THALES AVIONICS 2012

J61334BB - 00
 T FMS220 - USER'S MANUAL
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Page 141

3.3.2.14 WIND page

The user accesses to the WIND page by pressing the < WIND Lsk from the VERT REV page.

Note:
a) WIND page can not be accessed from the last waypoint of the flight plan (excluding missed
approach)

b) Vertical revision on the FROM waypoint on FPLN page directly displays the WIND page with
the current vertical navigation profile information.
This document and any data included are the property of Thales Avionics. They cannot be reproduced, disclosed or utilized without the company’s prior written approval.

The WIND page is displayed with the waypoint wind profile information. It contains :

FROM: Identification of the waypoint from which the wind profile is applicable.

TO: Identification of the next waypoint with a vertical wind profile (destination otherwise).

TRUE WIND / ALT: Wind groups, each one defined by an origin, a speed and an altitude.

Note:
a) TRUE WIND / ALT is displayed in large font when the vertical wind profile is defined at the
revised waypoint.

b) TRUE WIND / ALT is displayed in small font when the vertical wind profile is propagated.

 When a prompt is displayed beside the TO waypoint, the user can display the next vertical wind
profile defined in the flight plan by pressing the Lsk next to this prompt.

 PREV / NEXT key allows accessing to the wind profile of the previous/next leg.

 The user can enter a wind group value in the scratchpad (wind origin/wind speed/wind altitude)
then press the Lsk beside the empty cyan bracket to insert a new wind group or beside an existing
group to modify it.

Example: 290/40/200 for a wind group at FL200 with wind origin and speed of 290°/40kt.

 THALES AVIONICS 2012

J61334BB - 00
Page 142
FMS220 - USER'S MANUAL
TABLE OF CONTENTS
T

Note: Wind origin range is [0;360]°, wind speed range is [0;155]kt and wind altitude range is
FL[0;400]. The wind altitude difference between two wind groups must be greater than FL5.
Otherwise, the inserted wind group will be rejected.

CAUTION: If the revised leg is sequenced or if a flight plan modification happens, when
the WIND page is displayed, then the previously displayed FPLN page is automatically

This document and any data included are the property of Thales Avionics. They cannot be reproduced, disclosed or utilized without the company’s prior written approval.
displayed.

Note:
a) The user can insert up to 4 wind groups for each allowed leg. The wind groups are sorted
according to a decreasing altitude from the top to the bottom of the page.

b) Vertical wind profile insertion or modification is only allowed on legs with terminating fix (CF,
DF, TF, IF, RF and AF legs). Otherwise, no brackets are displayed, the wind groups are
displayed in small green font and any insertion or deletion will be rejected.

 The user can delete a wind group by performing a CLEAR action on the desired wind group Lsk.

Note: When deleting the last wind group of a wind profile, the wind profile is filled with upstream or
downstream wind profile according to propagation rules. The last wind group of a propagated wind
profile cannot be deleted.

 The user can activate the vertical wind profile and returning to the FPLN page by pressing the
EXEC key.

 THALES AVIONICS 2012

J61334BB - 00
 T FMS220 - USER'S MANUAL
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Page 143

3.3.2.15 HOLDING AT page

The user accesses to the HOLDING AT page by pressing the HOLDING Lsk from the LTRL REV
page (at PPOS or at WPT). This page allows entering or editing a holding pattern. The insertion of a
holding pattern is only allowed at waypoints of the active flight plan or at the present position (PPOS).

Note:
a) It is not allowed to insert a holding pattern at PPOS if A/C parameters (position, track, ground
speed and true air speed) are not all valid.

b) If the FROM waypoint is the departure airport, the insertion of a holding pattern at PPOS is not
allowed. The solution is to perform, firstly, a DIRECT TO the TO waypoint and then a holding
at PPOS.

c) When a holding pattern is inserted at PPOS, the position of the entry point is the current
position when the user presses the EXEC key.
This document and any data included are the property of Thales Avionics. They cannot be reproduced, disclosed or utilized without the company’s prior written approval.

This page displays the following parameters:

Identification of the holding waypoint.

INBND CRS: Inbound course for the holding pattern : present A/C track if insertion at PPOS or if
there is a discontinuity before the revised point, or course of the leg arrival at the revised point.

TURN: Turn direction for the holding pattern (default value: right).

TIME: Time to fly the inbound leg to the holding pattern (default value: 1 minute).

DIST: Length of the inbound leg to the holding pattern (computed according to the Holding IAS
and TIME).

Note: The TIME / DIST parameters define the length of the inbound leg.

IAS: Indicated air speed for the holding pattern (target speed computed by the FMC). The user
can overwrite it by entering a new value in the scratchpad then pressing the relevant Lsk.

Refer to "OPERATIONAL PRINCIPLES / Flight guidance principles / Managed speed".

ETA: Estimated Time of Arrival at the next holding exit.

EFOB: Estimated Fuel On Board when reaching the next holding exit.

 THALES AVIONICS 2012

J61334BB - 00
Page 144
FMS220 - USER'S MANUAL
TABLE OF CONTENTS
T

 > TURN: This prompt allows selecting the turn side between LEFT and RIGHT by pressing the
Lsk

 INBND CRS: This field allows modifying the inbound course by entering the new value "NNN" in
the scratchpad then pressing the Lsk to insert it.

 TIME / DIST Lsk: This field allows modifying the inbound leg length by entering a new value "N.N"
of the time to fly the inbound leg (TIME), OR a new value "/NN.N" of the inbound leg length (DIST)
in the scratchpad then pressing the Lsk to insert it.

This document and any data included are the property of Thales Avionics. They cannot be reproduced, disclosed or utilized without the company’s prior written approval.
Note:
a) No leading zero is required for INBND CRS, DIST and IAS

b) Modified parameters are displayed in large font whereas default values are displayed in small
font.

 The user inserts the holding pattern in the active flight plan by pressing the EXEC key.

 THALES AVIONICS 2012

J61334BB - 00
 T FMS220 - USER'S MANUAL
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Page 145

3.3.3 PROGRESS

3.3.3.1 PROG 1/3 page

The user accesses to the PROG 1/3 page by pressing the PROG key from the MCDU.

This page displays the beginning of the active flight plan (FROM, TO and NEXT waypoints), the next
This document and any data included are the property of Thales Avionics. They cannot be reproduced, disclosed or utilized without the company’s prior written approval.

vertical pseudo-waypoint information and the DEST predictions :

FPLN field : those lines are similar to the FPLN page ones with SPD/ALT option.

Pseudo-waypoint field : it contains information relative to the next vertical pseudo-waypoint :

− TOD for Top Of Descent or ↓AAAAA or ↑AAAAA for an altitude interception.
− estimated time of arrival and distance from A/C position to next vertical pseudo-waypoint.

NRP : Estimated time of arrival at the Non Return Point.

DEST: Identifier of the destination : airport or ENDFPLN if no airport selected as destination.

ETA: Estimated time of arrival at destination (through the defined path).

DIST: Distance between A/C and destination.

EFOB: Estimated fuel on board at destination (through the defined path).

 < PRAIM Lsk: This prompt allows accessing to the PRAIM 1/2 page. For more details, refer to
"PRAIM 1/2 page".

For more details, refer to "MULTI PHASES RELATED PROCEDURES / Lateral functions /
Predictive RAIM".

 THALES AVIONICS 2012

J61334BB - 00
Page 146
FMS220 - USER'S MANUAL
TABLE OF CONTENTS
T

3.3.3.2 PROG 2/3 page

The user accesses to the PROG 2/3 page by pressing the PROG key then the NEXT key from the
MCDU (or by pressing the key PROG key two times).

This page displays the following navigation parameters:

This document and any data included are the property of Thales Avionics. They cannot be reproduced, disclosed or utilized without the company’s prior written approval.

TO: The TO waypoint identifier.

WIND: Wind origin and speed of the selected navigation mode.

DTK: Desired Track to reach the TO waypoint.

TTG: Time To Go to the TO point: time necessary to fly to the TO waypoint (i.e. DIST) at the
current ground speed.

Note: This parameter is invalid (dashed) when current ground speed is lower or equal to 8kt

BRG: Bearing between the FMS position and the TO waypoint.

DIST: Direct Distance between the FMS position and the TO waypoint.

FOB: Total fuel weight.

TK: Track angle provided by the selected navigation mode.

GS: Ground Speed provided by the selected navigation mode.

TGT/IAS: On first field the target airspeed (TGT IAS), on second field the Indicated Air Speed
(IAS).

Note: For TGT IAS parameter description, refer to "OPERATIONAL PRINCIPLES / Flight guidance
principles / Vertical navigation / Vertical navigation parameters".

DRIFT: Drift angle.

XTK: Cross Track Error

TKE: Track Angle Error.

RNP: Required Navigation Performance.

 THALES AVIONICS 2012

J61334BB - 00
 T FMS220 - USER'S MANUAL
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Page 147

ANP: Actual Navigation Performance: Refer to "OPERATIONAL PRINCIPLES / Definitions /

Required Navigation Performance (RNP)"

OFFSET: Lateral Offset value.

For more details about the lateral navigation parameters displayed on the PROG 2/3 page, refer to
"OPERATIONAL PRINCIPLES / Flight Management principles / Guidance / Lateral navigation".

Note:
a) The TO, DTK, and Speed Constraint values are recommended to follow the flight plan, so they
are in magenta.

b) When there is no Speed Constraint, this value is dashed.

The displayed Required Navigation Performance (RNP) can be the following:

If the TO fix is part of an airway segment, SID, STAR or approach procedures legs inserted in the
flight plan, then a RNP value associated to the corresponding leg is retrieved from standard
database if defined. The displayed RNP value is the minimum value between default value and
This document and any data included are the property of Thales Avionics. They cannot be reproduced, disclosed or utilized without the company’s prior written approval.

database value. In that case, it is displayed in small cyan font.

A value entered by the crew (displayed in large cyan font).

The default value (displayed in small cyan font).

For more details about the default values, refer to "OPERATIONAL PRINCIPLES / Definitions /
Required Navigation Performance (RNP)"

3.3.3.3 PROG 3/3 page

The user accesses to the PROG 3/3 page by pressing the PROG key then the PREV key from the
MCDU (or by pressing the key PROG key three times).

The PROG 3/3 page displays the following parameters:

− the position (coordinates) provided by the selected navigation mode (displayed in green).
− the position discrepancy between the selected mode and the other mode(s).
− the 95% confidence horizontal position accuracy, EPE (Estimated Position Error ), of each
navigation mode.
− the discrepancy from the FMS position to the opposite FMS position (displayed in green).

 THALES AVIONICS 2012

J61334BB - 00
Page 148
FMS220 - USER'S MANUAL
TABLE OF CONTENTS
T

3.3.3.4 BCP NAV page

The user accesses to the BCP NAV page by pressing the BCP Lsk from the PROG 3/3 page.

The following parameters calculated by the BCP function are displayed:

LAT/LONG: Coordinates of the BCP position.

This document and any data included are the property of Thales Avionics. They cannot be reproduced, disclosed or utilized without the company’s prior written approval.

EPE: Estimated Position Error.

TK: TracK angle.

GS: Ground Speed.

WIND: Wind origin and speed.

Note: In BCP dead reckoning backup mode, or when TAS is invalid or lower than 30kt, wind origin
and speed can be inserted.

 The user can select/deselect a sensor for the BCP computation by pressing the right Lsk next to
the corresponding sensor.

 THALES AVIONICS 2012

J61334BB - 00
 T FMS220 - USER'S MANUAL
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Page 149

3.3.3.5 GPS NAV page

The user accesses to the GPS NAV page by pressing the GPS Lsk from the PROG 3/3 page.

The following parameters provided by the GPS and moni-tored by the FMS are displayed:

LAT/LONG: Coordinates of GPS position.

This document and any data included are the property of Thales Avionics. They cannot be reproduced, disclosed or utilized without the company’s prior written approval.

EPE: Estimated Position Error.

TK: TracK angle.

GS: Ground Speed.

ALT: GPS ALTitude (MSL).

WIND: FMC computed wind origin and speed.

HIL: RAIM Horizontal Integrity Limit.

the monitored SOURCE: GPS1 or GPS2

HDOP: Horizontal Dilution Of Precision.

GPS MODE:
− INIT: Initialization, the GPS receiver is initializing time and position information.
− ACQ: Acquisition, the receiver is tracking satellites.
− NAV: Navigation, 3D position and time are provided.
− ALT: Altitude/Clock aiding. The GPS receiver uses FMS informations of altitude or clock to
perform a 3D localization. RAIM is not available.
− TEST: Self Test
− AIDED: The receiver uses external speed to update its position (until enough satellites
can be received).
− FAULT: GPS failure.
 PRAIM >: This prompt allows accessing to the PRAIM 1/2 page. For more details, refer to "PRAIM
1/2 page".

 THALES AVIONICS 2012

J61334BB - 00
Page 150
FMS220 - USER'S MANUAL
TABLE OF CONTENTS
T

3.3.3.6 PRAIM 1/2 page

The user accesses to the PRAIM page by pressing PRAIM Lsk from the PROG 1/3 page or from the
GPS NAV page.

Note: In GROUND flight phase, the page displayed from PROG 1/3 page is the PRAIM 2/2 page.
Press PREV / NEXT key to display the PRAIM 1/2 page.

This document and any data included are the property of Thales Avionics. They cannot be reproduced, disclosed or utilized without the company’s prior written approval.
This page displays the following data:

DEST: Identification of the destination.

DEST ETA L/Z: Estimated Time of Arrival at the destination (Local or Zulu)

List of the HIL values predicted at the destination, at the ETA and this time plus or minus 5, 10 or
15 minutes.

WPT: Identification of the alternate airport (if it exists) or any fix entered by the crew. This field
allows entering a waypoint identifier in order to perform a RAIM prediction at its position.

WPT ETA L/Z: Estimated Time of Arrival at the alternate airport or at any fix entered by the crew
(Local or Zulu). This field allows entering an ETA in order to perform a RAIM prediction at this
time.

List of the HIL values predicted at the waypoint, at the ETA and this time plus or minus 5, 10 or 15
minutes.

DESELECTED SATELLITES: PRN(s) of the GPS satellites that are not taken into account for the
Predictive RAIM computation.

A HIL value that is greater than 0.3NM is displayed in amber. If the PRAIM is unavailable for the HIL
value or if the HIL value is greater than 15NM, it is displayed with amber dashes. Otherwise, the HIL
value is displayed in green.

Note: HIL values are blank while prediction computation along the flight plan is running.

 The user can deselect a GPS satellite by entering a satellite number then pressing the Lsk beside
the brackets [ ].

Note: Up to 2 satellites can be deselected. If the entered number corresponds to a satellite already
deselected, the following message is displayed in the scratchpad line:

ALREADY DESELECTED

 THALES AVIONICS 2012

J61334BB - 00
 T FMS220 - USER'S MANUAL
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Page 151

Note: Deselecting a satellite is not allowed while prediction computation along the flight plan is
running (refer to "PRAIM 2/2 page" for more details)

 The user can cancel a deselection by performing a CLEAR action on Lsk beside a deselected
satellite.

The displayed HIL values in the right column are cleared after each modification of the WPT identifier
or of the WPT ETA Z to allow displaying the new values predicted at the new location / time. All the
displayed HIL values (for DEST and for WPT) are cleared after any satellite deselection or reselection
to allow displaying the new values predicted according to the new constellation.

Note:
a) If the waypoint is the alternate airport, perform a CLEAR action on the ETA L/Z field to display
the computed value.

b) If the alternate airport is changed from another screen, the WPT and ETA fields will be
replaced by the alternate airport WPT and ETA values.

 The user can access to the PRAIM 2/2 page by pressing the PREV or NEXT key.
This document and any data included are the property of Thales Avionics. They cannot be reproduced, disclosed or utilized without the company’s prior written approval.

 THALES AVIONICS 2012

J61334BB - 00
Page 152
FMS220 - USER'S MANUAL
TABLE OF CONTENTS
T

3.3.3.7 PRAIM 2/2 page

The user accesses to the PRAIM 2/2 page by pressing PRAIM Lsk from the PROG 1/3 page (only
while in GROUND flight phase) or by pressing PREV / NEXT key from the PRAIM 1/2 page.

This page allows Checking the the RAIM availability along the selected flight plan with respect to the
expected RNP criteria. The page displays the following parameters:

This document and any data included are the property of Thales Avionics. They cannot be reproduced, disclosed or utilized without the company’s prior written approval.

T/O TIME L: This field displayed the scheduled take-off time that can be overwriten.

On ground, the T/O TIME L field is displayed with the local time in small cyan font.

Note:

c) T/O TIME retrieves local time when local time becomes equal to T/O time or after a long power
interruption.

d) It is not allowed to insert a T/O TIME value while a predictive RAIM along flight plan
computation is running.

e) T/O TIME L is not displayed in flight.

 > FPLN ACT/SEC: This prompt allows selecting the flight plan to compute.
− ACT in large green font / SEC in small cyan font if the active flight plan is selected.
− ACT in small cyan font / SEC in large green font if the secondary flight plan is selected.
 The user can select the RNAV/RNP prediction criterion by circular permutation among:
− RNAV 10 OCEANIC
− RNAV 5-2-1
− RNP 4 OCEANIC
− RNP 1
Note: After a long power interruption, the default selection is active flight plan (ACT) and RNAV 10
OCEANIC.

 The user can deselect a GPS satellite by entering a satellite number then pressing the Lsk beside
the brackets [ ].

 The user can access to the PRAIM 1/2 page by pressing the PREV or NEXT key.

 THALES AVIONICS 2012

J61334BB - 00
 T FMS220 - USER'S MANUAL
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Page 153

3.3.3.8 RESULT page

The user accesses to the RESULT page by pressing the RESULT Lsk from PRAIM 2/2 page.

Note: This page is only available when the prediction result is “FAIL”.

The results displayed in the RESULT page depend on the selected RNAV/RNP prediction:

RNAV 10 oceanic selection

This document and any data included are the property of Thales Avionics. They cannot be reproduced, disclosed or utilized without the company’s prior written approval.

This page shows the points where FDE is considered unavailable (i.e. FDE is not available at one of
the ETA ± 15 minutes)

ETA value is displayed for each point with FDE indication.

RNAV 5-2-1 selection

This page shows the points where RAIM is considered unavailable (i.e. HIL value is invalid at one of
the ETA ± 15 minutes)

ETA value is displayed for each point with RAIM indication.

RNP 4 oceanic selection

 THALES AVIONICS 2012

J61334BB - 00
Page 154
FMS220 - USER'S MANUAL
TABLE OF CONTENTS
T

This page shows the points where FDE is considered unavailable (i.e. FDE is not available at one of
the ETA ± 15 minutes) and/or the RAIM criterion is considered failed (i.e. HIL value is more than 8NM
at one of the ETA ± 15 minutes)

ETA value is displayed for each point with FDE indication and/or RAIM indication with the maximum
HIL value.

RNP 1 selection

This document and any data included are the property of Thales Avionics. They cannot be reproduced, disclosed or utilized without the company’s prior written approval.
This page shows the points where RAIM criterion is considered failed (i.e. HIL value is more than 2NM
at one of the ETA ± 15 minutes)

ETA value is displayed for each point with RAIM indication and the maximum HIL value.

Note: Each RESULT page can display a maximum of 9 points. If more than 9 points have to be
displayed, only the first 8 points are displayed and the ninth line displays 3 green dots.

 THALES AVIONICS 2012

J61334BB - 00
 T FMS220 - USER'S MANUAL
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Page 155

3.3.3.9 VNAV page 1/2

The user accesses to the VNAV page 1/2 by pressing the VNAV key.

This page displays the vertical navigation information and contains:

↓AAAAA or ↑AAAAA) with its

If an active level interception point exists↑, the altitude interception (↓
ETA.

If a step exists, the step waypoint ident with its ETA, and the level interception corresponding to
↓AAAAA or ↑AAAAA) with its ETA.
the step altitude (↓

If a second step exists, the step waypoint ident with its ETA, and the level interception
↓AAAAA or ↑AAAAA) with its ETA.
corresponding to the step altitude (↓

TOD: Estimated Time of Arrival at top of descent.

DEST: Estimated Time of Arrival at destination.

ALT SEL: Selected altitude.

This document and any data included are the property of Thales Avionics. They cannot be reproduced, disclosed or utilized without the company’s prior written approval.

TGT IAS: Target airspeed.

TGT VS: Target vertical speed.

VDEV: Vertical deviation.

− Positive when A/C altitude is above the computed target altitude
− Negative when A/C altitude is below the computed target altitude
Note: For TGT IAS, TGT VS and VDEV parameters detailed description, refer to "OPERATIONAL
PRINCIPLES / Flight guidance principles / Vertical navigation / Vertical navigation parameters".

 CRZ ALT: This field displays the cruise altitude that can be overwriten within certain conditions.

When cruise altitude has been entered, it is displayed in large cyan font with a prompt.

Note: CRZ ALT may not be insertable (refer to "OPERATIONAL PRINCIPLES / Flight guidance
principles / Vertical navigation / Altitude"). In such case, it is displayed in large green font.

 THALES AVIONICS 2012

J61334BB - 00
Page 156
FMS220 - USER'S MANUAL
TABLE OF CONTENTS
T

3.3.3.10 VNAV page 2/2

The user accesses to the VNAV page 2/2 by pressing PREV/NEXT key or VNAV key from the VNAV
1/2 page.

This page displays the temperature compensation function information and allows entering the
following parameters at destination airport

This document and any data included are the property of Thales Avionics. They cannot be reproduced, disclosed or utilized without the company’s prior written approval.
 SAT: Destination airport ground static air temperature. By default SAT is amber boxed.

Note: SAT is used to compute the cold temperature compensation of altitudes. So SAT entering is
necessary only if there are very low temperature conditions at destination.

 QNH: Destination baro-setting. By default, QNH is amber boxed.

Note: QNH may not be insertable (Refer to "FLIGHT PHASE RELATED PROCEDURES / Cruise /
Entering the approach data" for conditions). In such case, QNH is displayed in large green font.

 TRANS ALT: Transition altitude at destination airport

Note: If the transition altitude at the destination airport is valid, the TRANS ALT is displayed in small
font. To enter a value or to overwrite it, enter a new transition altitude. A CLEAR action enables to
return to the default value. When the TRANS ALT has been inserted, it is displayed in large font.

This page allows performing the following actions :

 > TEMP COMP: This prompt allows enabling or disabling the cold temperature compensation.

 THALES AVIONICS 2012

J61334BB - 00
 T FMS220 - USER'S MANUAL
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Page 157

3.3.4 DIRECT TO

3.3.4.1 DIRECT TO page (LIST)

The user accesses to the DIRECT TO page (LIST) by pressing the DTO key from the MCDU.

The DIRECT TO page contains the next points of the flight plan with their direct distances and
bearings from the aircraft position. This flight plan fix list includes standard, pilot and temporary
waypoints of the flight plan.
This document and any data included are the property of Thales Avionics. They cannot be reproduced, disclosed or utilized without the company’s prior written approval.

 The NEXT / PREV key allows scrolling up/down the list.

 ABEAM >: This prompt allows accessing to the DTO ABEAM page to perfom a direct to abeam.

 AIRPORTS >: This prompt allows displaying the list of the 20 nearest airports belonging to
standard or pilot database in increasing distance order.

On each line, the airport identifier, its bearing and distance from the FMS position, its maximum
runway length are displayed.

 THALES AVIONICS 2012

J61334BB - 00
Page 158
FMS220 - USER'S MANUAL
TABLE OF CONTENTS
T

 FPLN WPTS >: This prompt allows displaying the list of the next waypoints of the flight plan with
their direct distances and bearings from the aircraft position belonging to standard or pilot
database in increasing distance order.

Note: Missed approch waypoints (ex: MA1) are displayed in cyan, as in the FPLN page.

This document and any data included are the property of Thales Avionics. They cannot be reproduced, disclosed or utilized without the company’s prior written approval.
 Selecting the "TO" waypoint by pressing the Lsk beside the desired fix identifier, then the DIRECT
TO page is displayed, with the IDENT field filled.

 THALES AVIONICS 2012

J61334BB - 00
 T FMS220 - USER'S MANUAL
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Page 159

3.3.4.2 DIRECT TO page

The user accesses to the DIRECT TO page by selecting or identifying a "TO" waypoint from the
DIRECT TO (LIST) page.

This page displays the characteristics of the "TO" waypoint:

IDENT: Identifier of the "TO" waypoint. This field allows entering it or accessing to the DATA LIST
page with filter “ALL” to select a fix by pressing the Lsk with an empty scratchpad.

BRG / DIST: Bearing and distance from the current position to the "TO" waypoint.

LAT / LONG: Latitude and longitude of the "TO" waypoint.

 INBND CRS: This field allows entering an inbound course for interception (if required).

 INTCP DIST: This field alllows entering a distance of interception (if required). A value can be
inserted only if an inbound course exists.

 ALT CNSTR: This field allows entering an altitude constraint (if required).
This document and any data included are the property of Thales Avionics. They cannot be reproduced, disclosed or utilized without the company’s prior written approval.

Note:
a) If the selected fix is a pilot runway, the corresponding pilot airport is considered as the new
destination. It becomes the TO waypoint and the last point of the flight plan. The runway axis is
used as inbound course.

b) If the entered waypoint is identical to a waypoint in the flight plan, all legs and discontinuities
prior to the first occurrence of the waypoint are deleted.

c) If the altitude constraint is corrected with the temperature compensation (refer to "PROGRESS
/ VNAV page 2/2"), the char "c" is added before the first character of the ALT CNSTR
displayed.

 THALES AVIONICS 2012

J61334BB - 00
Page 160
FMS220 - USER'S MANUAL
TABLE OF CONTENTS
T

3.3.4.3 DTO ABEAM page

The user accesses to the DTO ABEAM page by pressing the DTO key twice on MCDU or by pressing
the ABEAM Lsk from the DIRECT TO page.

The DIRECT TO page contains the next points of the flight plan with their direct distances and
bearings from the aircraft position. This list of fixes includes standard, pilot and temporary waypoints of
the flight plan.

Note: Missed approach waypoints (ex: MA1) are displayed in cyan, as in the FPLN page.

This document and any data included are the property of Thales Avionics. They cannot be reproduced, disclosed or utilized without the company’s prior written approval.
 The NEXT / PREV key allows scrolling up/down the list.

 The user selects the “TO” waypoint by pressing the Lsk corresponding to the desired waypoint
identifier. The TMPY page is then displayed with the computed abeam points (ABxxxxx).

 The user activates the temporary flight plan by pressing the EXEC key.

 THALES AVIONICS 2012

J61334BB - 00
 T FMS220 - USER'S MANUAL
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Page 161

RESTRICTIONS

When performing a DIRECT TO ABEAM on a waypoint, the following actions are not allowed in the
TMPY page on all computed abeam points (including Direct To waypoint):
− Lateral and vertical revision
− Insertion and deletion of a waypoint
− 'Direct to' or 'Direct to abeam' operations
No abeam points are computed for the following elements:
− Existing abeam points
− Along Track Offset points (refer to "MULTI PHASE RELATED PROCEDURES / Lateral
functions / Flight plan revision / Inserting a waypoint / Along track offset")
− Lat/Lon crossing points (refer to "MULTI PHASE RELATED PROCEDURES / Lateral
functions / Flight plan revision / Inserting a waypoint / LAT/LON crossing")
− Moving waypoints
− Non-fix terminations (CA, CD, CI, FA, FD, FM, HA, VA, VD, VI, VM, VR) plus Procedure
Turn (PI) and holding pattern (HM and HF).
No abeam points are inserted in the flight plan in the following cases:
−
This document and any data included are the property of Thales Avionics. They cannot be reproduced, disclosed or utilized without the company’s prior written approval.

The abeam point is located at less than 2 NM from the previous abeam point.
− The abeam point is upstream a previously created abeam point.
− The abeam point is located in the curve transition or less than 0.5 NM from the end of the
curve transition.

ABW1 ABW3 W6
ABW2 ABW4 ABW5

0.5NM 2NM
W1

W4 W5

W2

W3

Example of abeam points not created

Note: When a DTO is performed on an off flight plan fix, no abeam points are computed and a
normal DIRECT TO (without abeam points) is performed.

 THALES AVIONICS 2012

J61334BB - 00
Page 162
FMS220 - USER'S MANUAL
TABLE OF CONTENTS
T

3.3.4.4 DIRECT TO page (moving WPT)

This page displays the characteristics of the "TO" moving waypoint:

IDENT: Identifier of the "TO" moving waypoint

BRG / DIST: Bearing and distance from the current position to the "TO" moving waypoint

This document and any data included are the property of Thales Avionics. They cannot be reproduced, disclosed or utilized without the company’s prior written approval.

LAT / LONG: Latitude and longitude of the "TO" moving waypoint

SPD VECTOR: Track and speed of the moving waypoint.

Note:
a) Only one moving waypoint per flight plan is allowed.

b) No revision (lateral and vertical) is allowed on interception waypoint.

3.3.5 PERFORMANCES

3.3.5.1 PERF INIT page

The user accesses to the PERF INIT page by pressing the PERF INIT Lsk from the INIT page or from
each PERF page.

 THALES AVIONICS 2012

J61334BB - 00
 T FMS220 - USER'S MANUAL
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Page 163

This page allows entering, selecting or checking the following values:

CRZ ALT: Cruise Altitude.

DFLT FPA: Default Flight Path Angle used for the descent profile computation and descent
predictions (refer to "OPERATIONAL PRINCIPLES / Flight Guidance principles / Vertical
Navigation").

Note: At power up, after a long power interruption, or after each flight end of cycle, DFLT FPA is
filled in small font with 3°.

ALTN/CRZ ALT: Alternate destination airport identification and Cruise Altitude for the alternate
destination. The alternate can be selected among airports of the standard or pilot databases.

When ALTN/CRZ ALT Lsk is pressed with empty scratchpad, the DATA LIST page is displayed
with standard and pilot airports filter.

CAUTION: If the inserted CRZ ALT is higher than the ceiling (computed using Zero Fuel
Weight), FMC cannot compute predictions and predicted data (ETA, EFOB and ETE) are
This document and any data included are the property of Thales Avionics. They cannot be reproduced, disclosed or utilized without the company’s prior written approval.

dashed on MCDU.

Note: The alternate airport is by default the departure airport when defined. The alternate cruize
altitude is by default set to FL100.

On GROUND, the cruise altitude is equal to the value entered by the crew or is equal to the selected
altitude if greater than the inserted value (else current A/C altitude will be used by FMC as cruise
altitude value).

Note: On GROUND, CRZ ALT is always insertable (displayed in cyan) within the following range:
[Selected altitude ; Computed ceiling of the A/C majored by 5000] FT

 THALES AVIONICS 2012

J61334BB - 00
Page 164
FMS220 - USER'S MANUAL
TABLE OF CONTENTS
T

FF FACTOR: Fuel Flow Factor used only for predictions (no impact on the current Fuel On Board
but only on the Estimated Fuel On Board along the flight plan).

COCKPIT: FF FACTOR is provided to be displayed on the

cockpit displays.

CRZ MODE <: This prompt allows selecting the cruise mode by alternation between LONG
RANGE and MAX CRUISE or entering directly the desired IAS value in that field (constant CAS
cruise mode).

This document and any data included are the property of Thales Avionics. They cannot be reproduced, disclosed or utilized without the company’s prior written approval.
Note:
a) At power up, after a long power interruption, or after each flight end of cycle, CRZ MODE is
reset to LONG RANGE cruise mode and FF FACTOR is reset to 0%.

b) The CRZ MODE is applied when the aircraft is at the CRZ ALT.

c) When a step is acknowledged, the CRZ MODE field receives the STEP MODE value defined
when configuring the step (refer to "FLIGHT PHASE RELATED PROCEDURES / Cruise /
Entering a step climb or a step descent") and will apply once the aircraft reaches the CRZ
ALT.

 THALES AVIONICS 2012

J61334BB - 00
 T FMS220 - USER'S MANUAL
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Page 165

3.3.5.2 WEIGHT page

The user accesses to the WEIGHT page by pressing the WEIGHT Lsk from the INIT page.

This page allows entering the following parameters:

ZFW: Zero Fuel Weight which includes the weight of the empty aircraft, equipments, cargo and the
This document and any data included are the property of Thales Avionics. They cannot be reproduced, disclosed or utilized without the company’s prior written approval.

crew/passengers.

FOB: Weight of fuel on board.

GW: Gross weight is equal to ZFW + FOB. The user can also directly insert the GW then ZFW is
recomputed as GW - FOB.

RESERVE: Weight of fuel reserve which can be overwriten.

T/O CG: Take-off center of gravity used to compute the take-off pitch trim objective, T/O TRIM, for
display purposes.

CAUTION: The data entered by the crew must be carefully checked, because weights are
used for the performances computations.

For these parameters, the allowed ranges are given in the following table:

Field Range ATR42 Range ATR72

ZFW [10000 - 18000] kg [12000 - 21000] kg
[22047 - 39683] lb [26456 - 46297] lb
GW [10000 - 20000] kg [12000 - 25000] kg
[22047 - 44092] lb [26456 - 55115] lb
FOB [0 - 4600] kg [0 - 5100] kg
[0 - 10141] lb [0 - 11243] lb
T/O CG [15 - 34] % [14 - 37] %

 THALES AVIONICS 2012

J61334BB - 00
Page 166
FMS220 - USER'S MANUAL
TABLE OF CONTENTS
T

Note:
a) The default value of the RESERVE is the value memorized at the power off.

b) When a weight parameter is inserted, FMC re-computes the parameters according to

GW=ZFW+FOB. If a parameter becomes outside its range, the insertion is rejected.

c) ZFW, FOB and T/O CG are invalidated after each flight end of cycle (transition from flight to
ground, engine off, door open).

d) When T/O CG is inserted or invalidated, it invalidates the take-off speeds and take-off trim
objective for cockpit displays.

This document and any data included are the property of Thales Avionics. They cannot be reproduced, disclosed or utilized without the company’s prior written approval.

 THALES AVIONICS 2012

J61334BB - 00
 T FMS220 - USER'S MANUAL
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Page 167

3.3.5.3 TAKE OFF page

The user accesses to the TAKE OFF page by pressing the PERF key, and if necessary PREV or
NEXT key.

The page displays the following departure data:

This document and any data included are the property of Thales Avionics. They cannot be reproduced, disclosed or utilized without the company’s prior written approval.

DEPT RWY: Departure airport with the departure runway ident.

RWY LNG / AXIS: Departure runway length and its axis, provided by the navigation database or
entered.

Note:
a) When the magnetic north reference is selected (refer to "PROGRESS / VNAV page 2/2"), the
runway axis is converted using the magnetic variation associated to the departure airport.

b) Entered values are invalidated after a power interruption or whenever the departure runway is
modified.

TRANS ALT: Transition altitude of the departure airport provided by the navigation database or
entered.

Note: If the transition altitude at the departure airport is valid, the TRANS ALT is displayed in small
font. To enter a value or to overwrite it, enter a new transition altitude. A CLEAR action enables to
return to the database value. When the TRANS ALT has been inserted, it is displayed in large font.

The page also displays the following take-off speeds, computed by FMC or can be entered:
− V1: Take-off decision speed.
− VR: Take-off rotation speed.
− V2: Take-off safety speed.
Note: Entered take-off speeds are invalidated after a power interruption, or after each flight end of
cycle, or upon insertion of any parameter affecting the gross weight, or in flight upon transition of
power management selector (cockpit level) from "TO" (take-off) to any other state.

For these parameters, the allowed ranges are given into the following table:

Field Range ATR42 Range ATR72

RWY LNG [1000 - 15000] ft

 THALES AVIONICS 2012

J61334BB - 00
Page 168
FMS220 - USER'S MANUAL
TABLE OF CONTENTS
T

Field Range ATR42 Range ATR72

[80 - 160] kt [70 - 160] kt

V1
with V1 ≤ VR & V1< V2

[80 - 160] kt [70 - 160] kt

VR
with V1 ≤ VR < V2

[80 - 160] kt [70 - 160] kt

V2
with V1 < V2 & VR < V2

The take-off speeds computation mode is displayed above the speed values. It is determined by the
FMS and can take the following values:

ICING (amber font) when icing conditions have been received by the FMC (FMC data input).

This document and any data included are the property of Thales Avionics. They cannot be reproduced, disclosed or utilized without the company’s prior written approval.

MANUAL (white font) when at least one of the take-off speeds has been inserted:

NORMAL (green font) otherwise.

ICING conditions Manual speeds

Note: In that mode, a CLEAR action is only possible for manually entered speeds and cancels the
entered values. When no more inserted value exists, computation mode switches to ICING or
NORMAL mode according to take-off icing conditions set by the crew.

 THALES AVIONICS 2012

J61334BB - 00
 T FMS220 - USER'S MANUAL
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Page 169

3.3.5.4 CRUISE page

The user accesses to the CRUISE page by pressing the PERF key, and if necessary PREV or NEXT
key.

This function provides predictions of ETA, GWT, EFOB at the active destination and at an alternate
destination.
This document and any data included are the property of Thales Avionics. They cannot be reproduced, disclosed or utilized without the company’s prior written approval.

The following parameters are displayed in this page:

DEST: Destination airport

If a flight plan is active, the last waypoint of the flight plan is displayed as the destination in DEST
field.

ALTN: Alternate destination

The alternate airport is by default the departure airport when defined.

Alternate airport can be overwriten by entering the identifier of an airport of the standard or pilot
database in the scratchpad then pressing the Lsk. When ALTN Lsk is pressed with an empty
scratchpad, the DATA LIST page is displayed with standard and pilot airports filter.

The following parameters are computed and displayed for the selected alternate and destination
airports:
− ETA: Estimated Time of Arrival.
− GWT: Gross weight.
− EFOB: Estimated Fuel On Board.

 THALES AVIONICS 2012

J61334BB - 00
Page 170
FMS220 - USER'S MANUAL
TABLE OF CONTENTS
T

CRZ ALT: Cruise altitude

1EO CEIL: One-engine out ceiling (normal conditions) / one-engine out ceiling (icing conditions),
in flight level format.

If the Engine Boost is installed and set to ON, 1EO CEIL displayed is replaced by:

1EO CEIL BST: One-engine out ceiling boost (normal conditions) / one-engine out ceiling
boost (icing conditions), in flight level format.

DEST MEANWIND: Average wind (origin and speed) between Departure and Destination Airport
at selected cruise altitude. Default value is the current wind speed provided by the localization
function. The user can overwrite it by entering a new value then pressing the Lsk. A CLEAR action
enables to return to the default value.

DEST MEANWIND is dedicated to the simplified wind model only, not used otherwise. Refer to
"OPERATIONAL PRINCIPLES / Flight Management principles / Predictions" for more details
about wind management.

ALTN MEANWIND: Average wind (origin and speed) between Departure and Alternate Airport at

This document and any data included are the property of Thales Avionics. They cannot be reproduced, disclosed or utilized without the company’s prior written approval.
selected cruise altitude. Default value is 360°/0kt . The user can overwrite it by entering a new
value then pressing the Lsk.

CRZ MODE: Current cruise mode. Refer to "FLIGHT PHASE RELATED PROCEDURES /
Preflight / Performances Initialization" for more details about the CRZ MODE management and
description.

Note: The prediction computations for the alternate destination uses LONG RANGE mode.

CAUTION: If the EFOB at the destination or at the rerouting point is lower than the fuel
reserve then the EFOB is displayed in amber and the FAL alert is triggered.

 THALES AVIONICS 2012

J61334BB - 00
 T FMS220 - USER'S MANUAL
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Page 171

3.3.5.5 APPROACH page

The user accesses to the APPROACH page by pressing the PERF key, and if necessary PREV or
NEXT key.

The page displays the following destination data:

This document and any data included are the property of Thales Avionics. They cannot be reproduced, disclosed or utilized without the company’s prior written approval.

DEST RWY: Destination airport with the runway ident of the selected approach.

TRANS ALT: Transition altitude of the destination airport, provided by the navigation database or
entered.

Note: If the transition altitude at the destination airport is valid, the TRANS ALT is displayed in small
font. To enter a value or to overwrite it, enter a new transition altitude. A CLEAR action enables to
return to the database value. When the TRANS ALT has been inserted, it is displayed in large font.

QNH: Destination baro-setting,

CAUTION: QNH is necessary to compute destination transition levels for baro-setting

alarm management.

Note:
a) If it is required, the QNH is displayed in amber boxes and shall be inserted for transition levels
computation.

b) When aircraft is below the transistion level in DESCENT section, QNH can not be entered
anymore and is displayed in large green font with current baro setting.

GND WIND / GUST: Origin and speed of mean ground wind, and gust ground wind

Note: GND WIND/GUST is used for the VAPP computation and for the predictions using the
simplified wind model. The gust wind can never be lower than the mean wind, it is rejected or
invalidated in such a case.

The page also displays the following approach data:

VMHB: The computed minimum speed high bank.

VAPP: The computed approach speed.

 THALES AVIONICS 2012

J61334BB - 00
Page 172
FMS220 - USER'S MANUAL
TABLE OF CONTENTS
T

FLAPS LDG: The flaps lever position.

 > APP SPD ACT: Deselecting the approach speed by pressing the >DESELECT Lsk.

3.3.5.6 SEC PERF page

This document and any data included are the property of Thales Avionics. They cannot be reproduced, disclosed or utilized without the company’s prior written approval.
The user accesses to the SEC PERF page by pressing the SEC PERF Lsk from the SEC INIT page.

This page displays the secondary flight plan performances parameters. Some specific parameters are
attached to the performances of the secondary flight plan whereas some parameters are common to
the active flight plan and to the secondary flight plan.

The “TAKE OFF” parameters are displayed only if the secondary flight plan has not been initialized as
a copy of the active flight plan.

Secondary flight plan not initialized from the active Secondary flight plan initialized from the active flight
flight plan plan

The meanings of the parameters are the same as the equivalent parameters used for the active Flight
Plan (refer to the other PERFORMANCES pages).

CAUTION: The default values of the secondary performance parameters are the current
values except FOB which is equal to the EFOB at the active destination if the active
destination airport (or last fix of the active FPLN) is the same as the secondary departure
airport (or first fix of the secondary FPLN).

 THALES AVIONICS 2012

J61334BB - 00
 T FMS220 - USER'S MANUAL
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Page 173

3.3.6 RADIO NAVIGATION

3.3.6.1 NAV FRQ page

The user accesses to the NAV FRQ page by pressing DATA key then NAV FREQ Lsk.

This page displays the following fields:

This document and any data included are the property of Thales Avionics. They cannot be reproduced, disclosed or utilized without the company’s prior written approval.

NAV1: The identification, frequency, tuning mode and bearing/distance raw data of
the navaid tuned by the VOR/ILS 1 receiver and the DME channel 1.

CH3: The identification, frequency and distance raw data of the navaid tuned by the
DME channel 3.

NAV2: The identification, frequency, tuning mode and bearing/distance raw data of
the navaid tuned by the VOR/ILS 2 receiver and the DME channel 2.

Note: The DME channel 3 is always tuned automatically by the FMS so the CH3 identifier is
displayed in green font. The other navaids can be tuned manually so their identifiers are displayed in
cyan font.

Note: When the DME channel is held on an other frequency that the one used by the associated
VOR/ILS receiver, a "H" indication is displayed beside NAV1/NAV2 field.

The identification of the NAV1 (resp. NAV2) tuned navaid corresponds to:
− VOR identifier if the VOR tuned frequency is valid and matches one of the nearest
navaids.
− DME identifier if no VOR identified and the DME tuned frequency matches a navaid
among the nearest list.
Note: Identifier is dashed if no tuned frequency is valid and matches one of the nearest navaids

The frequency of the NAV1 (resp. NAV2) tuned navaid corresponds to one frequency for both
VOR/ILS1 (resp. VOR/ILS2) and DME channel 1 (resp. DME channel 2). This frequency is selected
among valid tuned frequencies according to the following rule:
− Frequency of the navaid if identified,
− Frequency tuned by VOR or DME (if VOR frequency not valid) otherwise.
Note: Frequency is dashed if no valid tuned frequency has been received.

 THALES AVIONICS 2012

J61334BB - 00
Page 174
FMS220 - USER'S MANUAL
TABLE OF CONTENTS
T

CAUTION: NAV1 (resp. NAV2) frequency is displayed in amber when NAV1 (resp. NAV2)
tuning mode is AUTO and if the VOR/ILS1 (resp. VOR/ILS2) frequency is different from the
DME channel 1 (resp. channel 2) frequency or not valid.

 AUTO/MAN <: This prompt allows selecting the tuning mode between:
− AUTO: Frequency is tuned automatically by the FMS. Default mode at power on.

CAUTION: The autotuning is managed only by the FMC coupled with the autopilot.
Therefore, if the autotuning failed, the message is raised only on the coupled side FMC.

− MAN: Frequency must be manually inserted through RMS or selected among the nearest
navaids by pressing NAV1, NAV2 Lsk (refer to "MULTI PHASE RELATED PROCEDURES
/ Other functions / Radio Navigation / Navaid manual tuning").

CAUTION: After a change of active FMS (refer to "STATUS / FMS BITE page") during
autotuning, the crew must verify that the autotuning stays activated.

This document and any data included are the property of Thales Avionics. They cannot be reproduced, disclosed or utilized without the company’s prior written approval.
Note:
a) If a frequency is manually tuned (RMS or VCP) or a navaid manually selected (FMS), the FMS
automatically selects the MAN mode.

b) When the tuning mode is changed on RMS (AUTO or MAN), the FMS automatically switches
to the new tuning mode.

c) If a radio is selected as a nav source at cockpit level, the FMS selects automatically the MAN
mode and the AUTO mode is forbidden. An attempt to select AUTO displays the following
message in the scratchpad line:
NOT ALLOWED

d) When NAV1 or NAV2 are in the AUTO mode, if corresponding DME tuned frequency is
inconsistent with FMS command (invalid or other value), the FMS selects automatically the
MAN mode.

e) When NAV1 or NAV2 are in the AUTO mode, priority is given to the navaid recommended by
the current procedure, or defined in the active leg (if applicable).

 THALES AVIONICS 2012

J61334BB - 00
 T FMS220 - USER'S MANUAL
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Page 175

3.3.6.2 NEAREST page

The user accesses to the NEAREST (VHF NAVAIDS) page by pressing the NEAREST Lsk from the
NAV FRQ page. The user can also call up this page by pressing the VHF NAV Lsk from the
NEAREST (NDB NAVAIDS) page.

This page displays the list of the 20 nearest VHF navaids belonging to the standard and pilot data,
sorted out by growing distance order. Each line displays the navaid identifier, its type, its frequency
and the bearing/distance from the FMS position.

Nearest VHF NAVAIDS are displayed, using the following abbreviations:

− V: VOR
− VD: VOR/DME
− VT: VOR TACAN
− D: DME
− T: TACAN
− LD: LOC/DME
− ID: ILS/DME
− IT: ILS/TACAN
This document and any data included are the property of Thales Avionics. They cannot be reproduced, disclosed or utilized without the company’s prior written approval.

The user accesses to the NEAREST (NDB NAVAIDS) page by pressing the NDB NAV Lsk from the
NEAREST (VHF NAVAIDS) page.

This page displays the list of the 20 nearest NDB navaids belonging to the standard data, sorted out
by growing distance order. Each line displays the navaid identifier, its frequency and the
bearing/distance from the FMS position.

 The user can access to the other elements of the list by pressing NEXT / PREV key to scroll
up/down the list.

The NEAREST (VHF NAVAIDS) page is also called up when user performs navaid manual tuning
(refer to "MULTI PHASE RELATED PROCEDURES / Other functions / Radio Navigation / Navaid
Manual Tuning"). In that case, all field are displayed in cyan font and page title is NAV1 TUNE or
NAV2 TUNE according to selected equipment.

 THALES AVIONICS 2012

J61334BB - 00
Page 176
FMS220 - USER'S MANUAL
TABLE OF CONTENTS
T

3.3.6.3 DESELECTED NAVAIDS page

The user accesses to the DESELECTED NAVAIDS page by pressing the DESELECT Lsk from the
NAV FRQ page.

This document and any data included are the property of Thales Avionics. They cannot be reproduced, disclosed or utilized without the company’s prior written approval.
 The user can deselect a navaid by entering the corresponding identifier then pressing the [ ]
Lsk.

If the identifier corresponds to several navaids, the DUPLICATE page is then dis-played to choose
the desired navaid. If [ ] Lsk is pressed with empty scratchpad, the DATA LIST page is
displayed with standard and pilot VHF navaids filter.

CAUTION: The deselected navaids are not removed from the nearest list so a deselected
navaid can still be manually selected and tuned but will be not used for radio navigation
based localisation and its identifier will be dashed on the NAV FREQ page.

Note:
a) The user can deselect up to 10 navaids.

b) Navaids are deselected from the BCP position computation and from the autotuning.

c) The deselected navaids list is deleted after a power on, on ground.

d) The deselected navaids list is cleared when a swap of standard database is performed.

e) It is not possible to deselect a NDB navaid.

 THALES AVIONICS 2012

J61334BB - 00
 T FMS220 - USER'S MANUAL
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Page 177

3.3.7 MESSAGE

3.3.7.1 MESSAGE page

The user accesses to the MESSAGE page by pressing the MSG key

When there is at least one message alert, the MCDU annunciator MSG is illuminated, and the code of
This document and any data included are the property of Thales Avionics. They cannot be reproduced, disclosed or utilized without the company’s prior written approval.

the highest priority message is displayed in reverse video in the title line.

On the MESSAGE page, the messages are sorted out in the list, by priority order.

 The NEXT / PREV key allows accessing to the following / previous pages.

 > CLEAR: This prompt allows masking or clearing the corresponding alert.

Note: There is no harmonization between the 2 FMC for alert clearing. Thus, the alert is only
masked or cleared on the side where the CLEAR action has been performed and remains displayed
on the other MCDU (in case of a common alert).

 MSG RECALL <: This prompt allows unmasking the alerts previously masked by a clear action.

Note: The message code in the title line is always refreshed, but the list of messages is not
refreshed as long as the MESSAGE page is displayed.

This page allows performing also the following actions specific to each message and described into
"ABNORMAL PROCEDURES / Failures" :

 CHECK >: Accessing to another MCDU page to check some data

 INSERT >: Accessing to another MCDU page to insert missing data

 UPDATE >: Accessing to another MCDU page to update some data

 SAVE >: Accessing to DATA MENU page to save the user data

 CTK >: Accessing to the BITE page to initiate cross talk

 CHANGE >: Accessing to another MCDU page to change some data

 THALES AVIONICS 2012

J61334BB - 00
Page 178
FMS220 - USER'S MANUAL
TABLE OF CONTENTS
T

3.3.8 MARK

3.3.8.1 MARK page

The user accesses to the MARK page by pressing the MRK key on the MCDU. The page allows
marking the present position by creating a new pilot waypoint. The position and time (L for local, Z for
UTC), at the moment when the user pressed the MRK key, are displayed in this page. The new
waypoint ident is the first available begining by "MK": MK001, MK002,… If the memory is full, the
following message is displayed in the scratchpad line:
MEMORY FULL

Note: The user shall initiate a DATA SAVE to transfer the new waypoint data in compact flash (refer
to "MULTI PHASE RELATED PROCEDURES / Other functions / Database operation / Saving data")
in order to recover these data after power cycle.

This document and any data included are the property of Thales Avionics. They cannot be reproduced, disclosed or utilized without the company’s prior written approval.

 THALES AVIONICS 2012

J61334BB - 00
 T FMS220 - USER'S MANUAL
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Page 179

This page also allows the user to perform the following actions:

 UPD AT /BRG / DIST LAT/LONG: Updating the position by entering the new position defined by:
− Entering the identifier of the database then pressing the UPD AT Lsk.
− Entering the position latitude / longitude then pressing the LAT/LON Lsk
− Entering the position relative to a database fix by entering the identifier point, bearing, and
distance from this fix then pressing the UPD AT / BRG / DIST Lsk.
When UPD AT Lsk is pressed with empty scratchpad, the DATA LIST page is displayed with filter
“ALL”.

Note: If the distance between the update and frozen position exceeds 100 NM, the update command
is rejected.

After update, the position of updating point (LAT/LON) and the discrepancy (∆POS) from this point to
the frozen position are displayed.

CAUTION: It is recommended to check carefully the discrepancy between the frozen and
update position, because the update is irreversible.
This document and any data included are the property of Thales Avionics. They cannot be reproduced, disclosed or utilized without the company’s prior written approval.

 The user shall press the exec key to confirm the update.

The update concerns all navigation sources whatever the selected navigation mode.

NAVIGATION SOURCE GPS BCP

ACTION AT UPDATE Position initialization command Position reinitialization
sent to GPS

 THALES AVIONICS 2012

J61334BB - 00
Page 180
FMS220 - USER'S MANUAL
TABLE OF CONTENTS
T

3.3.9 DATA

3.3.9.1 DATA MENU page

The user accesses to the DATA MENU page by pressing the DATA key on MCDU. This page allows
accessing to the different DATA pages or saving the user data and the secondary flight plan.

This document and any data included are the property of Thales Avionics. They cannot be reproduced, disclosed or utilized without the company’s prior written approval.
 < INIT: This prompt allows accessing to the INIT page.

 SAVE <: This prompt allows saving the user data (pilot and company databases) and the
secondary flight plan in compact flash memory on both FMC in order to recover them after a power
off.

During saving, the following message is displayed in reverse video in the scratchpad line:
XFER DATA IN PROGRESS

Note: If for any reason the data save fails (missing or damaged compact flash...), the following
message is displayed in the scratchpad line:

XFER FAIL

 THALES AVIONICS 2012

J61334BB - 00
 T FMS220 - USER'S MANUAL
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Page 181

3.3.9.2 NAV DATA page

The user accesses to the NAV DATA page by pressing the DATA key then the NAV DATA Lsk.

The page displays the name of the standard database with its expiration date, the name of the
additional standard database with its expiration date, the company database last date of modification
and the pilot database last date of mod-ification.
This document and any data included are the property of Thales Avionics. They cannot be reproduced, disclosed or utilized without the company’s prior written approval.

The company database name displayed is "CORTEBID00" and the pilot database name displayed is
"PLTDTBID00".

Note:
a) A star character “ * ” is displayed beside the used standard database.

b) When there is no additional standard database loaded in the FMC, the corresponding line is
blank.

c) When the used standard database is expired, its expiration date field is displayed in amber.

d) When the additional standard database is expired, its expiration date field is displayed in
amber.

e) When a data is not available, "(NO DATA)" is displayed in the name field and the
corresponding date field is dashed.

f) After a long power cut in flight, FMC uploads the last used standard database.

 THALES AVIONICS 2012

J61334BB - 00
Page 182
FMS220 - USER'S MANUAL
TABLE OF CONTENTS
T

3.3.9.3 DATABASE page

The user accesses to the DATABASE page by pressing the DATA key, then the DATABASE Lsk.

This page allows performing the following actions :

 STANDARD AIRPORT: Accessing to the STD APT page.

This document and any data included are the property of Thales Avionics. They cannot be reproduced, disclosed or utilized without the company’s prior written approval.
 STANDARD NAVAID: Accessing to the STD NAVAID page.

 STANDARD WAYPOINT: Accessing to the STD WPT page.

 STANDARD NDB: Accessing to the STD NDB page.

 STANDARD CO-ROUTE: Accessing to the STD DATA page (CO-ROUTE).

 PILOT AIRPORT: Accessing to the PILOT DATA page (AIRPORTS).

 PILOT NAVAID: Accessing to the PILOT DATA page (NAVAIDS).

 PILOT WAYPOINT: Accessing to the PILOT DATA page (WAYPOINTS)

 PILOT ROUTE: Accessing to the PILOT DATA page (ROUTE).

 THALES AVIONICS 2012

J61334BB - 00
 T FMS220 - USER'S MANUAL
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Page 183

3.3.9.4 STD APT page

The user accesses to the STD APT page by pressing <AIRPORT Lsk from the DATABASE page.

After selecting or inserting an IDENT, the features of the airport are displayed :

IDENT: Standard airport identification and country code.

This document and any data included are the property of Thales Avionics. They cannot be reproduced, disclosed or utilized without the company’s prior written approval.

LAT/LONG: Standard airport latitude and longitude

ELEVATION: Standard airport elevation.

MAG VAR: Standard airport magnetic variation.

MAX RWY: Standard airport maximum runway length.

NAME: Standard airport name (limited to 15 characters).

When IDENT Lsk is pressed with empty scratchpad, the DATA LIST page is displayed with standard
airports filter.

 THALES AVIONICS 2012

J61334BB - 00
Page 184
FMS220 - USER'S MANUAL
TABLE OF CONTENTS
T

3.3.9.5 STD NAVAID page

The user accesses to the STD NAVAID page by pressing <NAVAID Lsk from the DATABASE page.

After selecting or inserting an IDENT, the features of the navaid are displayed :

IDENT: Standard navaid identification and country code.

This document and any data included are the property of Thales Avionics. They cannot be reproduced, disclosed or utilized without the company’s prior written approval.

CHL/FREQ: Standard navaid channel and frequency.

TYPE: Standard navaid type : VOR, VORDME, VORTAC, DME, ILS, ILSDME, ILSTAC, LOC,
LOCDME, TACAN.

Note: ILS type contains ILS Localizer only (No glideslope) and ILS Localizer/MLS/GLS (category I, II
and III) but also contains localizer installation such as IGS facility, LDA facility (with or without
glideslope) and SDF facility (with or without glideslope).

FOM: Standard navaid figure of merit: TERM (Terminal), LOW (Low Altitude), HIGH (High
Altitude), EXT (Extended range).

ELEVATION: Standard navaid elevation.

LAT/LONG: Standard navaid latitude and longitude.

DECLN: Standard navaid station declinaison (antenna update).

NAME: Standard navaid name (limited to 15 characters).

 THALES AVIONICS 2012

J61334BB - 00
 T FMS220 - USER'S MANUAL
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Page 185

Note:
a) For ILS or LOC navaids, CHL, FOM, DECLN are not displayed and NAME is replaced by the
airport RUNWAY associated to this navaid.

b) For VORDME or VORTAC not collocated, LAT/LONG is filled with the VOR latitude and
longitude and an indication "(VOR)" is displayed next to LAT/LONG ident, and ELEVATION is
filled with the DME or TACAN elevation and an indication "(DME)" or "(TAC)" is displayed next
to ELEVATION ident.

c) For ILSDME, ILSTAC and LOCDME, only the DME or TACAN features are displayed.

When IDENT Lsk is pressed with empty scratchpad, the DATA LIST page is displayed with standard
navaids filter.

3.3.9.6 STD WPT page

The user accesses to the STD WPT page by pressing <WAYPOINT Lsk from the DATABASE page.
This document and any data included are the property of Thales Avionics. They cannot be reproduced, disclosed or utilized without the company’s prior written approval.

After selecting or inserting an IDENT, the features of the waypoint are displayed :

IDENT: Standard waypoint identification and country code.

TYPE: Standard waypoint type :

− WPT: Enroute waypoint.
− TWPT: Terminal waypoint.

APT: Associated airport for terminal waypoint

LAT/LONG: Standard waypoint latitude and longitude

When IDENT Lsk is pressed with empty scratchpad, the DATA LIST page is displayed with standard
waypoints filter.

 THALES AVIONICS 2012

J61334BB - 00
Page 186
FMS220 - USER'S MANUAL
TABLE OF CONTENTS
T

3.3.9.7 STD NDB page

The user accesses to the STD NDB page by pressing <NDB Lsk from the DATABASE page.

After selecting or inserting an IDENT, the features of the NDB are displayed :

IDENT: Standard NDB navaid identification and country code.

This document and any data included are the property of Thales Avionics. They cannot be reproduced, disclosed or utilized without the company’s prior written approval.

FREQ: Standard NDB navaid frequency

TYPE: Standard NDB navaid type :

NDB: Enroute NDB.

TNDB: Terminal NDB.

APT: Associated airport for terminal NDB navaid.

LAT/LONG: Standard NDB navaid latitude and longitude.

When IDENT Lsk is pressed with empty scratchpad, the DATA LIST page is displayed with standard
NDB filter.

 THALES AVIONICS 2012

J61334BB - 00
 T FMS220 - USER'S MANUAL
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Page 187

3.3.9.8 STD DATA page (CO-ROUTE)

The user accesses to the STD DATA page (CO-ROUTE) by pressing <CO-ROUTE Lsk from the
DATABASE page.

The STD DATA page (CO-ROUTE) displays the list of the company route identifiers and their optional
departure and arrival airports. The displayed list is limited to the the company routes which identifiers
begin with the characters entered in the scratchpad. The whole list is displayed when the scratchpad
is empty.

Note: If a route contains fixes, airways or procedures that are no more in the Standard Database,
the route identifier is displayed in amber.
This document and any data included are the property of Thales Avionics. They cannot be reproduced, disclosed or utilized without the company’s prior written approval.

 The PREV / NEXT key allows accessing to the previous/next routes identifiers, by circular
permutation.

 CODE - - - - <: This prompt allows entering the code allowing editing, creating or deleting the
company routes.

 The authorized user only can delete a route by pressing the CLR key, then pressing the Lsk
beside the identifier of the route to delete, then pressing EXEC key to confirm the deletion.

 The authorized user only can rename a route by pressing the Lsk beside the desired route
identifier to display the CO-ROUTE page then entering the new name preceded by "-" in the
IDENT field.

 < PLT ROUTE: This prompt allows accessing to the PILOT DATA page (ROUTE).

Note: After renaming or erasing a company route, the DTA alert is triggered to perform a save of
data.

 THALES AVIONICS 2012

J61334BB - 00
Page 188
FMS220 - USER'S MANUAL
TABLE OF CONTENTS
T

3.3.9.9 PILOT DATA page (AIRPORTS)

The user accesses to the PILOT DATA page (AIRPORTS) by pressing AIRPORT> Lsk from the
DATABASE page.

The PILOT DATA page (AIRPORTS) displays the list of the pilot airports identifiers and the number of
remaining slots. The displayed list is limited to the airports which identifiers begin with the characters
entered in the scratchpad. The whole list is displayed when the scratchpad is empty.

This document and any data included are the property of Thales Avionics. They cannot be reproduced, disclosed or utilized without the company’s prior written approval.
 The user can select a data to consult, modify or rename by pressing the Lsk near the desired
identifier. The corresponding PLT APT page is displayed, and its content can be modified.

Note: If the data is used in the active, temporary or secondary flight plan or in a route, modification
or deletion is impossible. The symbol used appears in reverse video in the PLT APT page.

 NEW >: This prompt allows to access to the PLT APT page with empty parameters (amber
boxes), in order to create a new pilot airport.

Note:
a) This prompt is displayed only if at least one slot is free (number of free slots is displayed on
the bottom right of the page).

b) It is forbidden to create two data with the same type and the same identifier. In this case, the
following message is displayed in the scratchpad line:
IDENT ALREADY USED

 The user can delete a data by performing a CLEAR action on the identifier of the data to delete,
then pressing EXEC to confirm the deletion.

Note: After modifying or clearing a pilot airport, the DTA alert is triggered to perform a save of data.

 THALES AVIONICS 2012

J61334BB - 00
 T FMS220 - USER'S MANUAL
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Page 189

3.3.9.10 PLT APT page

The user accesses to the PLT APT page by selecting a pilot airport among the displayed list from the
PILOT DATA page (AIRPORTS) or from the DATA LIST page.

The user can call up this page with empty parameters by pressing NEW Lsk from PILOT DATA page
(AIRPORTS) to create a new pilot airport.

The user can also access to this page from several other pages by following a specific sequence
described on the description of the concerned pages.
This document and any data included are the property of Thales Avionics. They cannot be reproduced, disclosed or utilized without the company’s prior written approval.

This page contains the following parameters:

IDENT: Pilot airport identifier.

USED: In reverse video if the airport is used in the active, temporary or secondary flight plan, in
normal video if used in a pilot route, not displayed otherwise.

LAT/LONG: Pilot airport latitude and longitude.

ELEVATION: Pilot airport elevation.

MAG VAR: Pilot airport magnetic variation.

RWY LNG: Pilot airport runway length.

NAME: Pilot airport name (limited to 15 characters).

RWY AXIS: Pilot airport runway axis.

FPA: Pilot airport recommanded flight path angle.

If MAG VAR is filled, the runway axis (RWY AXIS) is magnetic referenced (°M is displayed after the
axis value); Otherwise the runway axis is true referenced (°T is displayed after the axis value).

 THALES AVIONICS 2012

J61334BB - 00
Page 190
FMS220 - USER'S MANUAL
TABLE OF CONTENTS
T

3.3.9.11 PILOT DATA page (NAVAIDS)

The user accesses to the PILOT DATA page (NAVAIDS) by pressing NAVAID> Lsk from the
DATABASE page.

The PILOT DATA page (NAVAIDS) displays the list of the navaids identifiers. The displayed list is
limited to the the navaids which identifiers begin with the characters entered in the scratchpad. The
whole list is displayed when the scratchpad is empty.

This document and any data included are the property of Thales Avionics. They cannot be reproduced, disclosed or utilized without the company’s prior written approval.
 The user can select a data to consult, modify or rename by pressing the Lsk near the desired
identifier. The corresponding PLT NAVAID page is displayed, and its content can be modified.

Note: If the data is used in the active, temporary or secondary flight plan or in a route, modification
or deletion is impossible. The symbol used appears in reverse video in the PLT NAVAID page.

 NEW >: This prompt allows to access to the PLT NAVAID page with empty parameters (amber
boxes), in order to create a new pilot navaid.

Note:
a) This prompt is displayed only if at least one slot is free (number of free slots is displayed on
the bottom right of the page).

b) It is forbidden to create two data with the same type and the same identifier. In this case, the
following message is displayed in the scratchpad line:
IDENT ALREADY USED

 The user can delete a data by performing a CLEAR action on the identifier of the data to delete,
then pressing EXEC to confirm the deletion.

Note: After modifying or clearing a pilot navaid, the DTA alert is triggered to perform a save of data.

 THALES AVIONICS 2012

J61334BB - 00
 T FMS220 - USER'S MANUAL
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Page 191

3.3.9.12 PLT NAVAID page

The user accesses to the PLT NAVAID page by selecting a pilot navaid among the displayed list from
the PILOT DATA page (NAVAIDS) or from the DATA LIST page.

The user can call up this page with empty parameters by pressing NEW Lsk from PILOT DATA page
(NAVAIDS) to create a new pilot navaid.

The user can also access to this page from several other pages by following a specific sequence
described on the description of the concerned pages.
This document and any data included are the property of Thales Avionics. They cannot be reproduced, disclosed or utilized without the company’s prior written approval.

This page contains the following parameters :

IDENT: Pilot navaid identification.

USED: In reverse video if the navaid is used in the active, temporary or secondary flight plan, in
normal video if used in a pilot route, not displayed otherwise.

CHL/FREQ: Pilot navaid channel and frequency.

TYPE: Pilot navaid type : VOR, TAC, DME, VORTAC, VORDME.

FOM: Pilot navaid figure of merit : TERM (Terminal), LOW (Low Altitude), HIGH (High Altitude),
EXT (Extended range).

LAT/LONG: Pilot navaid latitude and longitude.

ELEVATION: Pilot navaid elevation.

DECLN: Pilot navaid station declination (antenna update).

NAME: Pilot navaid name (limited to 15 characters).

When creating or modifying a pilot navaid, the content of TYPE and FOM can be changed by pressing
successively on Lsk near their field, until to obtain the desired parameter.

Note: Either the channel or the frequency has to be entered. The channel insertion is a three digits
followed by X or Y (e.g. 074Y).

 THALES AVIONICS 2012

J61334BB - 00
Page 192
FMS220 - USER'S MANUAL
TABLE OF CONTENTS
T

3.3.9.13 PILOT DATA page (WAYPOINTS)

The user accesses to the PILOT DATA page (WAYPOINTS) by pressing the WAYPOINT> Lsk from
the DATABASE page.

The PILOT DATA page (WAYPOINTS) displays the list of the navaids identifiers. The displayed list is
limited to the the waypoints which identifiers begin with the characters entered in the scratchpad. The
whole list is displayed when the scratchpad is empty.

This document and any data included are the property of Thales Avionics. They cannot be reproduced, disclosed or utilized without the company’s prior written approval.
 The user can select a data to consult, modify or rename by pressing the Lsk near the desired
identifier. The corresponding PLT WPT page is displayed, and its content can be modified.

Note: If the data is used in the active, temporary or secondary flight plan or in a route, modification
or deletion is impossible. The symbol used appears in reverse video in the PLT WPT page.

 NEW >: This prompt allows to access to the PLT WPT page with empty parameters (amber
boxes), in order to create a new pilot waypoint.

Note:
a) This prompt is displayed only if at least one slot is free (number of free slots is displayed on
the bottom right of the page).

b) It is forbidden to create two data with the same type and the same identifier. In this case, the
following message is displayed in the scratchpad line:
IDENT ALREADY USED

 The user can delete a data by performing a CLEAR action on the identifier of the data to delete,
then pressing EXEC to confirm the deletion.

Note: After modifying or clearing a pilot waypoint, the DTA alert is triggered to perform a save of
data.

 THALES AVIONICS 2012

J61334BB - 00
 T FMS220 - USER'S MANUAL
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Page 193

3.3.9.14 PLT WPT page

The user accesses to the PLT WPT page by selecting a pilot waypoint among the displayed list from
the PILOT DATA page (WAYPOINTS) or from the DATA LIST page.

The user can call up this page with empty parameters by pressing NEW Lsk from PILOT DATA page
(WAYPOINTS) to create a new pilot waypoint.

The user can also access to this page from several other pages by following a specific sequence
described on the description of the concerned pages.
This document and any data included are the property of Thales Avionics. They cannot be reproduced, disclosed or utilized without the company’s prior written approval.

This page contains the following parameters :

IDENT: Pilot waypoint identification.

USED: In reverse video if the waypoint is used in the active, temporary or secondary flight plan, in
normal video if used in a pilot route, not displayed otherwise.

SPD VECTOR: Track and speed of the waypoint. If non null values are inserted, the waypoint
becomes a moving waypoint.

LAT/LONG: Pilot waypoint latitude and longitude.

NAME: Pilot waypoint name (limited to 15 characters).

When creating or modifying a pilot waypoint, its coordinates can be entered by :

 LAT/LONG: This field allows entering the latitude and longitude values.

 PLACE / BRG / DIST: This field allows entering a position relative to a database fix by entering fix
identifier, bearing and distance from the reference fix.

 PLACE / BRG1 / PLACE / BRG2: This field allows entering a position relative to 2 database fixes
by entering first fix identifier, bearing from the first fix, second fix identifier, bearing from the second
fix.

 SPD VECTOR: This field allows entering or modifying a speed vector (track angle/speed) for a
moving waypoint.

 The user can clear the speed by performing a CLEAR action on the SPD VECTOR. If the speed
vector is cleared, the moving waypoint becomes a fix waypoint.

 THALES AVIONICS 2012

J61334BB - 00
Page 194
FMS220 - USER'S MANUAL
TABLE OF CONTENTS
T

Note:
a) Fixes used to build the pilot waypoint are Standard or Pilot data.

b) When position is computed, the PLACE/BRG/DIST or the PLACE/ BRG1/PLACE/BRG2 is

not memorized.

c) Bearing inputs must be performed in TRUE reference (T display).

d) A moving waypoint can only be created by : DATABASE/PILOT WPT or DIRECT TO/NEW

DATA/PILOT WPT. Otherwise, the following message is displayed in the scratchpad line while
creating the moving waypoint:
NOT ALLOWED

This document and any data included are the property of Thales Avionics. They cannot be reproduced, disclosed or utilized without the company’s prior written approval.

 THALES AVIONICS 2012

J61334BB - 00
 T FMS220 - USER'S MANUAL
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Page 195

3.3.9.15 PILOT DATA page (ROUTE)

The user accesses to the PILOT DATA page (ROUTE) by pressing the ROUTE> Lsk from the
DATABASE page.

The PILOT DATA page (ROUTE) displays the list of the pilot routes identifiers and their optional
departure and arrival airports. The displayed list is limited to the routes which identifiers begin with the
characters entered in the scratchpad. The whole list is displayed when the scratchpad is empty.

Note: If a route contains fixes, airways or procedures that are no more in the Standard Database,
the route identifier is displayed in amber.
This document and any data included are the property of Thales Avionics. They cannot be reproduced, disclosed or utilized without the company’s prior written approval.

 The PREV / NEXT key allows accessing to the previous/next routes identifiers, by circular
permutation.

 The user can delete a route by pressing the CLR key, then pressing the Lsk beside the identifier
of the route to delete, then PRESS EXEC key to confirm the deletion.

 The user can rename a route by pressing the Lsk beside the desired route identifier to display the
PLT ROUTE page then entering the new name preceded by "-" in the IDENT field.

Note: After renaming or erasing a pilot route, the DTA alert is triggered to perform a save of data.

 < CO-ROUTE: This prompt allows accessing to the STD DATA page (CO-ROUTE).

 NEW >: This prompt allows to access to an empty PLT ROUTE page in order to create a new
route.

Note: This prompt is displayed only if at least one slot is free. The number of free slots is displayed
on the bottom right of the page.

 THALES AVIONICS 2012

J61334BB - 00
Page 196
FMS220 - USER'S MANUAL
TABLE OF CONTENTS
T

3.3.9.16 PLT ROUTE page

The user accesses to the PLT ROUTE page by pressing Lsk beside the desired route identifier from
the PILOT DATA page (ROUTE).

The user can call up this page with empty parameters by pressing NEW Lsk from PILOT DATA page
(ROUTE) to create a new pilot route.

The PLT ROUTE page contains the following fields:

IDENT: Pilot route identifier.

FROM/TO: Departure and arrival airports (optional).

List of elements of the route (with FROM and TO airports) and the path between elements (*).

(*) between two waypoints, the path displayed is "bearing/distance".

Note: Bearings are displayed in true reference. A “T” is displayed.

This document and any data included are the property of Thales Avionics. They cannot be reproduced, disclosed or utilized without the company’s prior written approval.
(*) If the route contains a departure procedure with SID (resp. SID and TRANS), a field with the
SID identifier (resp. "SID / TRANS" identifiers) is displayed in reverse video between the departure
runway and the last fix of the departure procedure. The departure airport identifier is followed by
the three last characters of the runway identification.

(*) If the route contains airway segments, a VIA field followed by the airway identifier in reverse
video is displayed between the FROM and TO fix identification.

(*) If the route contains an arrival procedure with STAR (resp. TRANS and STAR), a field with the
STAR identifier (resp. "TRANS / STAR" identifiers) is displayed in reverse video after the first fix of
the arrival procedure.

(*) If the route contains an approach procedure with APP (resp. VIA and APP), a field with the APP
identifier (resp. "VIA / APP" identifiers) is displayed in reverse video after the first fix of the arrival
procedure or following the TRANS/STAR identifier if defined.

Note: When the arrival procedure contains "VIA / APP" and "TRANS / STAR", a blank line separates
the identifiers (see second page example herebelow)

Pilot route from LFBO to LFLL with airway segments Pilot route from LFBT to LFBO with departure procedure
UN260 & Z1. (SID AUCH1N and TRANS AGN) and arrival procedure
(STAR AFRI2L, VIA ADIMA and APP ILS15L).

 THALES AVIONICS 2012

J61334BB - 00
 T FMS220 - USER'S MANUAL
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Page 197

 The user can display the characteristics of an element of the route by pressing the Lsk beside it
(Standard Airport/Navaid/Waypoint/NDB page) or accessing to the procedure page.

Note:
a) Each route contains up to 50 elements.

b) There is no discontinuity in a route.

c) If a route contains inconsistent data (fixes, airways or procedures that do not exist in the
database), the route identifier and the concerned inconsistent data are displayed in amber.

CAUTION: If a route contains airway and/or procedure portions, the crew must check that
it is compliant with flight plan capacity (100 legs).

 The user can scroll left or right within the list of elements of the route by pressing the “< - - - -” or
“- - - - >” Lsk.
This document and any data included are the property of Thales Avionics. They cannot be reproduced, disclosed or utilized without the company’s prior written approval.

Note: "< - - - -" or "- - - - >" is displayed only if the route contains more than 6 elements.

 The user can delete a fix of the route by performing a CLEAR action on the desired fix, except
departure or arrival airport displayed in route list.

After the deletion of a fix, the following fixes go back up and:

− If the fix is the FROM fix or the TO fix of an airway segment, the associated airway is also
removed.
− If the fix is the last fix of a departure procedure, the associated procedure is also removed.
− If the fix is the first fix of an arrival procedure, the associated procedure is also removed.
Note: When inserting a fix, if several data with the same identifier are found, the DUPLICATE page
is displayed to choose the desired data, if the fix is not in the standard or the pilot database the NEW
DATA page is displayed.

 The user can add a known airway segment by entering its identifier then ‘/’ then the TO fix
identifier on the Lsk following the FROM fix Lsk.

The TO fix is then inserted under the FROM fix, the following fixes are shifted down to the list and
the airway ident is displayed between the FROM fix and TO fix (see screenshot)

 THALES AVIONICS 2012

J61334BB - 00
Page 198
FMS220 - USER'S MANUAL
TABLE OF CONTENTS
T

 The user can also select a airway among the list of the airways known in the standard database
by pressing the Lsk with “/” scratchpad to display the AIRWAY LIST page.

Note:
a) If the entered airway does not exist in standard database or if the airway exists but does not
contains the FROM fix, the following message is displayed in the scratchpad line:
NOT IN DATABASE

b) If the entered TO fix is invalid (i.e. does not exist in standard database, or does not belong to
the airway, or is identical to the FROM fix), the following message is displayed in the
scratchpad line:
NOT IN DATABASE

c) If “/” is entered but the FROM fix does not belong to any airway, the following message is
displayed in the scratchpad line:
NOT ALLOWED

 The user can add a departure procedure by pressing the Lsk beside the departure airport ident.

This document and any data included are the property of Thales Avionics. They cannot be reproduced, disclosed or utilized without the company’s prior written approval.
 The user can modify a departure procedure by pressing the Lsk beside the departure airport ident
or beside the last fix of the departure procedure.

 The user can add an arrival procedure by pressing the Lsk beside the arrival airport ident.

 The user can modify an arrival procedure by pressing the Lsk beside the arrival airport ident or
beside the first fix of the arrival procedure or beside the Lsk between TRANS/STAR ident and
VIA/APP ident.

Note:
a) Departure (resp. arrival) procedure insertion is only possible when departure (resp. arrival)
airport is a standard database airport.

b) Moving waypoint can not be inserted in a route.

c) After modifications, in order to recover the same pilot route after a power off, the DTA alert is
triggered to perform a save of data.

d) When the maximum route capacity is reached, the following message is displayed in the
scratchpad line:
MEMORY FULL

 ROUTE SELECT >: This prompt allows selecting the current route.

 THALES AVIONICS 2012

J61334BB - 00
 T FMS220 - USER'S MANUAL
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Page 199

3.3.9.17 DATA LIST page

The user accesses to the DATA LIST page by pressing twice the DATA key from the MCDU.

The user can also access to this page from several other pages by following a specific sequence
described on the description of the concerned pages.
This document and any data included are the property of Thales Avionics. They cannot be reproduced, disclosed or utilized without the company’s prior written approval.

Data are displayed in alphanumerical order according to scratchpad entry.

Several filters are available:

− ALL for all the data of the standard and pilot databases,
− APT for all the airports of the standard and pilot databases,
− VHF NAV for all the VHF navaids of the standard and pilot databases,
− WPT for all the waypoints of the standard and pilot databases,
− NDB NAV for all the standard NDB navaids.

Note:
a) Filter field may not be available depending on DATA LIST page access.

b) Filters apply on standard database items only when DATA LIST page is accessed from
COMPANY ROUTE page.

 THALES AVIONICS 2012

J61334BB - 00
Page 200
FMS220 - USER'S MANUAL
TABLE OF CONTENTS
T

The features displayed are:

− Name associated to fix (if existing).
− Identifier of the fix
− LAT/LON abbreviation.
− Country code
− TYPE of fix:
♦ WPT: Enroute waypoint
♦ TWPT: Terminal waypoint
♦ APT: Airport
♦ NDB: Enroute NDB
♦ TNDB: Terminal NDB
♦ VOR, VORDME, VORTAC, ILS, ILSDME, ILSTAC, LOC, LOCDME, DME, TACAN:
VHF navaid
 The user can display the standard or pilot database page corresponding to the selected item by
pressing the right Lsk next to the desired item.

Note: ILS type contains ILS Localizer only (No glideslope) and ILS Localizer/MLS/GLS (category I, II
and III) but also contains localizer installation such as IGS facility, LDA facility (with or without
glideslope) and SDF facility (with or without glideslope).

This document and any data included are the property of Thales Avionics. They cannot be reproduced, disclosed or utilized without the company’s prior written approval.
3.3.9.18 NEW DATA page

When inserting in a flight plan a fix identifier which does not belong to the standard or pilot database,
the NEW DATA page is displayed, with the type of pilot data and the number of remaining slots.

This page allows creating a new pilot data (waypoint, airport or navaid) by pressing the Lsk beside the
desired type of data to create.

Note: This page is displayed only if the inserted identifier is compliant with several fix types. The
FMS assumes that a waypoint identifier is maximum 5 characters long, a navaid or an airport is
maximum 4 characters long. Therefore, if a five characters ident is entered and if this point does not
correspond to any data in the databases, the FMS automatically access to the PLT WPT page in order
to allow the crew to create this point. The first character of the waypoint identifier cannot be "-". The
char "-" is used to modify the identifier of an existing data.

 THALES AVIONICS 2012

J61334BB - 00
 T FMS220 - USER'S MANUAL
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Page 201

3.3.9.19 DUPLICATE page

This page is displayed when several data with the same identifier are found.

This page contains up to 20 fixes sorted out by growing distance with the following information :

Abbreviation of their horizontal position, the first three characters of the latitude and the first four
This document and any data included are the property of Thales Avionics. They cannot be reproduced, disclosed or utilized without the company’s prior written approval.

characters of the longitude.

Country code.

Fix type:
− WPT: Waypoint.
− TWPT: Terminal waypoint.
− APT: Airport.
− NAV: VHF Navaid.
− NDB: Enroute NDB Navaid.
− TNDB: Terminal NDB Navaid.
− ILS: Localizer and Glide.

The frequency of VHF navaids and ILS.

 The NEXT / PREV key allows displaying the next/previous fix.

 The user can select a data by pressing the Lsk next to the desired data identifier.

 THALES AVIONICS 2012

J61334BB - 00
Page 202
FMS220 - USER'S MANUAL
TABLE OF CONTENTS
T

3.3.10 STATUS

3.3.10.1 FUEL FLOW page

The user accesses to the FUEL FLOW page by pressing the data key, then STATUS Lsk, then FUEL
FLOW Lsk. The user can also call up this page by pressing the DATA key, then INIT Lsk, then
WEIGHT Lsk, then FUEL FLOW Lsk.

The following parameters are displayed:

ENG1 and ENG2: Fuel flow provided by the flow meter of each engine. If a fuel flow is null or
unknown, the corresponding field is dashed.

TOTAL CONSUMPTION: Global consumption computed per hour and per nautic mile. if one of
the fuel flow is unknown (dashed) the total consumption is also dashed.

 If missing (or if required), the crew can override the fuel flow value(s).

Entered values are displayed in large font whereas values from the fuel flow meters are displayed

This document and any data included are the property of Thales Avionics. They cannot be reproduced, disclosed or utilized without the company’s prior written approval.
in small font.

CAUTION: The entered fuel flows are used for predictions (computation of EFOB along
the flight plan) and for updating the current FOB. If fuel flow is entered as the fuel flow meters
are not available, the entered values are still used even if the fuel flow meters become
available. The entered fuel flow is automatically canceled after each end of flight cycle.

Note: The maximum value of the fuel flow (TOTAL CONSUMPTION) that can be entered is 1300
kg/h (2866 lb/h).

 The user can cancel the entered value and restore the value provided by the fuel flow meter (small
font) by performing a CLEAR action on the corresponding field.

Fuel flows provided by the flow meters ENG1 fuel flows entered and ENG2 null or unknown

Note: Without engine fuel flow (dashed), fuel predictions (EFOB) are not available (dashed).

 THALES AVIONICS 2012

J61334BB - 00
 T FMS220 - USER'S MANUAL
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Page 203

3.3.10.2 SENSOR STS page

The user accesses to the SENSOR STS page by pressing the DATA key, then STATUS Lsk, then
SENSOR STS Lsk.

This page displays status and mode of sensors.

This document and any data included are the property of Thales Avionics. They cannot be reproduced, disclosed or utilized without the company’s prior written approval.

A star character “ * ” besides a GPS sensor indicates that this sensor is activated, monitored by the
FMS.

For all status 0 means normal, 1 means failed

GPS1 (Resp GPS2) Status

0 0 0

GPS receiver GPS Sensor

GPS Radio-Frequency

GPS MODE:
− INIT: Initialization, the GPS receiver is initializing time and position information.
− ACQ: Acquisition, the receiver is tracking satellites.
− NAV: Navigation, 3D position and time are provided.
− ALT: Altitude/Clock aiding. The GPS receiver uses FMS informations of altitude or
clock to perform a 3D localization. RAIM is not available.
− TEST: Self Test
− AIDED: The receiver uses external speed to update its position (until enough satellites
can be received).
− FAULT: GPS failure.

ACS: Autopilot Coupled Side
− 1: Autopilot is coupled with left side navigation source
− 2: Autopilot is coupled with right side navigation source

 THALES AVIONICS 2012

J61334BB - 00
Page 204
FMS220 - USER'S MANUAL
TABLE OF CONTENTS
T

3.3.10.3 FMS BITE page

The user accesses to the FMS BITE page by pressing the DATA key, then STATUS Lsk, then FMS
BITE Lsk

This page displays the following data :

This document and any data included are the property of Thales Avionics. They cannot be reproduced, disclosed or utilized without the company’s prior written approval.

FMM1 / FMM2: FMC identification according to the side: FMM1 (left side) / FMM2 (right side).

The cross talk status is displayed with the following values:

− DUAL if the cross talk status is dual
− IND if the cross talk status is single

The active FMC status is displayed with the following values:
− ACT if the FMC is the active FMC (side coupled with autopilot)
− Blank otherwise.

FMC status: Results of the FMC CBIT (Continuous Built In Test). For all status: 0 means normal, 1
means failed.

000000000000
bit 1 bit 12

Bit number Function

1 Pilot database integrity test
2 Used standard database integrity test
3 Bit for provision always set to 0
4 Pilot data consistency with used standard database
test
5 System configuration table integrity test
6 Performance data integrity test
7 Magnetic variation data integrity test
8 Bit for provision always set to 0
9 Bit for provision always set to 0
10 Company route data integrity test
11 Company route data consistency test

 THALES AVIONICS 2012

J61334BB - 00
 T FMS220 - USER'S MANUAL
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Page 205

Bit number Function

12 Additional standard database integrity test

 > CTK INIT: This prompt is displayed if the FMC is the inactive FMC (side not selected as FM
navigation source).

If the prompt is present, the user can manually initiate the cross talk intialization. The message
PRESS EXEC TO CONFIRM is displayed in the scratchpad and the EXEC annunciator is
illuminated. The CTK INIT prompt is then displayed in reverse video. The user confirms by
pressing the EXEC key to start the cross talk initialization.

A long power interruption of the slave FMC is commanded. After this power interruption, the user has
to select the FMC on the MCDU.

Note: This command is different from the command CTK INIT (Lsk Ri) that may be possible on
active FMC (refer to "ABNORMAL PROCEDURES / Failures / Meaning of alert messages / CTK"): In
this case, the CTK is initialized on the active FMC and doesn’t power off any FMC.
This document and any data included are the property of Thales Avionics. They cannot be reproduced, disclosed or utilized without the company’s prior written approval.

MCDU: MCDU status

000000000000000000
bit 1 bit 17

Bit number Function

1 MCDU Status
2 Port 1 Receiver
3 Port 1 Data input
4 Port 2 Receiver
5 Port 2 Data input
6 Port 3 Receiver
7 Port 3 Data input
8 Port 4 Receiver
9 Port 4 Data input
10 Port 5 Receiver
11 Port 5 Data input
12 Port 6 Receiver
13 Port 6 Data input
14 Port 7 Receiver
15 Port 7 Data input
16 Port 8 Receiver
17 Port 8 Data input

 THALES AVIONICS 2012

J61334BB - 00
Page 206
FMS220 - USER'S MANUAL
TABLE OF CONTENTS
T

Note: Data inputs for ports 3 to 8 are provisions and always set to 0.

SW: Software part number

3.3.10.4 DISCRETES page

The user accesses to the DISCRETES page by pressing the DATA key, then STATUS Lsk, then
DISCRETES Lsk.

This document and any data included are the property of Thales Avionics. They cannot be reproduced, disclosed or utilized without the company’s prior written approval.
0000000000000000000
bit 1 bit 16

Bit number Definition Status

1 Bit for provision 0
2 Bit for provision 0
3 Bit for provision 0
4 IAD side 0: Side 1 / 1: Side 2
5 Bit for provision 0
6 Bit for provision 0
7 Bit for provision 0
8 Bit for provision 0
9 Bit for provision 0
10 Bit for provision 0
11 Bit for provision 0
12 Bit for provision 0
13 Bit for provision 0
14 Bit for provision 0
15 Bit for provision 0
16 Weight On Wheel 0: in flight / 1: on ground

 THALES AVIONICS 2012

J61334BB - 00
 T FMS220 - USER'S MANUAL
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Page 207

3.3.10.5 AIR / RA page

The user accesses to the AIR/RA page by pressing the DATA key then STATUS Lsk then AIR/RA
Lsk.

This page displays the following data from the ADU1 (or ADU2) and Radio Altimeter 1 (or Radio
Altimeter 2):
− IAS: Indicated Air Speed.
− TAS: True Air Speed.
− VZ: Barometric Vertical speed.
− ZP: Standard altitude.
− ZC: Barometric Corrected altitude.
− SAT: Static Air Temperature.
− TAT: Total Air Temperature.
− RHT: Radioaltimetric Height.
When air parameters from both ADU are invalid, speed (IAS), altitude (ZC) and temperature (TAT) are
displayed in cyan font and have to be inserted in order to keep the FMS computations of
performances, predictions and guidance:
This document and any data included are the property of Thales Avionics. They cannot be reproduced, disclosed or utilized without the company’s prior written approval.

Nominal mode Degraded mode

Note: In this degraded mode: TAS=IAS, ZP=ZC, SAT= ISA SAT.

 THALES AVIONICS 2012

J61334BB - 00
Page 208
FMS220 - USER'S MANUAL
TABLE OF CONTENTS
T

3.3.10.6 HDG / ATT page

The user accesses to the HDG/ATT page by pressing the DATA key then STATUS Lsk, then
HDG/ATT Lsk.

This page displays attitude and heading parameters of both sides:

− ROLL

This document and any data included are the property of Thales Avionics. They cannot be reproduced, disclosed or utilized without the company’s prior written approval.
− PITCH
− HDG
Following the heading parameter value, an indication displays the heading reference used :
− “T” for the true heading
− “M” for the magnetic heading

VAR: This field indicates the type of the magnetic variation (MAG VAR) used depending on the
magnetic heading source.

VAR XXXXXXXX: Magnetic variation computed with the FMS position. XXXXXXXX is the model
name.
IGRF2010 stands for the International Geomagnetic Reference Field model of Year 2010.

 THALES AVIONICS 2012

J61334BB - 00
 T FMS220 - USER'S MANUAL
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Page 209

VAR MANUAL: Magnetic variation inserted by the crew.

Note:
a) The star character “*” indicates the selected side.

b) Refer to "ABNORMAL PROCEDURES / Operational Checking" chapter for the uploading of

the earth magnetic variation model.

 VAR: This field displays the magnetic variation that can be overwriten by entering a new value (E
or W for the sign) then pressing the Lsk.

"VAR MANUAL" is then displayed.

 A CLEAR action on MANUAL Lsk restores the value provided by the magnetic model.

 HDG REF: This field allows selecting the Heading Reference.

c) By default, the heading reference is set to MAG when engaging navigation.

This document and any data included are the property of Thales Avionics. They cannot be reproduced, disclosed or utilized without the company’s prior written approval.

d) If the heading is dashed, in order to keep navigation and predictions, the user can enter the
heading of the navigation, on NAV HDG Lsk, in the reference (MAG or TRUE) of the FMS.

CAUTION: The IGRF model is usually updated every 5 years. For the update of the IGRF
model used by the FMC for magnetic variation computation, it is necessary to contact
THALES AVIONICS.

 THALES AVIONICS 2012

J61334BB - 00
Page 210
FMS220 - USER'S MANUAL
TABLE OF CONTENTS
T

4 FLIGHT PHASE RELATED PROCEDURES

4.1 PREFLIGHT

4.1.1 FMS INITIALIZATION

4.1.1.1 Power-on

INSERT a Compact Flash with the desired data in the compact Flash reader.

CAUTION: Database upload from the compact flash is done at each cold start. Thus, if
the compact flash is missing or no database is present in the compact flash when starting the
IAD, FMC will not have any database to work with.

This document and any data included are the property of Thales Avionics. They cannot be reproduced, disclosed or utilized without the company’s prior written approval.

POWER ON the IAD and the MCDU.

 If the MCDU MENU page is displayed

PRESS the Lsk beside the desired FMS name to select it.

Refer to "PILOT INTERFACE / MCDU interface / MENU page" for more details.

Note: The display of the FMS prompts on the MENU page is not immediate; it can take up to 20
seconds.

 THALES AVIONICS 2012

J61334BB - 00
 T FMS220 - USER'S MANUAL
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Page 211

CHECK the data of the selected FMS.

Refer to "PILOT INTERFACE / MCDU pages description / Power On page".

Verify carefully the A/C configuration, the ident and validity of the used Standard
Database.

Note: A/C configuration: Identification by CRC of Sys. Conf. and name of Perf. Data

 If the date of the active standard database does not match the clock date (expiration date
displayed in amber):

CHECK the period of validity in the second database and select it if

necessary.

Refer to the chapter "MULTI PHASE RELATED PROCEDURES / Other functions /

Database operation / Standard database selection" for the relevant procedure.

Verify carefully that CONF DATA and NAV DATA test status are passed.
This document and any data included are the property of Thales Avionics. They cannot be reproduced, disclosed or utilized without the company’s prior written approval.

 If at least one test status is FAIL (amber font), the prompt <FMS BITE is displayed:

PRESS the LSK next to the <FMS BITE prompt to identify the cause of
failed test.

Refer to "ABNORMAL PROCEDURES / Operational Checking" chapter for more details on

the relevant procedure.

 If both test status are OK (green font):

PRESS the LSK next to the INIT> prompt to access to the INIT page.

4.1.1.2 Date/Time Initialization

PRESS INIT Lsk from the "Power On" page or PRESS DATA key and INIT Lsk from
the DATA page.

 THALES AVIONICS 2012

J61334BB - 00
Page 212
FMS220 - USER'S MANUAL
TABLE OF CONTENTS
T

CHECK date and time

 In case date and time are displayed in cyan font (provided by the internal clock of the FMC),
those values can be adjusted if necessary:

ENTER the new values on DATE and UTC Lsk.

Refer to chapter "PILOT INTERFACE / MCDU interface / Data Entry" for details on the entry format.

CAUTION: When the database is expired (expiration date displayed in amber font), the
use of the standard database is possible but has to be avoided.

ENTER on DIFF Lsk, the time difference between local time and UTC time.

Refer to "PILOT INTERFACE / MCDU interface / Data Entry" for details on the format

Note: When the time DIFF is different from zero, all times are displayed on MCDU and ND using the
local time (L indicator), except when explicitly indicated in Zulu time (Z indicator).

This document and any data included are the property of Thales Avionics. They cannot be reproduced, disclosed or utilized without the company’s prior written approval.

ENTER on T/O TIME Lsk, the scheduled Take-off time.

Note: T/O TIME is the starting time used for the predictions computation.

4.1.1.3 Position initialization

PRESS POS INIT Lsk to access to the POS INIT page.

 THALES AVIONICS 2012

J61334BB - 00
 T FMS220 - USER'S MANUAL
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Page 213

PRESS SENSOR STS Lsk.

CHECK on the SENSOR STS page that the GPS mode is ACQ.

PRESS RETURN Lsk to return to the POS INIT page.

SELECT the initial position among GPS position, last known position, position of a
database fix or entered position:

 GPS position:

PRESS GPS POS Lsk.

 Last position:

PRESS LAST POS Lsk.

 Position of a fix of the database:

ENTER the identifier on WPT Lsk.

This document and any data included are the property of Thales Avionics. They cannot be reproduced, disclosed or utilized without the company’s prior written approval.

PRESS WPT POS Lsk

 User defined position

ENTER the latitude, longitude on INIT POS Lsk.

Note: There is no prompt beside the Lsk if the initialization by the corresponding position is not
allowed. If the Lsk is pressed, the message NO ACTION DEFINED is displayed in the scratchpad line.

Once the initialization position is valid (INIT POS), the SENSOR INIT< prompt is displayed.

PRESS SENSOR INIT Lsk to initialize the BCP (Best Computed Position) and the
GPS sensor position.

PRESS SENSOR STS Lsk

The SENSOR STS page is displayed.

Note: A ”*” character is displayed beside the used sensor headers.

 THALES AVIONICS 2012

J61334BB - 00
Page 214
FMS220 - USER'S MANUAL
TABLE OF CONTENTS
T

4.1.1.4 Checking navigation database

PRESS DATA key.

PRESS NAV DATA Lsk.

This document and any data included are the property of Thales Avionics. They cannot be reproduced, disclosed or utilized without the company’s prior written approval.
The page displays the name of the standard database with its expiration date, the name of the
additional standard database with its expiration date, the name of the company database with its last
date of modification and the name of the pilot data with its last date of mod-ification.

Note:
a) When a standard database is expired, the expiration date field is displayed in amber.

b) A star character “ * ” is displayed beside the used standard database.

 THALES AVIONICS 2012

J61334BB - 00
 T FMS220 - USER'S MANUAL
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Page 215

4.1.1.5 Checking units

PRESS UNITS Lsk on INIT page, or PRESS DATA key then UNITS Lsk.

PRESS the Lsk beside the parameter to select the desired unit.
This document and any data included are the property of Thales Avionics. They cannot be reproduced, disclosed or utilized without the company’s prior written approval.

The selected unit is displayed in large green font. The other selectable unit(s) is(are) displayed in
small cyan font.

Note: Selectable units are HEADING, ALTITUDE, DATUM, TEMP and BARO SET. Their default
values are MAG, FT, WGS84, °C and INHG.

COCKPIT: Selected altitude unit is provided for display purpose.

For DATUM selection refer to "PILOT INTERFACE / MCDU pages description / INITIALIZATION /
DATUM page".

PRESS RETURN Lsk to return to the previous page.

4.1.1.6 Navigation mode selection

PRESS PROG key then PREV key (or PRESS PROG key 3 times)

The navigation mode that provides position, wind and ground speed can be selected by the crew.

The available navigation modes are BCP (Best Computed Position) and GPS (Global Positioning
System).

 THALES AVIONICS 2012

J61334BB - 00
Page 216
FMS220 - USER'S MANUAL
TABLE OF CONTENTS
T

The PROG 3/3 page is displayed with the following parameters:

the position (coordinates) provided by the selected navigation mode (displayed in green).

the position discrepancy between the selected mode and the other mode(s).

the 95% confidence horizontal position accuracy, EPE (Estimated Position Error ), of each
navigation mode.

the discrepancy from the FMS position to the opposite FMS position (displayed in green).

North

GPS Position

This document and any data included are the property of Thales Avionics. They cannot be reproduced, disclosed or utilized without the company’s prior written approval.
FMS2 Position
0.10 Nm
0.22Nm

FMS1 BCP
N45°12.34
E002°21.44
Discrepancy between FMS1 and
FMS2 positions (Bearing / Distrance)
Discrepancy between FMS1 and GPS
positions (Bearing / Distance)

Note: At power up the BCP is the mode selected by default.

 THALES AVIONICS 2012

J61334BB - 00
 T FMS220 - USER'S MANUAL
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Page 217

On the PROG 3/3 page, PRESS the Lsk near the desired navigation mode

Example of GPS NAV page

The parameters of this navigation mode are displayed.

Note: Refer to "PILOT INTERFACE / MCDU pages description / PROGRESS / GPS NAV page", for
description of the displayed parameters.
This document and any data included are the property of Thales Avionics. They cannot be reproduced, disclosed or utilized without the company’s prior written approval.

PRESS SELECT Lsk to select this navigation mode.

COCKPIT: The FMS navigation mode is provided to be displayed

on the Navigation Display.

 THALES AVIONICS 2012

J61334BB - 00
Page 218
FMS220 - USER'S MANUAL
TABLE OF CONTENTS
T

4.1.2 NAVIGATION INITIALIZATION

4.1.2.1 Primary flight plan setup

CAUTION: Predictions (EFOB, ETA, ETE) and vertical profile can not be computed
without inserting the weights. To insert the weights before the flight plan initialization (if
possible), refer to "Performances Intialization / Weights entering".

4.1.2.1.1 Flight plan selection

GO to the FPLN INIT page through one of the following sequences:

 From INIT page:

PRESS FPLN INIT Lsk.

This document and any data included are the property of Thales Avionics. They cannot be reproduced, disclosed or utilized without the company’s prior written approval.
 Otherwise:

PRESS FPLN key.

PRESS NEW FPLN Lsk.

 THALES AVIONICS 2012

J61334BB - 00
 T FMS220 - USER'S MANUAL
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Page 219

SELECT the flight plan to initialize among:

− Primary flight plan
− Secondary flight plan

PRESS RETURN Lsk to return to the previous page.

4.1.2.1.2 Flight plan initialization

INITIALIZE the selected flight plan from the secondary flight plan or from a route.

 From a secondary flight plan:

PRESS SEC INIT Lsk to access to the secondary flight plan initialization
page

Refer to "MULTI PHASE RELATED PROCEDURES / Lateral functions / Secondary flight plan /
Initialization".
This document and any data included are the property of Thales Avionics. They cannot be reproduced, disclosed or utilized without the company’s prior written approval.

 From a route:

PRESS ROUTE Lsk.

 THALES AVIONICS 2012

J61334BB - 00
Page 220
FMS220 - USER'S MANUAL
TABLE OF CONTENTS
T

SELECT the route by IDENT or FROM/TO selection

 IDENT

Enter, on the IDENT field, the identifier of the route stored in database.

 If the route identifier is unknown:

PRESS IDENT Lsk with empty scratchpad to access to the STD

DATA page (CO-ROUTE).

SELECT the desired route in the list.

 FROM/TO

Enter, on the FROM/TO Lsk, the departure and arrival airport ICAO
identifiers of the route.

PRESS NEXT / PREV key to consult the route list.

This document and any data included are the property of Thales Avionics. They cannot be reproduced, disclosed or utilized without the company’s prior written approval.
Note:
a) The FMC will search in pilot and company database all routes beginning with the FROM
airport and joining the TO airport and all routes with no departure or arrival procedures
beginning with the TO airport and joining the FROM airport (reversed routes).

b) The default direct route from selected departure to selected destination is added to the list of
company and pilot routes in last position. The identifier field is empty and no indication is
displayed in the bottom line.

 THALES AVIONICS 2012

J61334BB - 00
 T FMS220 - USER'S MANUAL
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Page 221

CHECK the route content

 To reverse the selected route.

PRESS REVERSE Lsk

This document and any data included are the property of Thales Avionics. They cannot be reproduced, disclosed or utilized without the company’s prior written approval.

“REVERSED” flag is then displayed in reverse video.

CAUTION: If the selected route contains a waypoint that does not belong to the selected
standard database, the reverse of the route is possible but has to be avoided. The reverse
route would be inconsistent.

Note: REVERSE< prompt is not available for routes which contain departure and/or arrival
procedure.

 THALES AVIONICS 2012

J61334BB - 00
Page 222
FMS220 - USER'S MANUAL
TABLE OF CONTENTS
T

ENTER on FLT ID Lsk, the flight number, up to 8 alphanumeric characters.

Note: The allowed characters are A-Z letters and 0-9 decimal digits.

Note: The FLT ID field is only available for active flight plan initialization (FPLN< prompt displayed in
bottom right).

This document and any data included are the property of Thales Avionics. They cannot be reproduced, disclosed or utilized without the company’s prior written approval.

SELECT the suitable flight plan (active FPLN, SEC or TMPY).

PRESS EXEC key to initialize the selected flight plan.

CAUTION: If the selected route contains parts which are not into the current Standard
Database, they are replaced in the flight plan by discontinuities.

COCKPIT: The flight number (FLT ID) is provided to be used by

Radio Management Function (RMS) for interface with the air traffic
control (ATC) and to be displayed on the cockpit displays

COCKPIT: After initialization, the flight plan is activated and

displayed on the navigation display

 THALES AVIONICS 2012

J61334BB - 00
 T FMS220 - USER'S MANUAL
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Page 223

4.1.2.1.3 Selecting a departure

Example: Departure from LFBO through runway 33L SID PUMA4B and transition WELLY

PRESS FPLN key.

PRESS the Lsk beside the departure airport.

The departure page is then displayed, with the list of runways and their lengths.
This document and any data included are the property of Thales Avionics. They cannot be reproduced, disclosed or utilized without the company’s prior written approval.

PRESS the Lsk beside the desired runway.

The RWY field is completed with the selected runway identifier and the list of SID compatible with this
runway appears.

 THALES AVIONICS 2012

J61334BB - 00
Page 224
FMS220 - USER'S MANUAL
TABLE OF CONTENTS
T

PRESS the Lsk beside the desired SID.

The SID field is completed with the selected SID identifier and the list of compatible TRANSITION
appears.

PRESS the Lsk beside the desired SID TRANSITION.

This document and any data included are the property of Thales Avionics. They cannot be reproduced, disclosed or utilized without the company’s prior written approval.
The TRANS field is then completed with the selected TRANS identifier and no more list is displayed.

Before inserting the departure procedure in the active flight plan, it is possible to check it by pressing
the Lsk beside TMPY> prompt.

PRESS EXEC key to activate the departure procedure and access to the first FPLN
page.

COCKPIT: After activation, the selected departure procedure is

inserted into the active flight plan displayed on the navigation
display

 THALES AVIONICS 2012

J61334BB - 00
 T FMS220 - USER'S MANUAL
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Page 225

4.1.2.1.4 Selecting an arrival

Example: Arrival to LFLL through runway VDM18R, STAR AMVAR1, via GOMET and transition
GAI13.

PRESS FPLN key.

PRESS the Lsk next to the arrival airport.

The arrival page is displayed, with for each approach, its identifier.
This document and any data included are the property of Thales Avionics. They cannot be reproduced, disclosed or utilized without the company’s prior written approval.

PRESS the Lsk beside the desired approach.

The APP field is completed with the selected approach identifier and the list of compatible STAR
appears.

Note: A specific field displays the recommended navaid ident and frequency for the selected
approach.

 THALES AVIONICS 2012

J61334BB - 00
Page 226
FMS220 - USER'S MANUAL
TABLE OF CONTENTS
T

PRESS the Lsk beside the desired STAR.

The STAR field is completed with the selected STAR identifier and the list of compatible VIA appears.

PRESS the Lsk beside the desired VIA.

The VIA field is completed with the selected VIA identifier and the list of compatible TRANS appears.

This document and any data included are the property of Thales Avionics. They cannot be reproduced, disclosed or utilized without the company’s prior written approval.

PRESS the Lsk beside the desired TRANS.

The TRANS field is completed with the selected TRANS identifier and no more list is displayed.

 THALES AVIONICS 2012

J61334BB - 00
 T FMS220 - USER'S MANUAL
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Page 227

PRESS EXEC key to activate the arrival procedure.

COCKPIT: After activation, the selected arrival procedure is

inserted into the active flight plan displayed on the navigation
display.

4.1.2.1.5 Inserting an airway

Example: Airway A27 from MEN to BRY then UM976 from BRY to

PRESS FPLN key.

PRESS the left Lsk next to the desired waypoint after which the airway segment
shall be inserted.

The LTRL REV page is dis-played.

This document and any data included are the property of Thales Avionics. They cannot be reproduced, disclosed or utilized without the company’s prior written approval.

 THALES AVIONICS 2012

J61334BB - 00
Page 228
FMS220 - USER'S MANUAL
TABLE OF CONTENTS
T

 If the airway identifier is known:

WRITE the AIRWAY identifier in the scratchpad (here A27).

PRESS the AIRWAY Lsk to insert it into the AIRWAY field.

Note: If the AIRWAY field with bracket is not present in the LTRL REV page, it means that the

This document and any data included are the property of Thales Avionics. They cannot be reproduced, disclosed or utilized without the company’s prior written approval.
revised waypoint does not belong to any airway in the standard database.

 Otherwise:

PRESS the AIRWAY Lsk with empty scratchpad to go to the AIRWAY LIST
page.

Refer to the next airway selection in the present procedure (1).

 If the TO fix identifier is known:

WRITE the TO fix identifier in the scratchpad (here BRY).

PRESS the TO Lsk to insert it into the TO field.

 Otherwise:

PRESS the TO Lsk with empty scratchpad to go to the TO LIST page.

Refer to the next airway segment insertion in the present procedure (2).

 THALES AVIONICS 2012

J61334BB - 00
 T FMS220 - USER'S MANUAL
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Page 229

 If the airway identifier is known:

WRITE the second AIRWAY identifier in the scratchpad.

PRESS the VIA Lsk to insert it into the VIA field.

 Otherwise:

PRESS the VIA Lsk with empty scratchpad to go to the AIRWAY LIST
page. (1)
This document and any data included are the property of Thales Avionics. They cannot be reproduced, disclosed or utilized without the company’s prior written approval.

PRESS the Lsk next to the selected airway to insert it into the VIA field
(here UM976).

Then, the FROM field of the new airway segment is filled with the TO identifier of the
previous airway segment, and the TO field of the new segment is filled with five amber
boxes.

 THALES AVIONICS 2012

J61334BB - 00
Page 230
FMS220 - USER'S MANUAL
TABLE OF CONTENTS
T

 If the second TO fix identifier is known:

WRITE the TO fix identifier in the scratchpad.

PRESS the TO Lsk to insert it into the TO field.

 Otherwise :

PRESS the TO Lsk with empty scratchpad to go to the TO LIST page. (2)

This document and any data included are the property of Thales Avionics. They cannot be reproduced, disclosed or utilized without the company’s prior written approval.

PRESS the Lsk next to the selected TO fix to insert it into the TO field
(here OKRIX).

 THALES AVIONICS 2012

J61334BB - 00
 T FMS220 - USER'S MANUAL
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Page 231

INSERT the airway segment into the previously displayed flight plan or link another
airway segments:

 Insert:

PRESS the TMPY Lsk to insert the airway segment into the temporary
flight plan.

OR

PRESS the SEC Lsk to insert the airway segment into the secondary flight
plan.

OR

PRESS the EXEC key to insert the airway segment into the active flight
plan

 Link:
This document and any data included are the property of Thales Avionics. They cannot be reproduced, disclosed or utilized without the company’s prior written approval.

Link another airway segments by repeating the present procedure.

Note: The user can insert up to 5 successive airway segments.

 THALES AVIONICS 2012

J61334BB - 00
Page 232
FMS220 - USER'S MANUAL
TABLE OF CONTENTS
T

4.1.2.2 Secondary flight plan setup

From FPLN INIT page, PRESS SEC INIT Lsk.

OR

From SEC FPLN page, PRESS NEW FPLN Lsk.

This document and any data included are the property of Thales Avionics. They cannot be reproduced, disclosed or utilized without the company’s prior written approval.
 To select a route for the secondary flight plan.

PRESS ROUTE Lsk.

Refer to "Primary flight plan setup" for the rest of the procedure.

 To copy the active flight plan into the secondary flight plan.

PRESS COPY FPLN Lsk.

A confirmation message is displayed in the scratchpad line:

PRESS EXEC key to confirm.

Note: If a temporary flight plan exists, no copy is performed and the following message is displayed
in the scratchpad line:

TMPY EXIST

 To swap the active flight plan and the secondary flight Plan.

PRESS SWAP FPLN Lsk

 THALES AVIONICS 2012

J61334BB - 00
 T FMS220 - USER'S MANUAL
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Page 233

The SEC FPLN page is then displayed with a confirmation message in the scratchpad line.

Note: If a temporary flight plan exists, no swap is performed and the following message is displayed
in the scratchpad line:

TMPY EXIST

PRESS EXEC key to confirm.

This document and any data included are the property of Thales Avionics. They cannot be reproduced, disclosed or utilized without the company’s prior written approval.

The active FPLN page is then displayed.

 THALES AVIONICS 2012

J61334BB - 00
Page 234
FMS220 - USER'S MANUAL
TABLE OF CONTENTS
T

4.1.2.3 Radio Navigation

4.1.2.3.1 NAV FRQ page

PRESS DATA key.

PRESS NAV FRQ Lsk.

This page displays for each navaid a tuned frequency and the received raw data: Distance and QDM.

This document and any data included are the property of Thales Avionics. They cannot be reproduced, disclosed or utilized without the company’s prior written approval.

PRESS AUTO/MAN Lsk beside the desired radio to change the tuning mode
between:

AUTO : means that the frequency is tuned automatically by the FMS.

MAN : means that the frequency must be manually inserted through RMS or selected among the
nearest navaids by pressing NAV1, NAV2 Lsk (refer to "MULTI PHASE RELATED PROCEDURES
/ Other functions / Radio Navigation / Navaid Manual Tuning").

 THALES AVIONICS 2012

J61334BB - 00
 T FMS220 - USER'S MANUAL
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Page 235

4.1.2.3.2 Deselecting navaids

 If the deselection of one or several navaid(s) is required:

On NAV FRQ page, PRESS DESELECT Lsk

ENTER on the Lsk near the brackets the identifier of the desired navaid.

REPEAT for all the navaids to deselect.

This document and any data included are the property of Thales Avionics. They cannot be reproduced, disclosed or utilized without the company’s prior written approval.

CAUTION: The deselected navaids are not removed from the nearest list so then a
deselected navaid can still be manually selected and tuned but it is not used for radio
navigation based localisation and its identifier is dashed on the NAV FREQ page.

Note:
a) The user can deselect up to 10 navaids.

b) Navaids are deselected from the BCP position computation and from the autotuning.

 THALES AVIONICS 2012

J61334BB - 00
Page 236
FMS220 - USER'S MANUAL
TABLE OF CONTENTS
T

4.1.2.3.3 Reselecting navaids

 If reselection of one or several navaid(s) is required:

On NAV FRQ page, PRESS DESELECT Lsk.

PRESS CLR key.

PRESS Lsk near the desired navaid.

REPEAT for all the navaids to reselect.

This document and any data included are the property of Thales Avionics. They cannot be reproduced, disclosed or utilized without the company’s prior written approval.
4.1.3 PERFORMANCES INITIALIZATION

4.1.3.1 Initialization

PRESS PERF INIT Lsk from INIT page (or from PERF pages).

 THALES AVIONICS 2012

J61334BB - 00
 T FMS220 - USER'S MANUAL
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Page 237

ENTER, SELECT or CHECK the following parameters:

CRZ ALT: Cruise Altitude.

DFLT FPA: Default Flight Path Angle used for the descent profile computation and descent
predictions (refer to "OPERATIONAL PRINCIPLES / Flight Guidance principles / Vertical
Navigation").

ALTN/CRZ ALT: Alternate destination airport identification and Cruise Altitude for the alternate
destination.

CAUTION: If the inserted CRZ ALT is higher than the ceiling (computed using zero fuel
weight), FMC cannot compute predictions and predicted data (ETA, EFOB and ETE) are
dashed on MCDU.

FF FACTOR: Fuel Flow Factor for predictions.

Note: The FF FACTOR is used only for predictions. It has no impact on the current Fuel On Board
but only on the Estimated Fuel On Board along the flight plan.
This document and any data included are the property of Thales Avionics. They cannot be reproduced, disclosed or utilized without the company’s prior written approval.

COCKPIT: FF FACTOR is provided to be displayed on the

cockpit displays.

CRZ MODE: Cruise mode followed to manage the speed in order to optimize the flight duration
(MAX CRUISE) or the range (LONG RANGE). The user can also directly enter a desired speed
(constant CAS cruise mode).

 To select another CRZ MODE or enter a desired IAS:

PRESS the CRZ MODE Lsk to select by alternation between LONG RANGE
and MAX CRUISE or enter directly the desired IAS value in that field
(constant CAS cruise mode).

 THALES AVIONICS 2012

J61334BB - 00
Page 238
FMS220 - USER'S MANUAL
TABLE OF CONTENTS
T

4.1.3.2 Weight entering

PRESS WEIGHT Lsk on INIT page

ENTER the following parameters:

This document and any data included are the property of Thales Avionics. They cannot be reproduced, disclosed or utilized without the company’s prior written approval.

ZFW: Zero Fuel Weight which includes the weight of the empty aircraft, of the equipments, of the
cargo and of the crew/passengers.

FOB: Weight of fuel on board.

RESERVE: Weight of fuel reserve.

T/O CG: Take-off center of gravity.

CAUTION: The data entered by the crew must be carefully checked, because weights are
used for the predictions and for the computation of the speed bugs.

Note: GW: Gross weight is equal to ZFW + FOB. The user can also directly insert the GW then ZFW
is recomputed as GW - FOB.

COCKPIT: The following parameters are provided to be displayed

on the cockpit displays: Zero Fuel Weight (ZFW), Fuel On Board
Weight (FOB), Gross Weight (GW), Gross Weight (GWT), Weight
of Fuel RESERVE, Take off weight centering (T/O CG) and
corresponding pitch trim objective (T/O TRIM).

COCKPIT: If the Gross weight (GW) or the Weight centering (T/O

CG) is modified, a deselection flag is raised and provided to
indicate that take off data have been modified and need to be
confirmed.

 THALES AVIONICS 2012

J61334BB - 00
 T FMS220 - USER'S MANUAL
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Page 239

4.1.3.3 Take Off performances

PRESS PERF key

CHECK the departure runway length and its axis, provided by the navigation
database.
This document and any data included are the property of Thales Avionics. They cannot be reproduced, disclosed or utilized without the company’s prior written approval.

 To modify the departure runway (if required):

WRITE in the scratchpad the length / axis of the departure airport runway.

PRESS the RWY LNG / AXIS Lsk to enter it

When the RWY LNG / AXIS have been inserted, they are displayed in large cyan font.

Note: Entered values are invalidated after a power interruption or whenever the departure runway is
modified.

CHECK the transition altitude (TRANS ALT) of the departure airport provided by
the navigation database.

If the transition altitude at the departure airport is known into the database, the TRANS ALT is
displayed in small font. If the transition altitude at the departure airport is unkown, the TRANS ALT is
displayed in amber boxes.

 To modify (if required) or to enter the transition altitude:

WRITE in the scratchpad the value of the transition altitude of the

departure airport.

PRESS the TRANS ALT Lsk to enter it.

When the TRANS ALT has been entered, it is displayed in large cyan font. CLEAR action enables
to return to the default value.

 THALES AVIONICS 2012

J61334BB - 00
Page 240
FMS220 - USER'S MANUAL
TABLE OF CONTENTS
T

CHECK the take-off speeds computed by the FMC.

− V1: Take-off decision speed.
− VR: Take-off rotation speed.
− V2: Take-off safety speed.
 To modify the take-off speeds:

WRITE the take off decision speed V1 in the scratchpad (here 106).

PRESS the V1 Lsk to enter it.

This document and any data included are the property of Thales Avionics. They cannot be reproduced, disclosed or utilized without the company’s prior written approval.

WRITE the take off rotation speed VR in the scratchpad (here 110).

PRESS the VR Lsk to enter it.

WRITE the take off safety speed V2 in the scratchpad (here 115).

PRESS the V2 Lsk to enter it.

 THALES AVIONICS 2012

J61334BB - 00
 T FMS220 - USER'S MANUAL
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Page 241

Note: Inserted take-off speeds are invalidated after a power interruption, or after each flight end of
cycle, or upon insertion of any parameter affecting the gross weight, or in flight upon transition of
power management selector (cockpit level) from "TO" (take-off) to any other state.

COCKPIT: The take-off speeds: decision speed (V1), rotation

speed (VR), and safety speed (V2) are provided to be displayed
This document and any data included are the property of Thales Avionics. They cannot be reproduced, disclosed or utilized without the company’s prior written approval.

on the cockpit displays. In case of manual insertion or modification

of at least one of the take off speeds, a deselection flag is raised
and provided to indicate that take off data have been modified and
need to be confirmed.

The take-off speeds computation mode is displayed above the speed values. It is determined by the
FMS and can take the following values:

ICING (amber font) when icing conditions have been received by the FMC (FMC data input).

MANUAL (white font) when at least one of the take-off speeds has been inserted:

 THALES AVIONICS 2012

J61334BB - 00
Page 242
FMS220 - USER'S MANUAL
TABLE OF CONTENTS
T

NORMAL (green font) otherwise.

COCKPIT: The take-off speeds computation mode is provided to

be displayed on the cockpit displays.

PRESS PERF or NEXT key to access to the CRUISE performance page.

This document and any data included are the property of Thales Avionics. They cannot be reproduced, disclosed or utilized without the company’s prior written approval.

 THALES AVIONICS 2012

J61334BB - 00
 T FMS220 - USER'S MANUAL
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Page 243

4.1.3.4 Cruise performances

PRESS PERF key, and if necessary PREV or NEXT key.

ENTER the mean wind between the departure and the destination airports at the
inserted cruise level in the scratchpad (average wind origin in true reference and
speed).
This document and any data included are the property of Thales Avionics. They cannot be reproduced, disclosed or utilized without the company’s prior written approval.

The default destination cruise mean wind is the current wind origin (in True reference) and speed
provided by the navigation sensors.

PRESS the DEST MEANWIND Lsk.

Note: DEST MEANWIND is dedicated to the simplified wind model only, not used otherwise. Refer
to "OPERATIONAL PRINCIPLES / Flight Management principles / Predictions" for more details about
wind management.

ENTER the mean wind between the departure and the alternate airports at the
inserted alternate cruise level in the scratchpad (average wind origin in true reference
and speed).

The default alternate cruise mean wind is 360°/0kt.

INSERT the mean wind between the departure and the alternate airports at the
inserted alternate cruise level: ALTN MEANWIND (average wind origin in true
reference and speed).

CHECK ETA (Estimated Time of Arrival) & EFOB (Estimated Fuel On Board) at
DEST (destination airport).

CHECK ETA (Estimated Time of Arrival) & EFOB (Estimated Fuel On Board) at
ALTN (alternate airport).

CAUTION: If a vertical wind profile is inserted through a vertical revision in any waypoint
of the flight plan, the DEST MEANWIND is not used

CAUTION: If the EFOB at the destination or at the rerouting point is lower than the fuel
reserve then the EFOB is displayed in amber and the FAL alert is triggered.

 THALES AVIONICS 2012

J61334BB - 00
Page 244
FMS220 - USER'S MANUAL
TABLE OF CONTENTS
T

4.1.3.5 Vertical wind profile insertion

CAUTION: If a vertical wind profile is inserted at any waypoint of the flight plan, the
precised wind model is initiated for all the flight plan. The inserted wind profile is propagated
along all the flight plan and the DEST MEANWIND displayed on the CRUISE page is not
used. Refer to "OPERATIONAL PRINCIPLES / Flight management principles / Prediction /
Wind management" for more details about the propagation rules.

PRESS FPLN key (one or two times) to display the desired flight plan page (active
or secondary).

PRESS the right Lsk beside the desired waypoint: the VERT REV page is
displayed.

PRESS WIND Lsk to display WIND page.

This document and any data included are the property of Thales Avionics. They cannot be reproduced, disclosed or utilized without the company’s prior written approval.
CAUTION: If the revised leg is sequenced or if a flight plan modification happens, when
the WIND page is displayed, then the previously displayed FPLN page is automatically
displayed.

 THALES AVIONICS 2012

J61334BB - 00
 T FMS220 - USER'S MANUAL
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Page 245

Note:
a) WIND page can not be accessed from the last waypoint of the flight plan (excluding missed
approach)

b) Vertical revision on the FROM waypoint on FPLN page directly displays the WIND page with
the current vertical navigation profile information.

ENTER a wind group value in the scratchpad (wind origin/wind speed/wind

altitude)

PRESS the Lsk beside the empty cyan bracket to insert a new wind group or
beside an existing group to modify it.
This document and any data included are the property of Thales Avionics. They cannot be reproduced, disclosed or utilized without the company’s prior written approval.

PRESS PREV / NEXT Lsk to CHECK the wind profile of the previous/next leg.

Note: The crew can insert up to 4 wind groups for each leg

PRESS EXEC key to validate the vertical wind profile and display the FPLN page.

 THALES AVIONICS 2012

J61334BB - 00
Page 246
FMS220 - USER'S MANUAL
TABLE OF CONTENTS
T

4.1.3.6 Secondary performances initialization

PRESS the SEC PERF Lsk from the SEC INIT page.

This page displays the secondary flight plan performances parameters. Some specific parameters are
attached to the performances of the secondary flight plan whereas some parameters are common to
the active flight plan and to the secondary flight plan.

The “TAKE OFF” parameters are displayed only if the secondary flight plan has not been initialized as
a copy of the active flight plan.

This document and any data included are the property of Thales Avionics. They cannot be reproduced, disclosed or utilized without the company’s prior written approval.
Secondary flight plan not initialized from the active Secondary flight plan initialized from the active flight
flight plan plan

CHECK the performances parameters and adjust its if necessary.

CAUTION: The default values of the secondary performance parameters are the current
values except FOB which is equal to the EFOB at the active destination if the active
destination airport (or last fix of the active FPLN) is the same as the secondary departure
airport (or first fix of the secondary FPLN).

 THALES AVIONICS 2012

J61334BB - 00
 T FMS220 - USER'S MANUAL
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Page 247

4.1.4 CHECKING THE PREDICTIONS

PRESS FPLN key to monitor altitude and speed constraints along the climb.

 FLPN with ETE / EFOB page is displayed:

PRESS the right Lsk next to the ETA/SPD/ALT< prompt at the bottom of the page to
display .

FLPN with ETA/SPD/ALT page with ETA (Estimated Time of Arrival), speed constraint and altitude
constraint for each waypoint is displayed:
This document and any data included are the property of Thales Avionics. They cannot be reproduced, disclosed or utilized without the company’s prior written approval.

CHECK ALT values representing the altitude constraints on the leg.

The ALT constraint value is displayed: in amber if it is a missed constraint, in magenta if the waypoint
is the active TO waypoint, in green otherwise.

If an altitude constraint, except window altitude constraint, is corrected with the temperature
compensation (refer to "PILOT INTERFACE / MCDU pages description / PROGRESS / VNAV page
2/2"), the char "c" is added before the first character of the ALT constraint displayed.

Note: Altitude constraints can be modified through the VERT REV page.

4.2 TAKE OFF AND CLIMB

The flight phase is "take-off" when the aircraft altitude is less than 1500 ft above the take off altitude.

The flight phase is "climb" when the aircraft is located before or at the Top Of Climb (TOC) in the flight
plan.

 THALES AVIONICS 2012

J61334BB - 00
Page 248
FMS220 - USER'S MANUAL
TABLE OF CONTENTS
T

4.2.1 MONITORING THE TAKE-OFF

PRESS PERF key and the NEXT or PREV key (if necessary) to reach the TAKE OFF
page.

 Before take-off

MONITOR the current speed of the A/C displayed on the Primary Flight
Display with relation to the take-off speeds and the target IAS computed
by the FMC.

COCKPIT: The take-off speeds: decision speed (V1), rotation

speed (VR), and safety speed (V2) are provided to be displayed
on the cockpit displays. The managed speed computed by the
FMC is provided to the Auto Flight Control System to be used as
target speed.

 After take-off

This document and any data included are the property of Thales Avionics. They cannot be reproduced, disclosed or utilized without the company’s prior written approval.

MONITOR the take-off speeds computation mode with relation to the icing
conditions.

CAUTION: The take-off speeds computation mode (and the take-off speeds) displayed in
the page TAKE OFF may change to ICING after take-off if the system detects icing
conditions whereas the initial take-off speeds computation mode has been set to NORMAL.

COCKPIT: The take-off speeds computation mode is provided to

be displayed on the cockpit displays.

 THALES AVIONICS 2012

J61334BB - 00
 T FMS220 - USER'S MANUAL
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Page 249

4.2.2 MONITORING THE VERTICAL GUIDANCE

PRESS VNAV key to monitor vertical deviation (VDEV).

The key parameters for monitoring the vertical guidance during climb are the vertical deviation (VDEV)
and the target airspeed (TGT IAS) displayed on MCDU VNAV 1/2 Page.

During the CLIMB flight phase, the cruise altitude is equal to the value entered by the crew (PERF
This document and any data included are the property of Thales Avionics. They cannot be reproduced, disclosed or utilized without the company’s prior written approval.

INIT or VNAV MCDU page) superseded by the selected altitude if greater than the inserted value. By
default current A/C altitude will be used as cruise altitude value.

Note: During the CLIMB flight phase, CRZ ALT is always insertable (displayed in cyan) within the
following range: [Selected altitude ; Computed ceiling of the A/C majored by 5000] FT.

CAUTION: During the climb, vertical navigation profile update due to ALT SEL change or
vertical revision of the flight plan, inconsistencies may appear (refer to the cases listed into
the paragraph "OPERATIONAL PRINCIPLES / Flight guidance principles / Vertical
navigation / Vertical profile error").

Refer to the "MULTI PHASE RELATED PROCEDURES / Lateral functions" to monitor the horizontal
guidance.

 THALES AVIONICS 2012

J61334BB - 00
Page 250
FMS220 - USER'S MANUAL
TABLE OF CONTENTS
T

4.2.3 MONITORING THE PREDICTIONS

PRESS FPLN key to monitor altitude constraints along the climb.

 FLPN with ETE / EFOB page is displayed:

PRESS the right Lsk next to the ETA/SPD/ALT< prompt at the bottom of the page to
display.

FLPN with ETA/SPD/ALT page with speed and altitude constraints for each waypoint is displayed:

This document and any data included are the property of Thales Avionics. They cannot be reproduced, disclosed or utilized without the company’s prior written approval.

CHECK ALT values (altitude constraints) on the climb legs.

The ALT constraint value is displayed in amber if it is a missed constraint, in magenta if the waypoint
is the active TO waypoint or in green otherwise. If the ALT constraint, except window altitude
constraint, is corrected with the temperature compensation, the char "c" is added before the first
character of the ALT constraint displayed.

Note: Altitude constraints can be modified through the VERT REV page.

4.2.4 MONITORING THE TRANSITION ALTITUDE

MONITOR the current altitude with relation to the departure transition altitude
(displayed in the TAKE OFF page).

The departure transition altitude, TRANS ALT, is provided by the standard database according to the
departure airport. The crew can display or override it on the TAKE-OFF page (Refer to "FLIGHT
PHASE RELATED PROCEDURE / Preflight / Performances initialization / Take-off performances").

COCKPIT: The current transition altitude is provided to allow

warning the crew if the baro-setting is still QNH when the A/C
reachs the transition altitude.

 THALES AVIONICS 2012

J61334BB - 00
 T FMS220 - USER'S MANUAL
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Page 251

4.2.5 MONITORING THE VERTICAL TRACK

MONITOR the Vertical Track during the climb.

 Before reaching the selected altitude:

 If the selected altitude is not equal to the cruise altitude

CHECK that the Vertical Track Alert is triggered one minute before A/C
reaches the selected altitude.

SELECT the next target altitude and engage the appropriate autopilot
mode when the aircraft reaches the selected altitude as soon as the
vertical track alert is raised.

Note: The alert is switched off as soon as the selected altitude is reached.

COCKPIT: The vertical track alert flag is provided to allow

This document and any data included are the property of Thales Avionics. They cannot be reproduced, disclosed or utilized without the company’s prior written approval.

warning the crew whenever it is required to change the selected

altitude in order to follow the computed climb profile.

 When reaching the selected altitude:

 If the selected altitude is equal to the cruise altitude

CHECK that the FMS enters in CRUISE phase.

The target speed switches from climb speed to cruize speed

4.3 CRUISE

The FMS switches automatically from Climb to Cruise phase when A/C reaches the cruise altitude.

 THALES AVIONICS 2012

J61334BB - 00
Page 252
FMS220 - USER'S MANUAL
TABLE OF CONTENTS
T

4.3.1 CRUISE ALTITUDE

The cruise altitude is used by the FMS to compute the level interception points of the cruise section.

The current CRZ ALT is displayed in the PERF INIT page, VNAV 1/2 page and CRUISE page.

During the CRUISE (without freezing conditions, see below), the cruise altitude is equal to the
selected altitude (else the value entered by the crew if it exists, otherwise the current A/C altitude will
be used by FMC as cruise altitude value).

During the CRUISE (within freezing conditions, see below), the cruise altitude is frozen to the value
set before entering freezing conditions.

Note: During the CRUISE, CRZ ALT is not insertable and displayed in green (unless selected
altitude is invalid).

In CRUISE flight phase, in order to allow the crew to modify the selected altitude without affecting
TOD and descent profile computation, the cruise altitude is frozen:

during the 5 last minutes before A/C reaches the TOD, or

This document and any data included are the property of Thales Avionics. They cannot be reproduced, disclosed or utilized without the company’s prior written approval.

during the last 10 minutes before reaching the TOD when an approach procedure including a Final
Approach Fix (FAF) has been selected and selected altitude changes to or below the FAF altitude
- 100ft.

4.3.2 MONITORING THE PREDICTIONS

PRESS FPLN key to monitor fuel and time predictions along the flight plan.

FLPN with ETE / EFOB page is displayed:

CHECK ETE values (Estimated Time Enroute predicted over the legs terminations).

ETE is underlined when a RTA is defined for this waypoint. If ETE is displayed in amber, RTA is
missed.

CHECK EFOB values (Estimated Fuel On Board predicted over the legs
terminations).

This field is displayed in amber if EFOB at waypoint is lower than the fuel reserve, and in green
otherwise.

 THALES AVIONICS 2012

J61334BB - 00
 T FMS220 - USER'S MANUAL
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Page 253

PRESS the right Lsk next to the ETA/SPD/ALT< prompt at the bottom of the page to
display.

FLPN with ETA/SPD/ALT page with ETA (Estimated Time of Arrival) for each waypoint is displayed:

CHECK ETA values (Estimated Time of Arrival predicted over the legs
terminations).
This document and any data included are the property of Thales Avionics. They cannot be reproduced, disclosed or utilized without the company’s prior written approval.

ETA is underlined when a RTA is defined for this waypoint. If ETA is displayed in amber, RTA is
missed.

Note:
a) All These fields are displayed in cyan if they belong to legs defined as a part of a missed
approach procedure that is not activated in the flight plan.

b) At the FROM waypoint, all displayed values are the ones at the sequencing time of the leg.

c) Speed constraints can be modified through the VERT REV page.

d) Altitude constraints are not taken into account and displayed in amber during cruise.

 THALES AVIONICS 2012

J61334BB - 00
Page 254
FMS220 - USER'S MANUAL
TABLE OF CONTENTS
T

4.3.3 ENTERING A STEP CLIMB OR A STEP DESCENT

PRESS FPLN key.

PRESS the right Lsk next to the desired waypoint.

The VERT REV page is displayed.

ENTER the desired step altitude value in the scratchpad.

PRESS the Lsk beside the STEP TO field.

The value is displayed in that field and the STEP MODE field appears under the STEP TO line.

This document and any data included are the property of Thales Avionics. They cannot be reproduced, disclosed or utilized without the company’s prior written approval.

SELECT the STEP MODE by alternation between LONG RANGE and MAX CRUISE,
or ENTER directly the desired IAS value in that field (constant CAS cruise mode)

When the step waypoint is acknowledged, this chosen STEP MODE will become the cruise mode
(refer to CRZ MODE field in PERF INIT page).

PRESS EXEC key to insert this step in the flight plan and display the FPLN page.

Note: Once a step is inserted in the active flight plan, a level interception point is computed and
displayed in the VNAV 1/2 page.

 To delete a step:

Perform a CLEAR action on the STEP TO Lsk.

 THALES AVIONICS 2012

J61334BB - 00
 T FMS220 - USER'S MANUAL
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Page 255

4.3.4 MONITORING THE VERTICAL TRACK (DURING A STEP)

MONITOR the vertical track during the cruise.

 Before reaching a step waypoint:

CHECK that the Vertical Track Alert is triggered one minute before A/C
reaches the step waypoint.

SELECT the next target altitude and engage the appropriate autopilot
mode in order to follow the step when the aircraft reaches the step
waypoint as soon as the vertical track alert is raised.

Note: The alert is switched off as soon as the step waypoint is sequenced or the selected altitude is
modified.

COCKPIT: The vertical track alert flag is provided to allow

warning the crew whenever it is required to change the selected
altitude in order to follow the computed vertical profile.
This document and any data included are the property of Thales Avionics. They cannot be reproduced, disclosed or utilized without the company’s prior written approval.

 THALES AVIONICS 2012

J61334BB - 00
Page 256
FMS220 - USER'S MANUAL
TABLE OF CONTENTS
T

4.3.5 ENTERING THE APPROACH DATA

PRESS PERF key, and if necessary PREV or NEXT key.

CHECK the transition altitude (TRANS ALT) of the arrival airport provided by the
navigation database.

This document and any data included are the property of Thales Avionics. They cannot be reproduced, disclosed or utilized without the company’s prior written approval.
If the transition altitude at the destination airport is known into the database, the TRANS ALT is
displayed in small font. If the transition altitude at the destination airport is unkown, the TRANS ALT is
displayed in amber boxes.

 To modify (if required) or to enter the transition altitude of the arrival airport:

WRITE in the scratchpad the value of the transition altitude of the arrival
airport.

PRESS the TRANS ALT Lsk to enter it.

When the TRANS ALT has been entered, it is displayed in large cyan font. CLEAR action enables
to return to the default value.

Note: The TRANS ALT is invalid and cannot be inserted when the arrival waypoint of the flight plan
is not an airport.

COCKPIT: The current transition altitude is provided to warn the

crew if the baro-setting is not set as expected value for the current
altitude.

WRITE the QNH value in the scratchpad.

PRESS the QNH Lsk to enter it.

CAUTION: QNH is used to compute current and destination transition levels for baro-
setting alarm management.

Note: QNH cannot be entered when aircraft is below the transition level in DESCENT section. In this
case, QNH is displayed in large green font with current baro-setting.

 THALES AVIONICS 2012

J61334BB - 00
 T FMS220 - USER'S MANUAL
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Page 257

WRITE in the scratchpad the GND WIND/GUST (mean wind origin and speed and
gust wind) on ground at destination airport.

PRESS the GND WIND/GUST Lsk to enter it.

Note:
a) GND WIND/GUST is used for the VAPP computation and for the predictions using the
simplified wind model.

b) The gust wind can never be lower than the mean wind, it is rejected or invalidated in such a
case.

4.4 DESCENT

The flight phase is "descent" when the aircraft is located at or after the Top Of Descent (TOD) in the
flight plan.
This document and any data included are the property of Thales Avionics. They cannot be reproduced, disclosed or utilized without the company’s prior written approval.

4.4.1 DESCENT INITIATION

The Top Of Descent (TOD), displayed on the Navigation Display and on the MCDU page PROG 1/3
(ETA & Distance to TOD) and page VNAV 1/2 (ETA) is a position computed by the FMC assuming
that the aircraft will begin its descent with managed speed in order to allow following the descent
profile computed taking into account the vertical constraints of the flight plan.

MONITOR the vertical track when approaching the Top Of Descent (TOD).

 Before reaching the Top Of Descent (TOD):

CHECK that the Vertical Track Alert is triggered one minute before the Top
Of Descent (TOD).

COCKPIT: The vertical track alert flag is provided to allow

warning the crew whenever it is required to change the selected
altitude in order to follow the computed vertical profile.

SELECT the next target altitude and engage the appropriate autopilot
mode when the aircraft reaches the Top Of Descent (TOD) as soon as the
vertical track alert is raised.

 THALES AVIONICS 2012

J61334BB - 00
Page 258
FMS220 - USER'S MANUAL
TABLE OF CONTENTS
T

4.4.2 MONITORING THE TRANSITION LEVEL

MONITOR the current altitude with relation to the transition level computed from
the destination transition altitude.

The destination transition altitude, TRANS ALT, is provided by the standard database according to
destination airports. The crew can display or override it on the APPROACH page.

COCKPIT: The current transition altitude is provided to allow

warning the crew if the baro-setting is still standard when the A/C
reachs the transition level.

4.4.3 MONITORING THE VERTICAL GUIDANCE

PRESS VNAV key.

The key parameters for monitoring the vertical guidance during descent are the vertical deviation

This document and any data included are the property of Thales Avionics. They cannot be reproduced, disclosed or utilized without the company’s prior written approval.
(VDEV) and the target vertical speed (TGT VS) displayed on MCDU Page VNAV 1/2.

MONITOR the VDEV and ADJUST the vertical speed if necessary.

COCKPIT: The VDEV is provided to allow indicating whether the

aircraft is on, above or below the descent profile.

ADJUST the selected vertical speed on the FGCP according to the target vertical
speed (TGT VS).

 Aircraft on the descent profile

The aircraft is considered to be on the descent profile when it is within 50ft of it.

Monitor the predicted descent point after the next level-off.

 Aircraft above the descent profile (VDEV is positive)

SELECT a vertical speed higher than the target vertical speed (TGT VS).

 Aircraft below the descent profile (VDEV is negative)

SELECT a vertical speed lower than the target vertical speed (TGT VS).

Refer to the "MULTI PHASE RELATED PROCEDURES / Lateral functions" to monitor the horizontal
guidance.

 THALES AVIONICS 2012

J61334BB - 00
 T FMS220 - USER'S MANUAL
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Page 259

4.4.4 MONITORING THE VERTICAL TRACK

Monitor the Vertical Track during the descent.

 Before reaching the selected altitude:

CHECK that the Vertical Track Alert is triggered one minute before A/C
reaches the selected altitude.

SELECT the next target altitude and engage the appropriate autopilot
mode when the aircraft reaches the selected altitude as soon as the
vertical track alert is raised.

Note: The alert is switched off as soon as the selected altitude is reached.

COCKPIT: The vertical track alert flag is provided to allow

warning the crew whenever it is required to change the selected
altitude in order to follow the computed descent profile.
This document and any data included are the property of Thales Avionics. They cannot be reproduced, disclosed or utilized without the company’s prior written approval.

 THALES AVIONICS 2012

J61334BB - 00
Page 260
FMS220 - USER'S MANUAL
TABLE OF CONTENTS
T

4.4.5 MONITORING THE PREDICTIONS

PRESS FPLN key to monitor altitude and speed constraints along the descent.

FLPN with ETE / EFOB page is displayed:

PRESS the right Lsk next to the ETA/SPD/ALT< prompt at the bottom of the page to
display .

FLPN with ETA/SPD/ALT page with ETA (Estimated Time of Arrival), speed constraint and altitude
constraint for each waypoint is displayed:

This document and any data included are the property of Thales Avionics. They cannot be reproduced, disclosed or utilized without the company’s prior written approval.

CHECK ALT values (altitude constraints) on the descent legs.

The ALT constraint value is displayed in amber if it is a missed constraint, (here c7000 at
MURRO), in magenta if the waypoint is the active TO waypoint, in green otherwise.

If an ALT constraint, except window altitude constraint, is corrected with the temperature
compensation, the char "c" is added before the first character of the ALT constraint displayed
(here c7000 at MURRO, c7200B at VNE and c814A at LFLL).

Note:
a) Altitude constraints can be modified through the VERT REV page.

b) “WINDOW” indicates a window altitude constraint.

c) All These fields are displayed in cyan if they belong to legs defined as a part of a missed
approach procedure that is not activated in the flight plan.

CHECK SPD values (speed constraints) on the descent legs.

The SPD field is always displayed in green.

 THALES AVIONICS 2012

J61334BB - 00
 T FMS220 - USER'S MANUAL
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Page 261

4.4.6 INSERTING A HOLDING PATTERN

A hold may be required during the descent, and may be manually inserted. The insertion of a holding
pattern is only allowed at waypoints of the active flight plan or at the present position (PPOS).

PRESS the FPLN key.

 Hodling at the present position (PPOS):

PRESS the left Lsk next to the FROM waypoint.

The LTRL REV (at PPOS) page is displayed.

This document and any data included are the property of Thales Avionics. They cannot be reproduced, disclosed or utilized without the company’s prior written approval.

 Holding at a waypoint of the active flight plan:

PRESS the left Lsk next to the desired waypoint on which the holding
pattern shall be inserted: the LTRL REV page is displayed.

The LTRL REV (at WPT) page is displayed.

PRESS HOLDING Lsk.

The HOLDING AT page is displayed:

 To turn to the left (instead of right) :

PRESS the TURN Lsk.

 To change the inbound course:

 THALES AVIONICS 2012

J61334BB - 00
Page 262
FMS220 - USER'S MANUAL
TABLE OF CONTENTS
T

ENTER the new value of the inbound course ("10" for example) in the
scratchpad.

PRESS the INBND CRS Lsk.

 To change the duration of the inbound leg:

ENTER the new value of the inbound leg duration ("1.5" for example) in
the scratchpad.

PRESS the TIME / DIST Lsk.

 To change the length of the inbound leg:

ENTER the new value the inbound leg length ("/6.5" for example) in the
scratchpad.

PRESS the TIME / DIST Lsk.

This document and any data included are the property of Thales Avionics. They cannot be reproduced, disclosed or utilized without the company’s prior written approval.
 To change the holding speed:

ENTER the new value of the holding speed ("180" for example) in the
scratchpad.

PRESS the IAS Lsk.

Note:
a) When the holding pattern is inserted at PPOS, the holding speed IAS can not be modified
(insertion is rejected).

b) When a holding pattern is active, the holding speed IAS can not be modified.

c) Inserted IAS value must be into a range computed by the FMC (Managed Speed function),
else it is rejected.

PRESS EXEC key to insert the holding pattern in the active flight plan.

 THALES AVIONICS 2012

J61334BB - 00
 T FMS220 - USER'S MANUAL
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Page 263

4.4.7 ENTERING THE APPROACH FLIGHT AREA

The flight area becomes "approach" when:

an approach procedure including a Final Approach Fix (FAF) has been selected, and,

the along track distance between the aircraft and the FAF is smaller than 2 NM and,

the geometry aircraft/procedure is acceptable : lateral error (XTK) smaller than 0.3 NM and
angular error (TKE) less than 90 degrees, and,

the GPS is used in aircraft position computation and GPS HIL is smaller than 0.3 NM and HIL is
predicted to be available at FAF (Final Approach Fix) and MAP (Missed Approach Point) and lower
than 0.3 NM (GPS integrity criteria), or, the radionavigation data are used in aircraft position
computation and EPE_radio is smaller than 0.5 NM (radionav integrity criteria).

COCKPIT: The full-scale deflection of the non-numerical cross-

track deviation (depending on the flight area) is provided to allow
displaying the cross-track deviation through a non-numerical
symbology.
This document and any data included are the property of Thales Avionics. They cannot be reproduced, disclosed or utilized without the company’s prior written approval.

COCKPIT: The flight area is provided to allow indicating to the

crew what is the current flight area.

CAUTION: The use of not co-located VOR-DME navaids is not compliant with PRNAV
and US-RNAV regulations standards in terminal area ("V-D" is displayed in amber in MCDU
title line).

4.5 APPROACH

The flight phase enters "approach" when all the following conditions are met:

The direct distance to the destination airport is smaller than 10 NM, and,

The flight plan active leg is part of an approach procedure to the destination airport, or the TO
waypoint is the destination airport.

4.5.1 VERTICAL TRACK ALERT

Vertical Track Alert is triggered one minute before A/C reaches the selected altitude in APPROACH
phase.

COCKPIT: The vertical track alert flag is provided to allow

warning the crew whenever it is required to change the selected
altitude in order to follow the computed descent profile.

 THALES AVIONICS 2012

J61334BB - 00
Page 264
FMS220 - USER'S MANUAL
TABLE OF CONTENTS
T

4.5.2 INITIATING THE APPROACH SPEED

PRESS PERF key, and if necessary PREV or NEXT key.

PRESS APP SPD Lsk to set the managed speed function in approach phase
(ACTIVATE / DESELECT).

This document and any data included are the property of Thales Avionics. They cannot be reproduced, disclosed or utilized without the company’s prior written approval.
Note:
a) When managed speed function is configured in approach phase, ACT (green font) is displayed
beside the APP SPD field.

b) At power up, managed speed function is inactivated.

c) Approach phase activation is not allowed on ground or when go around mode is engaged.

d) Upon specific events, determined by FMC, approach phase is automatically

activated/inactivated by FMC.

 THALES AVIONICS 2012

J61334BB - 00
 T FMS220 - USER'S MANUAL
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Page 265

4.5.3 MONITORING THE VERTICAL GUIDANCE

PRESS VNAV key.

The key parameters for monitoring the vertical guidance during approach are the vertical deviation
(VDEV) and the target vertical speed (TGT VS) displayed on MCDU Page VNAV 1/2.

MONITOR the VDEV and ADJUST the selected vertical speed on the FGCP
according to the target vertical speed (TGT VS).

COCKPIT: The VDEV is provided to allow indicating whether the

aircraft is on, above or below the approach path.

 Aircraft on the descent profile:

The aircraft is considered to be on the descent profile when it is within 50ft of it.

MONITOR the predicted descent point after the next level-off.

This document and any data included are the property of Thales Avionics. They cannot be reproduced, disclosed or utilized without the company’s prior written approval.

 Aircraft above the descent profile (VDEV is positive):

SELECT a vertical speed higher than the target vertical speed (TGT VS).

 Aircraft below the descent profile (VDEV is negative):

SELECT a vertical speed lower than the target vertical speed (TGT VS).

Refer to the "MULTI PHASE RELATED PROCEDURES / Lateral functions" to monitor the horizontal
guidance.

COCKPIT: The Elevation of the landing runway is provided to

allow displaying an analog indication in the altitude tape during
landing.

 THALES AVIONICS 2012

J61334BB - 00
Page 266
FMS220 - USER'S MANUAL
TABLE OF CONTENTS
T

4.6 GO AROUND

The flight phase is "go around" when the crew has engaged the go around mode on auto pilot.

4.6.1 MISSED APPROACH

The missed approach is selected through the approach selection (APP).

The missed approach is displayed on the FPLN page after the destination runway, in cyan font. The
missed approach is activated if one of the following conditions is met:

Go Around mode is engaged.

DIRECT TO one of the Missed Approach waypoints is performed.

Note: On the DIRECT TO page, the missed approach is activated by pressing the Lsk beside the
desired fix identifier. If the IDENT field is filled with the identifier of one of a missed approach waypoint,
the direct to the waypoint is performed but the missed approach is not activated.

This document and any data included are the property of Thales Avionics. They cannot be reproduced, disclosed or utilized without the company’s prior written approval.
During go around, the missed approach legs are displayed in green font as parts of the active flight
plan and the previously flown approach is automatically strung back into the flight plan at the end of
the missed approach procedure. The FMC does not take into account the speed constraints.
Therefore, the flight crew must monitor the speed constraints (if any) on the page FPLN.

COCKPIT: The missed approach legs are displayed as active on

the Navigation Display as soon as the missed approach is
activated by meeting one of the conditions listed hereabove.

 When cleared by the ATC to follow the missed approach procedure:

ENGAGE LNAV or TURN the HDG selector knob to set a heading in order
to follow the horizontal guidance from the FMS.

 When entering the approach area:

REPEAT the "Approach" procedure.

 THALES AVIONICS 2012

J61334BB - 00
 T FMS220 - USER'S MANUAL
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Page 267

4.7 DONE

After sequencing the last waypoint of the approach procedure, the missed approach legs are deleted
from the active flight plan if one of the following conditions is verified:
− A new flight plan is activated.
− The A/C is on ground for more than 30 seconds.
− The engines are off and a door is open (end of flight cycle).

CHECK after end of flight cycle:
 DFLT FPA is reset to 3°.
 CRZ MODE is reset to LONG RANGE cruise mode
 FF FACTOR is reset to 0%.
 ZFW, FOB and T/O CG are invalidated
 Take-off speeds V1, VR & V2 are reset to the values computed by FMC
 Fuel flows ENG1 & ENG2 are reset to the values provided by the fuel flow meters.
Note: The reset values are displayed in small cyan font whereas the entered values were displayed
in large cyan font.
This document and any data included are the property of Thales Avionics. They cannot be reproduced, disclosed or utilized without the company’s prior written approval.

 THALES AVIONICS 2012

J61334BB - 00
Page 268
FMS220 - USER'S MANUAL
TABLE OF CONTENTS
T

5 MULTI PHASE RELATED PROCEDURES

5.1 LATERAL FUNCTIONS

5.1.1 FLIGHT PLAN REVISION

The following paragraphs apply to active, temporary, and secondary flight plans.

CAUTION: When a revision has been made on the active flight plan, it is possible to
recover the flight plan before the modification during 1 minute after activation. Press UNDO
Lsk to recover the previous flight plan (in the temporary flight plan). After 1 minute, UNDO is
replaced by NEW FPLN beside L6 Lsk.

This document and any data included are the property of Thales Avionics. They cannot be reproduced, disclosed or utilized without the company’s prior written approval.
5.1.1.1 Revision of a departure procedure

PRESS FPLN key.

PRESS the Lsk beside the departure airport or runway.

The departure page is then displayed with preceding entered fields completed.

PRESS the Lsk beside RWY.

The list of runways corresponding to the airport is then displayed.

PRESS the Lsk beside the desired RWY to select it.

PRESS the Lsk beside SID field displays the list of SIDs.

PRESS the Lsk beside the desired element to select it.

PRESS the Lsk beside TRANS field displays the list of transitions.

PRESS the Lsk beside the desired element to select it.

 Before updating the new departure procedure in the active flight plan.

CHECK the new departure procedure by pressing the Lsk next to the
TMPY> prompt.

PRESS EXEC key to insert the new departure procedure and access to the first
FPLN page.

Note: If a leg sequencing or a flight plan modification happens, when the DEPARTURE page is
displayed, then the first FPLN page is automatically displayed.

 THALES AVIONICS 2012

J61334BB - 00
 T FMS220 - USER'S MANUAL
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Page 269

COCKPIT: After activation, the departure procedure is updated

into the active flight plan displayed on the navigation display.

5.1.1.2 Revision of an arrival procedure

PRESS FPLN key.

PRESS the Lsk beside the arrival airport or runway

The arrival page is then displayed with preceding entered fields completed.

PRESS the Lsk beside APP.

The list of approaches corresponding to the airport is then displayed.

PRESS the Lsk beside STAR field.

The list of STARs corresponding to the selected approach is then displayed.

This document and any data included are the property of Thales Avionics. They cannot be reproduced, disclosed or utilized without the company’s prior written approval.

PRESS the Lsk beside VIA field.

The list of transitions between selected STAR and approach is then displayed.

PRESS the Lsk beside TRANS field.

The list of transitions between the route and selected STAR is then displayed.

PRESS the Lsk beside the new desired elements as for an insertion.

 Before updating the new arrival procedure in the active flight plan.

CHECK the new arrival procedure by pressing the Lsk next to the TMPY>
prompt.

PRESS EXEC key to insert the new arrival procedure and access to the first FPLN
page.

CAUTION: When LNAV is engaged and arrival airport is the TO waypoint (typically after a
DIRECT TO arrival airport), it is not allowed to select a arrival procedure. NOT ALLOWED
message will display in the scratchpad line when selecting an approach or a STAR. It is
necessary to disengage LNAV before performing the present procedure.

 THALES AVIONICS 2012

J61334BB - 00
Page 270
FMS220 - USER'S MANUAL
TABLE OF CONTENTS
T

CAUTION: When LNAV is engaged, modification of a STAR/Approach component is not

allowed when the active leg is part of it (excluding missed approach). NOT ALLOWED
message will display in the scratchpad line when selecting another approach or STAR. It is
necessary to disengage LNAV before modifying the approach or the STAR.

COCKPIT: After activation, the arrival procedure is updated into

the active flight plan displayed on the navigation display.

5.1.1.3 Inserting a Waypoint

This function allows the direct entry of a new waypoint in the flight plan. It may be inserted by an ident,
a position, a Place/Bearing/Distance, a Place-Bearing/Place-Bearing, a Lat/Lon crossing (refer to
"LAT/LON crossing" sub-paragraph) or a Along track offset (refer to "Along Track Offset" sub-
paragraph) entry.

WRITE the waypoint identifier into the scratchpad.

This document and any data included are the property of Thales Avionics. They cannot be reproduced, disclosed or utilized without the company’s prior written approval.

PRESS the left Lsk beside the desired waypoint or discontinuity

The new waypoint takes place beside the pressed Lsk and the selected waypoint is moved
downpath in the flight plan. A discontinuity is inserted between the new waypoint and the selected
one. If the revised waypoint is PPOS, PPOS is retained and the new waypoint is inserted after the
discontinuity. If the revised waypoint is a rallying waypoint, it is cancelled.

Example: Insertion at a waypoint in the flight plan

 THALES AVIONICS 2012

J61334BB - 00
 T FMS220 - USER'S MANUAL
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Page 271

Example: Insertion at FROM / TO waypoints

Insertion at the FROM waypoint is not allowed

This document and any data included are the property of Thales Avionics. They cannot be reproduced, disclosed or utilized without the company’s prior written approval.

Insertion at the TO waypoint (FROM waypoint is not the departure airport)

Insertion at the TO waypoint (FROM waypoint is the departure airport)

 THALES AVIONICS 2012

J61334BB - 00
Page 272
FMS220 - USER'S MANUAL
TABLE OF CONTENTS
T

Example: Insertion at a rallying waypoint

Example: Insertion at PPOS

This document and any data included are the property of Thales Avionics. They cannot be reproduced, disclosed or utilized without the company’s prior written approval.
Example: Insertion at a discontinuity

 THALES AVIONICS 2012

J61334BB - 00
 T FMS220 - USER'S MANUAL
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Page 273

Note:
a) Insertion at the TO waypoint of the active leg is not allowed when the FMS is coupled to the
autopilot.

b) If the new waypoint is part of the downpath flight plan (except if it is part of the missed
approach), all legs between the new waypoint and the identical downpath waypoint are
deleted.

c) A new waypoint cannot be inserted on the discontinuity following a leg with a manual
termination (FM, VM, HM legs).

d) If an airport is inserted, it is processed as a waypoint. Use DIRECT TO or NEW DEST to

access to the airport procedures.

e) Moving waypoints can only be inserted using DIRECT TO.

f) If the new waypoint or the reference place does not belong to the Standard or Pilot database,
the NEW DATA page is displayed in order to allow the creation into the Pilot database.
This document and any data included are the property of Thales Avionics. They cannot be reproduced, disclosed or utilized without the company’s prior written approval.

WAYPOINT IDENTIFICATION:

The identification of a waypoint entered by the user can be:

The identifier which is stored in Standard Database or in Pilot Database.

The identifier which is created by the FMS for a temporary waypoint when:
− User inserts a Latitude/Longitude waypoint: N4512.8/E01012.26 entered in the scratchpad
becomes WPT-XX in the flight plan, where XX is an index computed by the FMS.
− User inserts a Place/Bearing/Distance waypoint defined by its bearing and distance to a
place: PERLE/120/12 in the scratchpad becomes PER-XX, where XX is an index
computed by the FMS.
− User inserts a Place-Bearing/Place-Bearing waypoint defined by the intersection of 2
radials relative to 2 places: SAURG/40/TOU/146 in the scratchpad becomes SAU-XX
where XX is an index computed by the FMS.
− User inserts a Lat/Lon crossing waypoint defined by the intersection of the flight plan path
with a given latitude or longitude: /N4512.8 in the scratchpad becomes N45 (hundredth of
degrees are omitted).
− User inserts a Along Track Offset waypoint defined by its distance (along the flight plan) to
a place of the flight plan: /12.3 in the scratchpad inserted on PERLE waypoint becomes
PERLE12 (tenth of nautical mile are omitted).

 THALES AVIONICS 2012

J61334BB - 00
Page 274
FMS220 - USER'S MANUAL
TABLE OF CONTENTS
T

5.1.1.3.1 LAT/LON crossing

This function provides the capability to insert a waypoint in the flight plan defined by the intersection
between the flight plan and a given latitude or longitude. It is inserted in the flight plan and identified
by:
− Nxx for North latitude crossing (xx being the latitude value)
− Sxx for South latitude crossing (xx being the latitude value)
− Exxx for East longitude crossing (xxx being the longitude value)
− Wxxx for West longitude crossing (xxx being the longitude value)

S52°00’ S52

This document and any data included are the property of Thales Avionics. They cannot be reproduced, disclosed or utilized without the company’s prior written approval.
/S5200 B
insertion

Example of LAT/LON crossing

To define a LAT/LON crossing point:

PRESS FPLN key to access to the FPLN page

INSERT in the scratchpad the slash (/) character followed by a latitude or longitude
value.

Example: /S4415 or /W070.1

PRESS the Lsk beside the desired waypoint of the flight plan (reference waypoint).

FMC searches the first crossing point along the flight plan from the reference waypoint. When no
intersection is found, the following message is displayed in the scratchpad line:
NO VALID INTERSECTION

LAT/LON crossing points are inserted in the flight plan and do not change the existing path.

Note:
a) Crossing point is only possible on straight legs with fix termination (CF, TF or DF leg) and at a
distance of at least 0.5NM from a fix.

b) The insertion is rejected if the reference waypoint is a moving waypoint.

c) The insertion of a LAT/LON crossing is also possible on NEXT WPT Lsk on LTRL REV page.

 THALES AVIONICS 2012

J61334BB - 00
 T FMS220 - USER'S MANUAL
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Page 275

5.1.1.3.2 Along Track Offset

This function allows to compute a temporary waypoint defined by the distance along the flight path to
(or from) a waypoint of the flight plan (reference waypoint). It is inserted in the flight plan on the leg
preceding the reference waypoint (or the leg following the reference waypoint) and identified by the
ident of the reference waypoint followed by the distance in NM:

TOU
Insertion of
Insertion of /8 or /+8
/-12
TOU08
TOU12
This document and any data included are the property of Thales Avionics. They cannot be reproduced, disclosed or utilized without the company’s prior written approval.

Example of Along Track Offset

To define a Along Track Offset:

PRESS FPLN key to access to the FPLN page

INSERT in the scratchpad the slash (/) character followed by a distance value
(positive or negative).

Example: /-15.5 or /20

PRESS the Lsk beside the desired waypoint of the flight plan.

Along Track Offset points are inserted in the flight plan and do not change the existing path.

Note:
a) If distance is positive, along track offset point is only possible if the following leg is a straight
track to fix leg (TF leg) and at a distance of at least 0.5NM from a fix.

b) If distance is negative, along track offset point is only possible if the preceding leg is a straight
leg with fix termination (CF, TF or DF leg) and at a distance of at least 0.5NM from a fix.

c) The insertion is rejected if the reference waypoint is an abeam waypoint, a LAT/LON crossing
point, an Along Track Offset point or a moving waypoint.

d) The insertion of a Along Track Offset is also possible on NEXT WPT Lsk on LTRL REV page.

e) Constraints of the reference waypoint are not copied into the along track offset point.

 THALES AVIONICS 2012

J61334BB - 00
Page 276
FMS220 - USER'S MANUAL
TABLE OF CONTENTS
T

5.1.1.4 Clearing a Waypoint

PRESS FPLN key to access to the FPLN page.

PRESS CLR key with the scratchpad empty.

PRESS the Lsk beside the selected waypoint: the corresponding leg is deleted
from the flight plan and a discontinuity is inserted in its place.

Example: Clearing a waypoint in the flight plan:

This document and any data included are the property of Thales Avionics. They cannot be reproduced, disclosed or utilized without the company’s prior written approval.
Example: Clearing the FROM / TO waypoints:

Note:
a) Clearing the FROM waypoint is never allowed.

b) Clearing a waypoint preceding or following a curved leg (RF leg) is not allowed.

c) Clearing the TO waypoint is not allowed when the FMS is coupled to the autopilot.

d) Clearing the origin or the destination airport is not allowed.

e) If clearing successive waypoints, only one discontinuity is generated. (as a general rule, it is
not possible to have successive discontinuities)

f) After clearing a holding pattern or a procedure turn, no discontinuity is inserted.

 THALES AVIONICS 2012

J61334BB - 00
 T FMS220 - USER'S MANUAL
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Page 277

5.1.1.5 Inserting a discontinuity

This function allows the direct insertion of a discontinuity in the flight plan.

ENTER the slash character "/" in the scratchpad.

PRESS the left Lsk beside the revised waypoint.

A fix is created in the FPLN after the inserted discontinuity with the termination fix of the previous
leg.
This document and any data included are the property of Thales Avionics. They cannot be reproduced, disclosed or utilized without the company’s prior written approval.

Note:
a) A discontinuity can only be inserted after legs with fix termination (TF, DF, CF, HF), except
curved legs (RF legs) or Holding legs (HF legs) resulting from a discontinuity deletion after
manual termination (HM legs).

b) A discontinuity cannot be inserted before a curved leg (RF leg).

c) A discontinuity cannot be inserted between the present position and the active waypoint.

d) A discontinuity cannot be inserted after a moving waypoint.

e) A discontinuity cannot be inserted before or after a discontinuity.

 THALES AVIONICS 2012

J61334BB - 00
Page 278
FMS220 - USER'S MANUAL
TABLE OF CONTENTS
T

5.1.1.6 Clearing a discontinuity

PRESS FPLN key.

PRESS CLR key with the scratchpad empty.

The message “CLEAR ?” appears in reverse video in the scratchpad line.

PRESS the Lsk next to the discontinuity to clear it.

This document and any data included are the property of Thales Avionics. They cannot be reproduced, disclosed or utilized without the company’s prior written approval.
Note:
a) The discontinuity following PPOS cannot be deleted. Perform a DIRECT TO the first waypoint
of the flight plan to suppress this discontinuity.

b) The discontinuity following a leg with manual termination (VM, FM) cannot be deleted while
this leg is not active (discontinuity following HM legs can always be cleared).

c) If the discontinuity following a HM leg is cleared, the holding is ended at next overfly of the
holding waypoint.

d) If the same fix exists on each side of the discontinuity, only one fix will remain after the
discontinuity deletion.

5.1.2 SECONDARY FLIGHT PLAN

5.1.2.1 Secondary flight plan initialization

Refer to "FLIGHT PHASE RELATED PROCEDURES / Preflight / Navigation initialization / Secondary

flight plan setup".

 THALES AVIONICS 2012

J61334BB - 00
 T FMS220 - USER'S MANUAL
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Page 279

5.1.2.2 Copy active Flight plan in the secondary flight plan

Refer to "FLIGHT PHASE RELATED PROCEDURES / Preflight / Navigation initialization / Secondary

flight plan setup".

5.1.2.3 Activation of the secondary Flight plan

PRESS ACTIVATE Lsk on the SEC INIT page.

The SEC FPLN page is then displayed with a confirmation message in the scratchpad line.
This document and any data included are the property of Thales Avionics. They cannot be reproduced, disclosed or utilized without the company’s prior written approval.

PRESS EXEC key to activate the secondary flight plan (which replaces the active
flight plan)

The active FPLN page is then displayed.

Note: If a temporary flight plan exists, no activation is performed and the following message is
displayed in the scratchpad line:

TMPY EXIST

 THALES AVIONICS 2012

J61334BB - 00
Page 280
FMS220 - USER'S MANUAL
TABLE OF CONTENTS
T

5.1.2.4 Swap of the active and of secondary flight plan

Refer to "FLIGHT PHASE RELATED PROCEDURES / Preflight / Navigation initialization / Secondary

flight plan setup".

5.1.2.5 Cancellation of the secondary flight plan

PRESS CANCEL SEC Lsk from the SEC INIT page

A confirmation message is displayed in the scratchpad line:

This document and any data included are the property of Thales Avionics. They cannot be reproduced, disclosed or utilized without the company’s prior written approval.

PRESS EXEC key to delete the secondary flight plan.

5.1.2.6 Secondary performances initialization

Refer to "FLIGHT PHASE RELATED PROCEDURES / Preflight / Navigation initialization / Secondary

flight plan setup".

 THALES AVIONICS 2012

J61334BB - 00
 T FMS220 - USER'S MANUAL
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Page 281

5.1.3 MONITORING THE HORIZONTAL GUIDANCE

PRESS PROG key then the NEXT key (or PRESS the PROG key two times).

The key parameters for monitoring the horizontal guidance during the cruise are the Cross Track Error
(XTK) and the current airspeed (IAS) with relation to the target airspeed (TGT IAS) displayed on
MCDU PROG 2/3 page.
This document and any data included are the property of Thales Avionics. They cannot be reproduced, disclosed or utilized without the company’s prior written approval.

MONITOR the XTK and ADJUST the heading if necessary.

COCKPIT: The XTK is provided to allow indicating on the primary

displays whether the aircraft is on the left or on the right of the
desired path.

 If LNAV coupling is engaged:

CHECK that the XTK is within the flight technical error.

 If LNAV coupling is not engaged:

Adjust the heading in order to maintain the XTK within half the RNP.

CAUTION: During some particular transitions between two legs (overfly, holding pattern
entering...), the XTK is computed with regard to the flight plan (instead of the desired path).

Note: Refer to "OPERATIONAL PRINCIPLES / Definitions / Required Navigation performance

(RNP)" to know the default RNP value depending on the flight area and on the sensors used for
positioning

MONITOR the IAS and ADJUST the speed if necessary to reach the TGT.

COCKPIT: The TGT IAS is provided to the Auto Flight Control

System to compute the target IAS indicated on the primary
displays.

 THALES AVIONICS 2012

J61334BB - 00
Page 282
FMS220 - USER'S MANUAL
TABLE OF CONTENTS
T

5.1.4 HOLDING PATTERN

5.1.4.1 Inserting a holding pattern

Refer to "FLIGHT PHASE RELATED PROCEDURES / Descent / Inserting a holding pattern".

5.1.4.2 Editing a holding pattern

The crew can edit a holding pattern in order to modify one or several parameters. Parameters
modified at the creation or during modifications appear in large font.

PRESS FPLN key

PRESS the left Lsk beside the holding waypoint entry (if holding pattern is not yet
active) or holding waypoint exit.

The LTRL REV page is displayed.

This document and any data included are the property of Thales Avionics. They cannot be reproduced, disclosed or utilized without the company’s prior written approval.

PRESS HOLDING Lsk.

The HOLDING AT page is displayed with holding parameters:

CHECK the holding pattern parameters.

PRESS TURN Lsk to modify the turn direction (if required).

 To modify a holding pattern parameter (if required):

ENTER the new value of the parameter in the scratchpad.

PRESS the corresponding Lsk to enter it.

PRESS EXEC key to validate the changes and display the FPLN page.

Note: The modifications performed on an active holding pattern will apply upon the next crossing of
the holding fix.

 THALES AVIONICS 2012

J61334BB - 00
 T FMS220 - USER'S MANUAL
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Page 283

5.1.4.3 Exiting from a holding pattern

PRESS FPLN key.

PRESS PREV / NEXT key to reach the relevant FPLN page.

CLEAR the "CLR TO EXIT NEXT" line following the holding pattern exit waypoint.

The exit is then performed at the next overfly of the holding waypoint.
This document and any data included are the property of Thales Avionics. They cannot be reproduced, disclosed or utilized without the company’s prior written approval.

Note: It is also possible to exit from an active holding pattern performing a DIRECT TO function to
the holding pattern exit waypoint or to the next waypoint of the flight plan.

5.1.4.4 Clearing a holding pattern

PRESS FPLN key to display the desired holding leg.

PRESS CLR key then SELECT the left Lsk next to the holding leg.

 THALES AVIONICS 2012

J61334BB - 00
Page 284
FMS220 - USER'S MANUAL
TABLE OF CONTENTS
T

5.1.5 OFFSET
This function allows the aircraft to fly parallel to the original flight plan by entering the value of the
parallel offset.

5.1.5.1 Offset insertion or modification

The insertion of an offset is possible on the LTRL REV page of the FROM waypoint.

PRESS FPLN key.

PRESS the Lsk beside the FROM waypoint

The LTRL REV page is displayed:

This document and any data included are the property of Thales Avionics. They cannot be reproduced, disclosed or utilized without the company’s prior written approval.

WRITE the desired offset value in the scratchpad.

The format of the entry must be a character which indicates left (negative offset) or right (positive
offset) followed by a number (ex : L15, L6, R1, R12).

PRESS the Lsk beside the OFFSET field.

The value is displayed in yellow font.

PRESS RETURN Lsk or FPLN key to display the temporary FPLN.

PRESS EXEC to activate it.

When an offset is entered, the offset indicator OFST, in reverse video, appears on the FPLN page
and on the ND, and the OFST annunciator is illuminated on the MCDU.

 THALES AVIONICS 2012

J61334BB - 00
 T FMS220 - USER'S MANUAL
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Page 285

COCKPIT: The flight plan is updated on the Navigation Display.

The signed offset value is also provided to be displayed on the
navigation display.

COCKPIT: An offset flag is provided to indicate on the primary

displays that an offset is applied on the leg that the A/C is
currentlty flying.

Note: If the secondary flight plan is initialized as a copy of the offseted active flight plan, then the
same offset is inserted in the secondary flight plan. Nevertheless, no offset can be inserted or deleted
in a secondary flight plan.

OFFSET REJECTED

Offset insertion is rejected with a RANGE ERROR message if offset value is not within the range [L20
This document and any data included are the property of Thales Avionics. They cannot be reproduced, disclosed or utilized without the company’s prior written approval.

; R20] NM.

Offset insertion is rejected with a NOT ALLOWED message in the following cases:

Active leg is neither a track to fix leg (TF leg) nor a course to fix leg (CF leg)

Active leg or next leg termination is the destination runway

Course change between active and next leg is more than 90°

Active leg is part of an approach procedure

Active leg is followed by a discontinuity

(A 45° intercept path does not rejoin offset leg 2N M before offset leg termination) and (the next leg
is the last offsetable leg of the flight plan or the offset is also considered as delayed on the next
leg (from the end of the active leg termination).

OFFSET DELAYED

At offset insertion, an OFFSET DELAYED message is displayed and offset will be activated at next
sequencing in the following case:

A 45° intercept path does not rejoin offset leg 2NM before offset leg termination and the next leg is
not the last offsetable leg and a 45° intercept path from the active leg terminatio n rejoins offset leg
2NM before next offset leg termination.

CAUTION: If a new offset is set when the current offset is delayed, the offset is cancelled
(see "OFFSET CANCELLED" part). The new offset has to be set again to be inserted.

 THALES AVIONICS 2012

J61334BB - 00
Page 286
FMS220 - USER'S MANUAL
TABLE OF CONTENTS
T

OFFSET CANCELLED

If one of the following cases applies (when flying the flight plan or upon flight plan revision):

Next leg is neither a track to fix leg (TF leg) nor a course to fix leg (CF leg),

Course change between active and next leg is more than 90°,

Next leg is part of an approach procedure,

Next leg termination is the destination runway

Then the offset is automatically cancelled and an OFFSET CANCELLED message is displayed when
A/C leaves the offset path to return to the original path.

Note: Return path is a 45° intercept and begins at 5NM+| OFFSET| of the leg termination when
interception is possible, if not, return path is a direct to path to next leg termination.

5.1.5.2 Offset deletion

This document and any data included are the property of Thales Avionics. They cannot be reproduced, disclosed or utilized without the company’s prior written approval.

PRESS the left Lsk next to the FROM waypoint to access to the LTRL REV page.

PRESS CLR key with an empty scratchpad or write L0 or R0 in the scratchpad.

PRESS OFFSET Lsk.

PRESS RETURN Lsk or FPLN key to display and CHECK the temporary FPLN.

PRESS EXEC to activate the temporary flight plan.

Note:
a) If a revision modifies the active leg (e.g. insertion of a holding pattern, DIRECT TO), offset is
automatically cancelled.

b) Once the offset is deleted, aircraft automatically returns to the original flight plan and the offset
indicator disappears from the FPLN page.

 THALES AVIONICS 2012

J61334BB - 00
 T FMS220 - USER'S MANUAL
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Page 287

5.1.6 DIRECT TO

5.1.6.1 Direct to waypoint

5.1.6.1.1 The "TO" WPT is in the FPLN

Example: DIR TO "JULEE".

PRESS DTO key.

PRESS the Lsk next to "JULEE"

This document and any data included are the property of Thales Avionics. They cannot be reproduced, disclosed or utilized without the company’s prior written approval.

PRESS EXEC key to confirm the DIRECT TO:

All legs and discontinuities prior to "JULEE" are deleted.

COCKPIT: The flight plan is updated on the Navigation Display.

 THALES AVIONICS 2012

J61334BB - 00
Page 288
FMS220 - USER'S MANUAL
TABLE OF CONTENTS
T

5.1.6.1.2 The "TO" WPT does not belong to the FPLN

Example: DIR TO "VENTA".

PRESS DTO key

 If the "TO" WPT is an airport, a navaid, or a waypoint belonging to the standard or the pilot
database:

ENTER on IDENT Lsk the identifier of the fix,

 If the "TO" WPT is a temporary waypoint:

ENTER its coordinates (latitude/longitude)

Example: N4512.03 / W00514.06

OR

This document and any data included are the property of Thales Avionics. They cannot be reproduced, disclosed or utilized without the company’s prior written approval.

ENTER its position relative to another fix (place/bearing/distance)

Example: AGN / 130 / 12

OR

ENTER its position defined by the intersection of 2 radials relative to 2

fixes (place/bearing/place/bearing)

Example: SAURG / 20 / TOU / 12.

 If the "TO" WPT is unknown:

PRESS IDENT Lsk with empty scratchpad to display the DATA LIST page
with filter “ALL”.

SELECT a fix

 THALES AVIONICS 2012

J61334BB - 00
 T FMS220 - USER'S MANUAL
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Page 289

PRESS EXEC key to confirm the DIRECT TO.

The selected waypoint becomes the TO waypoint and a discontinuity is inserted after this waypoint.

COCKPIT: The flight plan is updated on the Navigation Display.

This document and any data included are the property of Thales Avionics. They cannot be reproduced, disclosed or utilized without the company’s prior written approval.

5.1.6.1.3 The "TO" WPT is moving

The rally navigation mode consists in a "DIRECT-TO a moving waypoint” which goal is to follow a
“rally navigation” to guide the aircraft towards a rallying waypoint computed by the FMC.

Example: DIR TO "BISBI".

PRESS DTO key

PRESS the Lsk next to "BISBI".

A specific SPD VECTOR field is displayed in case of a moving waypoint and indicates the track and
speed of the moving waypoint.

Moving Rallying
Speed vector
WPT *WPT

DIR TO

A/C TAS

 THALES AVIONICS 2012

J61334BB - 00
Page 290
FMS220 - USER'S MANUAL
TABLE OF CONTENTS
T

PRESS EXEC to confirm the DIRECT TO.

In the Flight Plan page, the rallying waypoint is named with the ident of the moving waypoint to reach,
followed by an asterix. A discontinuity is inserted after the moving waypoint.

COCKPIT: The flight plan is updated on the Navigation Display.

This document and any data included are the property of Thales Avionics. They cannot be reproduced, disclosed or utilized without the company’s prior written approval.
5.1.6.2 Direct to closest airport

Example: DIR TO "MARG".

PRESS DTO key

PRESS ABEAM Lsk.

PRESS AIRPORTS Lsk.

The 20 nearest airports belonging to standard or pilot database are displayed in increasing distance
order.

 THALES AVIONICS 2012

J61334BB - 00
 T FMS220 - USER'S MANUAL
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Page 291

PRESS the Lsk next to "MARG":

PRESS EXEC key to confirm the DIRECT TO:

This document and any data included are the property of Thales Avionics. They cannot be reproduced, disclosed or utilized without the company’s prior written approval.

Note: Only airports within a radius of 240 NM of the aircraft position belong to the list of nearest
airports.

5.1.6.3 Direct to abeam point

Example: DIR TO "JULEE".

PRESS DTO key twice (or PRESS ABEAM Lsk from the DIRECT TO page)

 THALES AVIONICS 2012

J61334BB - 00
Page 292
FMS220 - USER'S MANUAL
TABLE OF CONTENTS
T

PRESS the Lsk next to "JULEE"

TMPY page is displayed with computed abeam points (here ABTANCA & ABBECHU):

PRESS EXEC key to validate and display the FPLN page.

This document and any data included are the property of Thales Avionics. They cannot be reproduced, disclosed or utilized without the company’s prior written approval.
COCKPIT: The flight plan is updated on the Navigation Display.

RESTRICTIONS

When performing a DIRECT TO ABEAM on a waypoint, the following actions are not allowed in the
TMPY page on all computed abeam points (including Direct To waypoint):

Lateral and vertical revision

Insertion and deletion of a waypoint

'Direct to' or 'Direct to abeam' operations

No abeam points are computed for the following elements:

Existing abeam points

Along Track Offset points

Lat/Lon crossing points

Moving waypoints

Non fix terminations (CA, CD, CI, FA, FD, FM, HA, VA, VD, VI, VM, VR) plus Procedure Turn (PI)
and holding pattern (HM and HF).

No abeam points are inserted in the flight plan in the following cases:

The abeam point is located at less than 2 NM from the previous abeam point.

The abeam point is upstream a previously created abeam point.

The abeam point is located in the curve transition or less than 0.5 NM from the end of the curve
transition.

 THALES AVIONICS 2012

J61334BB - 00
 T FMS220 - USER'S MANUAL
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Page 293

5.1.6.4 Direct to / Intercept

PRESS DTO key.

PRESS the Lsk next to "JULEE"

This document and any data included are the property of Thales Avionics. They cannot be reproduced, disclosed or utilized without the company’s prior written approval.

ENTER the desired INBOUND COURSE through the Lsk next to INBND CRS

ENTER the desired INTERCEPT DISTANCE through the Lsk next to INTCP DIST

Note: If no distance is entered, a FMS computed distance, which depends on TAS and altitude will
be used.

 THALES AVIONICS 2012

J61334BB - 00
Page 294
FMS220 - USER'S MANUAL
TABLE OF CONTENTS
T

ENTER the desired ALTITUDE CONSTRAINT through the Lsk next to ALT CNSTR
(if required)

PRESS EXEC key to validate and display the FPLN page.

The FMS inserts an intercept leg (Course to Fix) before the Direct To fix:

This document and any data included are the property of Thales Avionics. They cannot be reproduced, disclosed or utilized without the company’s prior written approval.
COCKPIT: The flight plan is updated on the Navigation Display.

5.1.7 MARK

5.1.7.1 Marking the present position

PRESS MRK key to mark the position, store it in the pilot database and display the
MARK page.

The present position is stored into newly created pilot waypoint. The new waypoint ident is the first
available MKxxx (MK001, MK002,…). The position and time (L for local, Z for UTC), at the
moment when the user pressed the MRK key, are displayed in the page.

PRESS DATA key to access to the DATA MENU page and perform a DATA SAVE to
keep the waypoint in memory after a power off

 THALES AVIONICS 2012

J61334BB - 00
 T FMS220 - USER'S MANUAL
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Page 295

5.1.7.2 Updating the position

PRESS MRK key, then the position is frozen and the MARK page is displayed.

The position of the updated position which has been overflown can be defined by an identifier of
the fix, a position or a position relative to a fix.

 Identifier:

ENTER the identifier in the scratchpad.

PRESS the Lsk next to UPD AT.

 Position:

ENTER the latitude / longitude in the scratchpad.

PRESS the Lsk next to LAT/LON.

This document and any data included are the property of Thales Avionics. They cannot be reproduced, disclosed or utilized without the company’s prior written approval.

 Position relative to a fix

ENTER the fix identifier / bearing / distance (from this point) in the
scratchpad.

PRESS the Lsk next to UPD AT / BRG / DIST.

Note: When UPD AT Lsk is pressed with empty scratchpad, the DATA LIST page is displayed with
filter “ALL”.

The position of updating point (LAT/LON) and the discrepancy (∆POS) from the update point to the
frozen position are displayed.

PRESS EXEC key to confirm the update.

CAUTION: It is recommended to check carefully the discrepancy between the frozen and
update position, because the update is irreversible.

 THALES AVIONICS 2012

J61334BB - 00
Page 296
FMS220 - USER'S MANUAL
TABLE OF CONTENTS
T

5.1.8 RNP INSERTION

PRESS PROG key

PRESS NEXT key to display the PROG 2/3 page.

ENTER the desired value in the scratchpad then PRESS the Lsk next to the field

This document and any data included are the property of Thales Avionics. They cannot be reproduced, disclosed or utilized without the company’s prior written approval.
RNP.

CAUTION: If the inserted value is larger than the computed value (default value or
database value if exists), an alert will be generated.

Note: If flight area is enroute or terminal, the range of the inserted value of RNP is between 0.2 NM
and 20 NM. If flight area is approach, the range of the inserted value is between 0.2 NM and 0.3 NM. If
the range is not respected, the entry is rejected and the message RANGE ERROR is displayed in the
scratchpad line. For PRNAV, enter RNP = 1 Nm.

The current RNP is computed by the FMC according to the used sensors, the flight area and the RNP
value provided by standard database (if defined).

For more details about the default values, refer to "OPERATIONAL PRINCIPLES / Definitions /
Required Navigation Performance (RNP)".

To cancel the RNP insertion, perform a CLEAR action on the RNP Lsk.

The deletion is effective for inserted RNP, and without effect otherwise. When the inserted RNP is
cleared, the value returns to its computed value (default value or database value).

 THALES AVIONICS 2012

J61334BB - 00
 T FMS220 - USER'S MANUAL
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Page 297

5.1.9 PREDICTIVE RAIM

5.1.9.1 Launching the RAIM prediction along the flight plan

PRESS START PREDICTION Lsk on PRAIM 2/2 page.

CAUTION: This action is only allowed if A/C is on ground and the selected flight plan
(active or secondary) is not empty or if the selected flight plan duration is less than 23H55.
Otherwise the message NOT ALLOWED appears in the scratchpad line.

The scratchpad line displays the PRESS EXEC TO CONFIRM message.

PRESS EXEC key to start prediction.

Note: The user can clear the message without confirming by pressing any other key than EXEC.

The FMC is requesting to the GPS the RAIM prediction along the flight plan. During the process, a
This document and any data included are the property of Thales Avionics. They cannot be reproduced, disclosed or utilized without the company’s prior written approval.

progression status is displayed.

Note: During the computation, ACT/SEC selection, Criterion selection, T/O TIME insertion and
deselected satellite insertion or deletion are not allowed.

 THALES AVIONICS 2012

J61334BB - 00
Page 298
FMS220 - USER'S MANUAL
TABLE OF CONTENTS
T

Once the prediction computation is complete, “RESULT OK” is displayed if the computation data is
compliant with the selected prediction criterion. As soon as a predicted data is not compliant with the
selected prediction criterion, “RESULT FAIL” is displayed even if the computation is still in progress.
The prediction computation is still going on unless it is cancelled.

PRAIM OK PRAIM KO

 Once the prediction computation is complete

This document and any data included are the property of Thales Avionics. They cannot be reproduced, disclosed or utilized without the company’s prior written approval.
 If RESULT FAIL:

PRESS the Lsk next to the <RESULT prompt to access to the RESULT
page and get detailed results.

Note: The last computed RESULT (OK/FAIL) remains displayed until a new prediction is started.

CAUTION: During the process, any modification that may occur on the computed flight
plan (active or secondary) is not taking into account for the prediction in progress. So, the
pilot has to cancel the process in progress and start a new prediction after flight plan
modification.

 THALES AVIONICS 2012

J61334BB - 00
 T FMS220 - USER'S MANUAL
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Page 299

5.1.9.2 Canceling the predictive RAIM computation

PRESS CANCEL PREDICTION Lsk on PRAIM 2/2 page.

The scratchpad line displays the PRESS EXEC TO CONFIRM message.

PRESS EXEC key to confirm the prediction canceling.

This document and any data included are the property of Thales Avionics. They cannot be reproduced, disclosed or utilized without the company’s prior written approval.

Note: The computation is automatically cancelled when the A/C is no more on GROUND.

5.2 VERTICAL FUNCTIONS

5.2.1 MONITORING THE VERTICAL GUIDANCE

Refer to the "FLIGHT PHASE RELATED PROCEDURES" to monitor the vertical guidance.

 THALES AVIONICS 2012

J61334BB - 00
Page 300
FMS220 - USER'S MANUAL
TABLE OF CONTENTS
T

5.2.2 RTA INSERTION OR MODIFICATION

The insertion/modification of a RTA is possible on the VERT REV page of a flight plan waypoint.

PRESS FPLN key.

PRESS the right Lsk beside the desired waypoint

The VERT REV page is displayed.

ENTER the desired RTA value in the scratchpad.

The insertion format must be:

− AXXXXXX for “AT or AFTER” required time of arrival.
− BXXXXXX for “AT or BEFORE” required time of arrival.
− XXXXXX for “AT” required time of arrival.

PRESS the Lsk beside the RTA field.

The RTA value appears in that field. the ETA field displays the error between specified RTA and

This document and any data included are the property of Thales Avionics. They cannot be reproduced, disclosed or utilized without the company’s prior written approval.
computed ETA for the waypoint, in large amber font if the RTA is declared missed, in large green
font otherwise.

 THALES AVIONICS 2012

J61334BB - 00
 T FMS220 - USER'S MANUAL
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Page 301

Note:
a) The RTA value is limited to local time + 24H00.

b) Only one RTA can be defined for a flight plan. If a RTA already exists in the flight plan, the
following message is displayed in reverse video in the scratchpad line:
DELETE OTHER RTA ?

c) No RTA can be defined on a moving waypoint.

PRESS EXEC key to insert the RTA constraint in the flight plan and display the
FPLN page.

If a RTA is entered on a waypoint, the ETA (resp. ETE) of the corresponding leg is underlined on
FPLN and PROG 1/3 pages.

If RTA is respected, the ETA (resp. ETE) is displayed in green (or yellow for temporary flight plan)
otherwise it is displayed in amber.

Note: If the RTA on a waypoint is or becomes missed, the following message is displayed in the
This document and any data included are the property of Thales Avionics. They cannot be reproduced, disclosed or utilized without the company’s prior written approval.

scratchpad line:

RTA MISSED

 THALES AVIONICS 2012

J61334BB - 00
Page 302
FMS220 - USER'S MANUAL
TABLE OF CONTENTS
T

5.2.3 CONSTRAINT INSERTION OR MODIFICATION

PRESS FPLN key.

PRESS the right Lsk beside the desired waypoint

The VERT REV page is displayed.

ENTER the desired Altitude constraint value in the scratchpad.

The insertion format must be: (HHHHH represents the value of the altitude constraint)
− HHHHHA for “AT or ABOVE” altitude constraint.
− HHHHHB for “AT or BELOW” altitude constraint.
− HHHHH for “AT” altitude constraint.

PRESS the Lsk beside the ALT CNSTR field.

The entered value is displayed in that field.

ENTER the desired Flight Path Angle (FPA) in the scratchpad.

This document and any data included are the property of Thales Avionics. They cannot be reproduced, disclosed or utilized without the company’s prior written approval.
The allowed range of the entered value is [1°; 9°].

PRESS the Lsk beside the FPA field.

The entered value is displayed in that field.

ENTER the desired speed constraint value (IAS) in the scratchpad.

PRESS the Lsk beside the SPD CNSTR field.

The entered value is displayed in that field.

PRESS EXEC key to insert the constraint in the flight plan and access to the FPLN
page.

If the altitude constraint is inserted while the temperature compensation is selected (refer to
"PILOT INTERFACE / MCDU pages description / PROGRESS / VNAV page 2/2 page"), as the
value of the altitude is compensated the value of ALT CNSTR is not updated with the temperature
compensation and the char "c" is added before the first character of the altitude displayed. If the
temperature compensation is becoming deselected (rare operational case), the value of ALT
CNSTR is not updated without the temperature compensation and the char "c" is erased.

 THALES AVIONICS 2012

J61334BB - 00
 T FMS220 - USER'S MANUAL
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Page 303

Ex: "c3000" is displayed after the altitude constraint insertion and "3000" after the deselection of
the temperature compensation.

The user can delete the altitude constraint (respectively speed constraint) by performing a CLEAR
action on the ALT CNSTR Lsk (respectively SPD CNSTR Lsk.).

CAUTION: If the altitude constraint of a leg in altitude termination is modified, the altitude
constraint is updated and the altitude leg termination is kept, as defined in the database.

5.2.4 VERTICAL WIND PROFILE MODIFICATION

PRESS FPLN key (one or two times) to display the desired flight plan page (active
or secondary).

PRESS the right Lsk beside the desired waypoint: the VERT REV page is
displayed.
This document and any data included are the property of Thales Avionics. They cannot be reproduced, disclosed or utilized without the company’s prior written approval.

PRESS WIND Lsk to display WIND page.

 THALES AVIONICS 2012

J61334BB - 00
Page 304
FMS220 - USER'S MANUAL
TABLE OF CONTENTS
T

Note:
a) TRUE WIND / ALT is displayed in large font when the vertical wind profile is defined at the
revised waypoint.

b) TRUE WIND / ALT is displayed in small font when the vertical wind profile is propagated.

ENTER a wind group value in the scratchpad (wind origin/wind speed/wind

altitude)

PRESS the Lsk beside an existing group to modify it.

This document and any data included are the property of Thales Avionics. They cannot be reproduced, disclosed or utilized without the company’s prior written approval.

To delete a wind group, perform a CLEAR action on the desired wind group Lsk.

Note:

c) When deleting the last wind group of a wind profile, the wind profile is filled with upstream or
downstream wind profile according to propagation rules.

d) last wind group of a propagated wind profile can not be deleted

PRESS EXEC key to validate the modified vertical wind profile and display the
FPLN page.

 THALES AVIONICS 2012

J61334BB - 00
 T FMS220 - USER'S MANUAL
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Page 305

5.3 OTHER FUNCTIONS

5.3.1 RADIO NAVIGATION

This function enables to activate navigation frequencies autotuning and to display radio navigation raw
data used by the localisation function.

5.3.1.1 Navaid Manual Tuning

Navaids can be manually tuned via the MCDU by pressing the corresponding Lsk.

When NAV1 (resp. NAV2) Lsk is pressed, the NAV1 (resp. NAV2) TUNE page is displayed with the
nearest VHF navaids.

The selection of a navaid sends a manual tuning command with the frequency of the selected navaid
and the display reverts to NAV FRQ page.
This document and any data included are the property of Thales Avionics. They cannot be reproduced, disclosed or utilized without the company’s prior written approval.

On NAV FRQ page, SELECT NAV1 (resp. NAV2), NAV1 (resp. NAV2) TUNE page is
displayed,

On NAV1 TUNE page (resp. NAV2 TUNE page), SELECT an ident to perform a
manual tuning.

5.3.1.2 Navaid Autotuning

PRESS DATA key then NAV FREQ Lsk.

 THALES AVIONICS 2012

J61334BB - 00
Page 306
FMS220 - USER'S MANUAL
TABLE OF CONTENTS
T

 If AUTO is displayed in large green font for the desired navaid, autotuning is already in
progress.

 If AUTO is displayed in small cyan font for the desired navaid:

PRESS AUTO/MAN < to engage the autotuning mode

AUTO is displayed in large green font for the desired navaid.

WAIT few seconds then CHECK that AUTO is still displayed in large green
font.

Note: If a radio is selected as a nav source at cockpit level, the FMS selects automatically the MAN
mode and the AUTO mode is forbidden. An attempt to select AUTO displays the following message in
the scratchpad line:

NOT ALLOWED

5.3.1.3 Deselecting navaids

This document and any data included are the property of Thales Avionics. They cannot be reproduced, disclosed or utilized without the company’s prior written approval.
Refer to "FLIGHT PHASE RELATED PROCEDURES / Other functions / Radio Navigation /
Deselecting navaids".

5.3.1.4 Reselecting navaids

Refer to "FLIGHT PHASE RELATED PROCEDURES / Other functions / Radio Navigation /

Reselecting navaids".

 THALES AVIONICS 2012

J61334BB - 00
 T FMS220 - USER'S MANUAL
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Page 307

5.3.2 DATABASE OPERATION

5.3.2.1 Creation, modification, deletion, rename of pilot data

PRESS DATA key.

PRESS DATABASE Lsk.

PRESS AIRPORT> / NAVAID> / WAYPOINT> Lsk.

The PILOT DATA page corresponding to the chosen type is displayed with the list of the data
identifier and the number of remaining slots.
This document and any data included are the property of Thales Avionics. They cannot be reproduced, disclosed or utilized without the company’s prior written approval.

 THALES AVIONICS 2012

J61334BB - 00
Page 308
FMS220 - USER'S MANUAL
TABLE OF CONTENTS
T

To consult, modify or rename a data, PRESS the Lsk near the desired identifier.

The corresponding PLT APT / PLT NAVAID / PLT WPT page is displayed, and its content can be
modified.

Note:
a) If the data is used in the active, temporary or secondary flight plan, the modification or deletion
is impossible. The symbol used appears in reverse video in the associated page (respectively
PLT APT / PLT NAVAID / PLT WPT - see examples below).

b) If the data is used in a route, its deletion is impossible. The symbol USED appears in the
associated page (respectively PLT APT / PLT NAVAID / PLT WPT)

From PLT APT / PLT NAVAID / PLT WPT page, PRESS PREV / NEXT key to access
to the previous/next pilot data.

 To create a new data:

From PILOT DATA page, PRESS NEW Lsk, or from PLT APT / PLT NAVAID

This document and any data included are the property of Thales Avionics. They cannot be reproduced, disclosed or utilized without the company’s prior written approval.
/ PLT WPT page INSERT a new identifier.

FILL IN the displayed page.

 To delete a data:

From PILOT DATA or PLT APT / PLT NAVAID / PLT WPT page, PERFORM
a CLEAR action on the identifier.

PRESS EXEC key to confirm

 To rename a data:

From PLT APT / PLT WPT / PLT NAVAID page, ENTER the new name
preceded by “-“ in the IDENT field.

Note:
a) It is forbidden to create two data with the same type and the same identifier. In this case, the
following message is displayed in the scratchpad line:
IDENT ALREADY USED

b) After modifications, in order to recover the same pilot data after a power off, the DTA alert is
triggered to perform a save of data.

 THALES AVIONICS 2012

J61334BB - 00
 T FMS220 - USER'S MANUAL
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Page 309

5.3.2.2 Pilot route creation

PRESS successively DATA key, DATABASE Lsk and ROUTE> Lsk to display the
PILOT DATA page (ROUTE).

PRESS NEW Lsk.

This document and any data included are the property of Thales Avionics. They cannot be reproduced, disclosed or utilized without the company’s prior written approval.

ENTER the route identifier on IDENT Lsk.

Note: The insertion of the departure and arrival airport of the Standard or Pilot database is optional.

INSERT fixes, airways, departure and arrival procedures as described in the

previous paragraph.

Note: To create a route as a copy of another route, display this route (PLT ROUTE page) then enter
the new name preceded by "+" in the IDENT field.

Example: Example of pilot route construction: ROUTE1 from LFBO (AFRI5A) to LFLL
(ARBON/I18L) via FILOU, UN260/ECHO and BECHU.

ENTER "ROUTE1" in the scratchpad then PRESS the IDENT field on Lsk L1

ENTER "BECHU" waypoint in the scratchpad then PRESS the Lsk L2

 THALES AVIONICS 2012

J61334BB - 00
Page 310
FMS220 - USER'S MANUAL
TABLE OF CONTENTS
T

ENTER "FILOU" in the scratchpad then PRESS the Lsk L2

ENTER "LFBO/LFLL" in the scratchpad then PRESS the Lsk R1

ENTER "UN260/ECHO” in the scratchpad then PRESS the Lsk L4

This document and any data included are the property of Thales Avionics. They cannot be reproduced, disclosed or utilized without the company’s prior written approval.

 THALES AVIONICS 2012

J61334BB - 00
 T FMS220 - USER'S MANUAL
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Page 311

PRESS the Lsk L2 to display the DEPARTURE page.

PRESS the relevant Lsk to select the runway.

PRESS the relevant Lsk to select the SID "AFRI5A"

PRESS the < RETURN Lsk to return to the PLT ROUTE page.

PRESS the Lsk R4 to display the ARRIVAL page.

PRESS the relevant Lsk to select the runway "ILS18L".

PRESS the relevant Lsk to select the VIA "ARBON"

PRESS the < RETURN Lsk to return to the PLT ROUTE page.
This document and any data included are the property of Thales Avionics. They cannot be reproduced, disclosed or utilized without the company’s prior written approval.

After the route creation, in order to recover the same pilot route after a power off, the DTA alert is
triggered to perform a save of data.

PRESS RETURN Lsk twice to return to the DATA page then PRESS SAVE Lsk.

CAUTION: All created or modified Pilot Route shall be checked carefully by the pilot
directly on MCDU before use.

 THALES AVIONICS 2012

J61334BB - 00
Page 312
FMS220 - USER'S MANUAL
TABLE OF CONTENTS
T

5.3.2.3 Pilot route modification

PRESS DATA key.

PRESS DATABASE Lsk.

PRESS ROUTE> Lsk.

The PILOT DATA page (ROUTE) is displayed with the list of the route identifiers and their optional
departure and arrival airports.

This document and any data included are the property of Thales Avionics. They cannot be reproduced, disclosed or utilized without the company’s prior written approval.
Note: If a route contains fixes, airways or procedures that are no more in the Standard Database,
the route identifier is displayed in amber.

PRESS PREV / NEXT key to access to the previous/next routes identifiers, by

circular permutation.

INSERT characters in the scratchpad line to only display the routes which
identifiers begin with these characters. The whole list is displayed when the
scratchpad is empty.

To erase a route, PRESS CLR key, then PRESS the Lsk beside the desired route
identifier, and PRESS EXEC key to confirm this deletion.

To rename a route, PRESS the Lsk beside the desired route identifier to display the
PILOT DATA page (ROUTE) then ENTER the new name preceded by "-" in the IDENT
field.

PRESS CO-ROUTE Lsk to access to the STD DATA page (CO-ROUTE) (refer to
"MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES / Company routes maintenance").

Note: After renaming or erasing, in order to recover the same pilot data after a power off, the DTA
alert is triggered to save the modified data.

 THALES AVIONICS 2012

J61334BB - 00
 T FMS220 - USER'S MANUAL
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Page 313

5.3.2.4 Saving data

PRESS DATA key.

PRESS SAVE Lsk to save the user data (pilot and company databases) and the
secondary flight plan.

During saving, the following message is displayed in reverse video in the scratchpad line:
XFER DATA IN PROGRESS
This document and any data included are the property of Thales Avionics. They cannot be reproduced, disclosed or utilized without the company’s prior written approval.

Note: If the compact flash is missing, the save function is degraded.

If for some reasons the data save fails (missing or damaged compact flash...), the following message
is displayed in the scratchpad line:

XFER FAIL

5.3.2.5 Standard database selection

The FMS allows to manage up to two standard databases (typically two AIRAC cycles). Only one
database is selected at a same time (called used database). The crew has the capability to select the
other one (called additional database).

Note: Standard database selection is only possible on ground.

PRESS DATA key.

PRESS NAV DATA Lsk.

 THALES AVIONICS 2012

J61334BB - 00
Page 314
FMS220 - USER'S MANUAL
TABLE OF CONTENTS
T

PRESS STD DATA Lsk to pre-select the additional standard database.

PRESS EXEC key to confirm the selection (or PRESS any other key to cancel and
clear the message).

During the load, the message XFER DATA IN PROGRESS appears in the scratchpad line. Once
finished, the former additional standard database becomes the used standard database.

This document and any data included are the property of Thales Avionics. They cannot be reproduced, disclosed or utilized without the company’s prior written approval.
CAUTION: In dual mode, after the additional database selection, check that the selected
database is the same on both FMS. In case of a short power interruption during swapping,
after the power up the databases selected may be different. If the selected databases are
different, restart the FMC to get the same used database.

 THALES AVIONICS 2012

J61334BB - 00
 T FMS220 - USER'S MANUAL
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Page 315

Note: After selection, FMC performs the following tests:

a) Integrity test of navigation database. In case a FMC detects that its database is corrupted, it
raises a "cross talk data discrepancy alert" (CTK) and switches in independent mode. The
other FMC will detect the loss of communication and will raise the "cross talk failure no
communication FMS1/2" (CTK) alert and also switches in independent mode.

b) Consistency test of navigation database. Refer to"FLIGHT PHASE RELATED PROCEDURE /

Preflight / FMS Initialization / Checking navigation database" for consistency test details.

Note: Standard database selection has the following consequences:

a) Active and temporary FPLN are cancelled.

b) Secondary FPLN is cancelled. It can possibly be replaced by the secondary FPLN in Compact
Flash if this one is consistent with the uploaded standard database.

c) Nearest navaids and nearest airports lists are updated.

When the two FMC has not the same used standard database, CTK alert is raised and the FMC
remains in independent mode.
This document and any data included are the property of Thales Avionics. They cannot be reproduced, disclosed or utilized without the company’s prior written approval.

In case the two FMC has common additional standard database, select it on one FMC and restart the
other FMC to retrieve the two FMC in dual mode.

In case one FMC has its additional standard database common with the used standard database of
the other FMC, restart the FMC to retrieve the two FMC in dual mode.

 THALES AVIONICS 2012

J61334BB - 00
Page 316
FMS220 - USER'S MANUAL
TABLE OF CONTENTS
T

6 ABNORMAL PROCEDURES

6.1 FAILURES

6.1.1 LIST OF MESSAGE CODES

The following table lists the FMS alerts in decreasing priority. Clear means the alert can be cleared,
mask means the alert can be masked and then can be unmasked by a MSG RECALL command. The
delay represents the time between cause coming and the alert triggering.

TYPE OF MASK CLEAR DELAY CAUSE, ALERT DESCRIPTION

ALERT (Y/N) (Y/N)

CFG Y - - FM Conf DB / A/C type inconsistency

This document and any data included are the property of Thales Avionics. They cannot be reproduced, disclosed or utilized without the company’s prior written approval.
Y - - PerfDB / A/C type inconsistency
Y - - (RAM) Current FM Conf DB discrepancy
Y - - (resident) Configuration databases
discrepancy (Magvar DB, Perf DB, FM
Conf DB)
WGT - Y - Active weight updated with secondary
flight plan parameters
CTK Y - - Cross talk failure (no communication
FMS1/2 or application SW discrepancy)
Y - - Cross talk data discrepancy (used
Standard DB)
Y - - Cross talk init
Y - - Cross talk init request (transmitter)
- Y - Rejected command
Y - - Cross talk data discrepancy (additional
Standard DB)
Y - - Cross talk data discrepancy (Company
DB)
INI - - - Initial position invalid on ground
AIR Y - 5s ZBC invalid
Y - 5s CAS invalid
Y - 5s TAT invalid
HDG - - 5s Heading failure
POS - - 5s Selected position invalid
- - 5s Reinit BCP
Y - 5s Position discrepancy
FAL Y - - EFOB on destination lower than reserve
Y - - EFOB on rerouting point lower than
reserve

 THALES AVIONICS 2012

J61334BB - 00
 T FMS220 - USER'S MANUAL
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Page 317

TYPE OF MASK CLEAR DELAY CAUSE, ALERT DESCRIPTION

ALERT (Y/N) (Y/N)

- Y - Non Return Point alert

FFF - - 30 s Flowmeter 1 failure
- - 30 s Flowmeter 2 failure
DTA Y - - Save data request
VAR Y - - Variation discrepancy
(inserted/computed)
FPL Y - - IFR flight plan discontinuity
GPS Y - 5s GPS status fault
Y - 5s GPS navigation fault
LAB Y - - Fuel unit failure
R/N Y - 8s Radionavigation EPE invalid or greater
than RNP
- Y - Radionavigation autotuning failure
This document and any data included are the property of Thales Avionics. They cannot be reproduced, disclosed or utilized without the company’s prior written approval.

AIM Y - 30 s GPS position invalid in enroute area

Y - 10 s GPS position invalid in terminal area
Y - 10 s GPS position invalid in approach area
(before FAF)
Y - 10 s GPS data degraded in approach area
(after FAF)
Y - 300 s GPS position invalid in approach area
(after FAF)
Y - - HIL at FAF or MAP is invalid
HIL Y - 20 s GPS fault detection or GPS position out
of range, in enroute area
Y - - GPS fault detection or GPS position out
of range, in terminal area
Y - - GPS fault detection or GPS position out
of range, in approach area
APP Y - - Approach condition not met (guidance
condition)
Y - - Approach condition not met (GPS or
radio conditions)
RNP Y - - Navigation accuracy degraded
Y - - RNP RNAV type inconsistent
with the current airspace
Y - - Navigation integrity degraded during
RNP APCH
FMS Y - 5s Bite function failure FMC
ISA Y - - Cold Temperature compensation
recommended

 THALES AVIONICS 2012

J61334BB - 00
Page 318
FMS220 - USER'S MANUAL
TABLE OF CONTENTS
T

COCKPIT: A flag is provided to allow displaying an alert on the

cockpit displays when at least one FMS alert is raised on MCDU.

6.1.2 MEANING OF ALERT MESSAGES

Hereafter are described in alphabetic order, the list of the alerts defined with their code, text, meanings
and the possible actions.

6.1.2.1 AIM

NO GPS RAIM
Explanation:

GPS HIL is invalid in enroute, terminal or approach flight area before FAF or GPS HIL is
invalid & GPS HDOP is degraded or invalid, in approach area after FAF or GPS HIL is
invalid & GPS HDOP is valid, in approach area after FAF.
Possible actions:

This document and any data included are the property of Thales Avionics. They cannot be reproduced, disclosed or utilized without the company’s prior written approval.

PRESS CHECK Lsk to display the GPS NAV page.

PRESS CLEAR Lsk to mask the alert.

GPS PRAIM NOT VALID

AT FAF OR MAP
Explanation:

Predicted HIL at FAF or MAP is invalid or degraded

Possible actions:

PRESS CHECK Lsk to display the PRAIM 1/2 page.

PRESS CLEAR Lsk to mask the alert.

6.1.2.2 AIR

AIR DATA FAILURE

INSERT BACKUP PARAMETERS
Explanation:

The Indicated Air Speed, or Barometric Corrected altitude, or Total Air Temperature is
invalid.

 THALES AVIONICS 2012

J61334BB - 00
 T FMS220 - USER'S MANUAL
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Page 319

Possible actions:

PRESS INSERT Lsk to display the AIR/RA page. Enter the Indicated Air
Speed (IAS), Barometric Corrected altitude (ZC), and Total Air
Temperature (TAT).

PRESS CLEAR Lsk to mask the alert

6.1.2.3 APP

APPROACH NOT ENABLE

CHECK TKE OR XTK
Explanation:

The TKE or XTK approach condition is not met.

Possible actions:

PRESS CHECK Lsk to display the PROG 2/3 page. CHECK the values of
This document and any data included are the property of Thales Avionics. They cannot be reproduced, disclosed or utilized without the company’s prior written approval.

TKE and XTK.

PRESS CLEAR Lsk to mask the alert.

APPROACH NOT ENABLE

CHECK POS EPE OR GPS HIL
Explanation:

The GPS or radionav approach condition is not met. Refer to "Entering the approach flight
area" paragraph in "FLIGHT PHASE RELATED PROCEDURES / Descent" chapter.
Possible actions:

When GPS is used in A/C position computation, CHECK the values of GPS
HIL. Current HIL is available in GPS NAV page whereas destination HIL is
available in PRAIM page (FAF and MAP HIL can be requested in this
page).

When radionav is used in A/C position computation, CHECK the value of

EPE (BCP NAV page) and radionav status (NAV FRQ page).

PRESS CHECK Lsk to display the PROG 3/3 page.

PRESS CLEAR Lsk to mask the alert.

6.1.2.4 CFG

CONF A/C TYPE

INCONSISTENCY
Explanation:

A/C type from system configuration is inconsistent with Input A/C type

 THALES AVIONICS 2012

J61334BB - 00
Page 320
FMS220 - USER'S MANUAL
TABLE OF CONTENTS
T

Possible action:

PRESS CLEAR Lsk to clear the alert.

PERFDB A/C TYPE

INCONSISTENCY
Explanation:

A/C type from performances database is inconsistent with Input A/C type
Possible action:

PRESS CLEAR Lsk to clear the alert.

CURRENT FM CONF DATA

DISCREPANCY

This document and any data included are the property of Thales Avionics. They cannot be reproduced, disclosed or utilized without the company’s prior written approval.
Explanation:

A Configuration data dicrepancy has been found between the two FMS
Each FMC remains then in independent mode.
Possible action:

PRESS CLEAR Lsk to clear the alert.

CONF DATA DISCREPANCY

Explanation:

A Magnetic variation model discrepancy has been found between the two FMS
A software application discrepancy has been found between the two FMS
Each FMC remains then in independent mode.
Possible action:

PRESS CHECK Lsk to display the CONF DATA page.

PRESS CLEAR Lsk to clear the alert.

6.1.2.5 CMD

CROSS TALK
COMMAND REJECT
Explanation:

The opposite FMC has rejected the command transmitted by the own side FMC.

 THALES AVIONICS 2012

J61334BB - 00
 T FMS220 - USER'S MANUAL
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Page 321

Possible actions:

PRESS CLEAR Lsk to clear this alert.

6.1.2.6 CTK

CROSS TALK FAILURE

NO COMMUNICATION FMS1/2
Explanation:

Two causes are possible:

− There is no activity on CROSS TALK bus, for more than 15s. In this case, on page PROG
3/3 the position discrepancy between the two FMC is invalid.
− The software version is different between the two FMC.
The CROSS TALK communication is stopped; each FMC remains then in independent
mode.
Possible actions:
This document and any data included are the property of Thales Avionics. They cannot be reproduced, disclosed or utilized without the company’s prior written approval.

If only one IAD side is powered on, POWER ON the other IAD side.

Use CTK INIT command in FMS BITE page to resynchronize the FMC (refer
to "Performing FMS resynchronization" paragraph in "ABNORMAL
PROCEDURES / Operational Checking" chapter)

RESTART the two IAD.

PERFORM maintenance actions: UPLOAD the FMC software and CHECK

the ARINC bus.

PRESS CLEAR Lsk to mask the alert.

USED STANDARD
DATABASE DISCREPANCY
Explanation:

The two FMC do not have the same used standard database in their compact flash memory
or the database or compact flash is damaged (on one side or both sides).

CAUTION: While this standard database discrepancy exists, the two FMC remains in
independent mode.

Possible actions:

PRESS CHECK Lsk to display the NAV DATA page.

CHECK on FMS BITE page if compact flash is damaged on standard

database.

PRESS CLEAR Lsk to mask the alert.

 THALES AVIONICS 2012

J61334BB - 00
Page 322
FMS220 - USER'S MANUAL
TABLE OF CONTENTS
T

CROSS TALK INIT

CONFIRM ON THE OTHER FMS
Explanation:

The power on has occurred in flight. Each FMC remains then in independent mode until the
CROSS TALK INIT confirmation.
Possible actions:

CONFIRM the transfer on the other FMC.

PRESS CLEAR Lsk to mask the alert.

CROSS TALK INIT

PRESS CTK TO CONFIRM
Explanation:

This document and any data included are the property of Thales Avionics. They cannot be reproduced, disclosed or utilized without the company’s prior written approval.
The power on has occurred in flight. Each FMC remains then in independent mode until the
confirmation.
Possible actions:

PRESS CTK Lsk to confirm the CROSS TALK INIT on the FMS.

The CROSS TALK INITIALIZATION process locks the keyboard of the MCDU, except
BRT/DIM and MENU key during up to 2 min.

PRESS CLEAR Lsk to mask the alert.

Note: This command is different from the command CTK INIT (Lsk L5) that may be possible on
inactive FMC (refer to "PILOT INTERFACE / MCDU pages description / STATUS / FMS BITE page"):
In this case, the CTK INIT makes a long power interruption of the inactive FMC.

ADDITIONAL STANDARD
DATABASE DISCREPANCY
Explanation:

The two FMC do not have the same additional standard database in their compact flash
memory.

CAUTION: While this standard database discrepancy exists, the two FMC remains in
independent mode.

Possible actions:

PRESS CHECK Lsk to display the NAV DATA page.

PRESS CLEAR Lsk to mask the alert.

 THALES AVIONICS 2012

J61334BB - 00
 T FMS220 - USER'S MANUAL
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Page 323

COMPANY DATABASE
DISCREPANCY
Explanation:

The two FMC do not have the same company database in their compact flash memory.

CAUTION: While this company database discrepancy exists, the two FMC remains in
independent mode.

Possible actions:

PRESS CHECK Lsk to display the NAV DATA page.

PRESS CLEAR Lsk to mask the alert.

6.1.2.7 DTA
This document and any data included are the property of Thales Avionics. They cannot be reproduced, disclosed or utilized without the company’s prior written approval.

NAV DATA MODIFIED

SAVE DATA
Explanation:

Two causes are possible:

− Data in Pilot Database, Company Database or secondary flight plan has been modified but
not saved in Compact Flash. Those modifications will be lost after the power off.
− Data discrepancy in Pilot Database or secondary flight plan exists between the Compact
flash content of each side but no data harmonization was performed.
Note: Only modifications of secondary flight plan made on ground raises the DTA alert.

Possible actions:

PRESS SAVE Lsk to display the DATA MENU page.

PRESS SAVE Lsk to perform a DATA SAVE.

PRESS CLEAR Lsk to mask the alert.

6.1.2.8 FAL

DESTINATION FUEL LESS

THAN RESERVE
Explanation:

The Estimated Fuel On Board, EFOB, at the destination, or the EFOB on the rerouting point
is lower than the reserve.

 THALES AVIONICS 2012

J61334BB - 00
Page 324
FMS220 - USER'S MANUAL
TABLE OF CONTENTS
T

Possible actions:

PRESS CHECK Lsk to display the CRZ PERF page.

PRESS CLEAR Lsk to mask the alert.

NRP ALERT
Explanation:

The Non Return Point will be reached within 1 minute.

Possible actions:

PRESS CHECK Lsk to display the PROG 1/3 page.

PRESS CLEAR Lsk to mask the alert.

This document and any data included are the property of Thales Avionics. They cannot be reproduced, disclosed or utilized without the company’s prior written approval.
6.1.2.9 FFF

FUEL FLOW FAILURE

INSERT BACKUP PARAMETERS
Explanation:

One or more of the fuel flow values is invalid.

Possible actions:

PRESS INSERT Lsk to display the FUEL FLOW page. ENTER the
corresponding value.

6.1.2.10 FMS

FMS BITE FAILURE

Explanation:

An error in the internal test of the FMS, or MCDU is detected.

Possible actions:

PRESS CHECK Lsk to display the FMS BITE page.

FIND the status set to 1, and report to "Operational Checking" paragraph.

PRESS CLEAR Lsk to mask the alert.

 THALES AVIONICS 2012

J61334BB - 00
 T FMS220 - USER'S MANUAL
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Page 325

6.1.2.11 FPL

FPLN DISCONTINUITY
OR END OF ROUTE
Explanation:

When a flight plan is engaged and the FMS is coupled to the autopilot, a flight plan
discontinuity or the end of the flight plan (different from the destination) will be reached
within 1 minute.
Possible actions:

PRESS CHECK Lsk to display the FPLN page.

PRESS CLEAR Lsk to mask the alert.

6.1.2.12 GPS

GPS FAILURE
This document and any data included are the property of Thales Avionics. They cannot be reproduced, disclosed or utilized without the company’s prior written approval.

CHECK GPS STATUS

Explanation:

At least one parameter/status coming from the GPS is invalid/fault.

Possible actions:

PRESS CHECK Lsk to display the SENSOR STS page. CHECK the status
and mode of the GPS.

PRESS CLEAR Lsk to mask the alert.

6.1.2.13 HDG

HEADING INPUT NOT VALID

INSERT NAV HEADING
Explanation:

The navigation heading provided by the IRS is invalid.

Possible action:

PRESS INSERT Lsk to display the hdg/att page.

ENTER the heading of navigation in the selected reference (MAG or

TRUE).

6.1.2.14 HIL

GPS HORIZONTAL
INTEGRITY ALERT
Explanation:

The GPS fault detection status is raised.

 THALES AVIONICS 2012

J61334BB - 00
Page 326
FMS220 - USER'S MANUAL
TABLE OF CONTENTS
T

The Horizontal Integrity Limit, HIL of the GPS is greater than:

− 0.3 NM in APPROACH flight area.
− 1 NM in TERMINAL flight area.
− 2 NM in ENROUTE flight area.
Possible actions:

PRESS CHECK Lsk to display the GPS NAV page.

CHECK the HIL value.

PRESS CLEAR Lsk to mask the alert.

6.1.2.15 INI

CHECK INITIAL POSITION

AND INIT SENSORS
Explanation:

This document and any data included are the property of Thales Avionics. They cannot be reproduced, disclosed or utilized without the company’s prior written approval.
The initial position is invalid.
Possible action:

PRESS CHECK Lsk to display the POS INIT page.

CHECK the initial position and PERFORM the SENSORS initialization.

6.1.2.16 ISA

TEMP COMPENSATION
RECOMMENDED
Explanation:

If the temperature compensation is inactive and destination TDEV is valid and less than -
15°C or destination TDEV is invalid and current TDE V is valid and less than -15°C.
Possible actions:

PRESS CHECK Lsk to display the VNAV 2/2 page.

PRESS TEMP COMP > to activate the cold temperature compensation.

PRESS CLEAR Lsk to mask the alert.

6.1.2.17 LAB

LABEL ERROR
CHECK WEIGHT UNIT
Explanation:

The fuel unit is invalid. Since it is used to set the weight unit, the weight unit keeps its
previous value.

 THALES AVIONICS 2012

J61334BB - 00
 T FMS220 - USER'S MANUAL
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Page 327

Possible actions:

PRESS CHECK Lsk to display the UNITS page.

PRESS CLEAR Lsk to mask the alert.

6.1.2.18 POS

SELECTED POS NOT VALID

CHANGE NAV MODE
Explanation:

The position of the selected navigation mode is invalid.

Possible action:

PRESS CHANGE Lsk to display the PROG 3/3 page.

SELECT another navigation mode.

This document and any data included are the property of Thales Avionics. They cannot be reproduced, disclosed or utilized without the company’s prior written approval.

POSITION DISCREPANCY
Explanation:

Two causes are possible:

− The position discrepancy between the selected navigation mode and another one is
greater than max ( 0.1 Nm ; sum of each navigation mode EPE ), EPE = Estimated
Position Error.
− In dual mode, the position discrepancy between both FMC selected positions is greater
than RNP.
Possible actions:

PRESS CHECK Lsk to display the PROG 3/3 page.

IDENTIFY the inconsistent sources of navigation.

PRESS CLEAR Lsk to mask the alert.

BCP POSITION UPDATING

IN 30S
Explanation:

The BCP, Best Computed Position will be re-initialized automatically within 30s, because
there is a too large difference of position between the BCP position and the best sensor
position.
Possible action:

PRESS CHECK Lsk to display the BCP NAV page.

 THALES AVIONICS 2012

J61334BB - 00
Page 328
FMS220 - USER'S MANUAL
TABLE OF CONTENTS
T

6.1.2.19 R/N

RADIO NAV EPE > RNP

OR INVALID
Explanation:

The Radionavigation EPE is invalid or greater than RNP

Possible actions:

PRESS CHECK Lsk to display the NAV FRQ page.

CHECK the radio-navigation data.

PRESS CLEAR Lsk to mask the alert.

RADIO NAV AUTOTUNING

FAILURE

This document and any data included are the property of Thales Avionics. They cannot be reproduced, disclosed or utilized without the company’s prior written approval.
Explanation:

During autotuning, the tuned frequency returned by at least one of the radio navigation
equipments is different from the commanded frequency or DME hold status returned by the
DME equipment on at least one channel is different from the commanded status.
Possible actions:

PRESS CHECK Lsk to display the NAV FRQ page.

CHECK the radio-navigation data.

PRESS CLEAR Lsk to mask the alert.

Note: This alert appears only on the active FMC

6.1.2.20 RNP

NAVIGATION ACCURACY
DEGRADED
Explanation:

The ANP is greater than the current RNP or (GPS is not selected for navigation and
estimated position error (EPE) is greater than 3.8NM).
Possible actions:

PRESS CHECK Lsk to display the PROG 2/3 page.

CHECK ANP and RNP values.

PRESS CLEAR Lsk to mask the alert.

 THALES AVIONICS 2012

J61334BB - 00
 T FMS220 - USER'S MANUAL
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Page 329

RNP > RNP_DEFAULT

AIRSPACE INCONSISTENCY
Explanation:

The Required Navigation Performance (RNP) inserted on page PROG 2/3 is greater than
the default value for the current airspace called rnp_default. Refer to "OPERATIONAL
PRINCIPLES / Definitions / Required Navigation Performance (RNP)" to know the
rnp_default value according to the current conditions (flight area, sensors in use).
Possible actions:

PRESS CHECK Lsk to display the PROG 2/3 page.

ENTER a new RNP value.

PRESS CLEAR Lsk to mask the alert.

This document and any data included are the property of Thales Avionics. They cannot be reproduced, disclosed or utilized without the company’s prior written approval.

RNP APPROACH
INTEGRITY DEGRADED
Explanation:

GPS Navigation precision is not good enough for RNP approach.

Possible actions:

PRESS CHECK Lsk to display the PROG 2/3 page. CHECK the ANP and
RNP values.

PRESS CLEAR Lsk to mask the alert.

6.1.2.21 VAR

INSERTED/COMPUTED
VAR DISCREPANCY
Explanation:

The difference between the calculated magnetic variation and the entered magnetic
variation value is greater than 2°.
Possible action:

PRESS CHECK Lsk to display the HDG/ATT page.

ENTER a new magnetic variation value.

PRESS CLEAR Lsk to mask the alert.

 THALES AVIONICS 2012

J61334BB - 00
Page 330
FMS220 - USER'S MANUAL
TABLE OF CONTENTS
T

6.1.2.22 WGT

SEC FPLN ACTIVATED

CHECK WEIGHT
Explanation:

Upon secondary flight plan swap or activation command, at least one active weight
parameters has been replaced by an inserted secondary take-off performances parameter.
Possible action:

PRESS CHECK Lsk to display the WEIGHT page (this action clears the
alert).

CHECK total fuel weight and zero fuel weight values and enter take-off
center of gravity parameter if necessary (resets when this alert is
triggered)

This document and any data included are the property of Thales Avionics. They cannot be reproduced, disclosed or utilized without the company’s prior written approval.
6.2 OPERATIONAL CHECKING

6.2.1 PERFORMING FMS RESYNCHRONIZATION

CTK INIT command allows to manually synchronize both FMS.

Note: This command is only available on the FMS not coupled with the autopilot.

PRESS DATA key

PRESS STATUS Lsk

PRESS FMS BITE Lsk

PRESS > CTK INIT Lsk.

PRESS EXEC key to confirm.

The FMC restarts to process the crosstalk initialization performed at start up.

 THALES AVIONICS 2012

J61334BB - 00
 T FMS220 - USER'S MANUAL
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Page 331

6.2.2 CHECKING PROCEDURES

6.2.2.1 Checking sensors

Refer to "PILOT INTERFACE / MCDU Pages description / STATUS / SENSOR STS page" for more
details about the sensors status Checking.

6.2.2.2 Uploading configuration data

The following configuration data can be uploaded:

the model of the earth’s magnetic field (MAG VAR)

Note: The upload of the system configuration database (FMS CONF) and the performance database
(PERF DATA) is managed at IAD level.

Power off the IAD

This document and any data included are the property of Thales Avionics. They cannot be reproduced, disclosed or utilized without the company’s prior written approval.

INSERT a Compact Flash with the desired type of data in the Compact Flash
reader.

Power on the IAD.

CHECK the data uploaded:

− PRESS DATA key.
− PRESS STATUS Lsk.
− PRESS CONF DATA Lsk.

 THALES AVIONICS 2012

J61334BB - 00
Page 332
FMS220 - USER'S MANUAL
TABLE OF CONTENTS
T

The following data are displayed:

FMS CONF, system configuration table identification and CRC.

PERF DATA, performance database identification and CRC.

MAG VAR, magnetic variation model identification and CRC.

CAUTION: Data uploaded from the compact flash are not permanent. Upload is done at
each start. Thus, if the compact flash is missing or no data is present in the compact flash
when starting the IAD, FMC will use IGRF2010 as magnetic variation model.

6.2.2.3 Downloading of FMS status

A Compact Flash must be inserted in the Compact Flash reader.

PRESS DATA key.

This document and any data included are the property of Thales Avionics. They cannot be reproduced, disclosed or utilized without the company’s prior written approval.

PRESS STATUS Lsk.

PRESS CONF DATA Lsk.

PRESS SAVE Status Lsk.

Note: These data are used only for THALES AVIONICS analysis, and do not include maintenance
data.

 THALES AVIONICS 2012

J61334BB - 00
 T FMS220 - USER'S MANUAL
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Page 333

7 MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES

7.1 STANDARD DATA MAINTENANCE

7.1.1 UPLOADING NAVIGATION DATABASE

The standard database (STD DATA), pilot database (PILOT DATA) and company database (CO-RTE
DATA) are uploaded at cold start from the Compact Flash.

Note: When the compact flash contains two standard databases, only one database is uploaded at
cold start according to the expiration dates. The uploaded database is called "used standard
database" and is identified with a star "*" character. The other database is called "additional standard
database". Refer to "MULTI PHASE RELATED PROCEDURES / Other functions / Database operation
/ Standard database selection" to upload the additional standard database.
This document and any data included are the property of Thales Avionics. They cannot be reproduced, disclosed or utilized without the company’s prior written approval.

Power off the IAD.

INSERT a Compact Flash with the desired data (standard, additional standard,
pilot, company) in the Compact Flash reader.

Refer to "OPERATIONAL PRINCIPLES / Flight management principles / Database"

Power on the IAD.

CHECK the uploaded navigation data.

Refer to "FLIGHT PHASE RELATED PROCEDURES / Preflight / FMS Initialization / Checking

navigation database".

 THALES AVIONICS 2012

J61334BB - 00
Page 334
FMS220 - USER'S MANUAL
TABLE OF CONTENTS
T

7.2 COMPANY ROUTES MAINTENANCE

7.2.1 COMPANY ROUTE LIST

PRESS DATA key.

PRESS DATABASE Lsk.

PRESS CO-ROUTE Lsk.

The STD DATA page (CO-ROUTE) is displayed with the list of the company route identifiers and
their departure and arrival airports.

This document and any data included are the property of Thales Avionics. They cannot be reproduced, disclosed or utilized without the company’s prior written approval.
Note: If a company route contains fixes, airways or procedure parts that are not in the used standard
database, the route identifier is displayed in amber.

PRESS PREV / NEXT key to access to the previous/next company routes

identifiers, by circular permutation.

INSERT characters in the scratchpad line to only display the routes which
identifiers begin with these characters.

The whole list is displayed when scratchpad line is empty.

PRESS PLT ROUTE Lsk to access to the PILOT DATA page (ROUTE).

Refer to "MULTI PHASE RELATED PROCEDURES / Other functions / Database operation".

Note: CODE insertion is necessary to access to the company route edition mode (refer to "Company
route edition" paragraph).

 THALES AVIONICS 2012

J61334BB - 00
 T FMS220 - USER'S MANUAL
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Page 335

7.2.2 REVIEW OF A COMPANY ROUTE

On STD DATA page (CO-ROUTE), PRESS Lsk beside the desired company route
identifier.
This document and any data included are the property of Thales Avionics. They cannot be reproduced, disclosed or utilized without the company’s prior written approval.

 THALES AVIONICS 2012

J61334BB - 00
Page 336
FMS220 - USER'S MANUAL
TABLE OF CONTENTS
T

The CO-ROUTE page is displayed, this page contains:

IDENT, company route identifier.

FROM/TO, departure and arrival airports (optional).

List of elements of the company route (with FROM and TO airports) and the path between
elements (*).

(*) between two waypoints, the path displayed is "bearing/distance".

(*) If the route contains a departure procedure with SID (resp. SID and TRANS), a field with the
SID identifier (resp. "SID/TRANS" identifiers) is displayed in reverse video between the departure
runway and the last fix of the departure procedure. The departure airport identifier is followed by
the three last characters of the runway identification.

(*) If the route contains airway segments, a VIA field followed by the airway identifier in reverse
video is displayed between the FROM and TO fix identification.

(*) If the route contains an arrival procedure with STAR (resp. TRANS and STAR), a field with the

This document and any data included are the property of Thales Avionics. They cannot be reproduced, disclosed or utilized without the company’s prior written approval.
STAR identifier (resp. "TRANS/STAR" identifiers) is displayed in reverse video after the first fix of
the arrival procedure.

(*) If the route contains an approach procedure with APP (resp. VIA and APP), a field with the APP
identifier (resp. "VIA/APP" identifiers) is displayed in reverse video after the first fix of the arrival
procedure or following the "TRANS/STAR" identifier if defined.

Note: When the arrival procedure contains "VIA/APP" and "TRANS/STAR", a blank line separates
the identifiers (see second page example herebelow).

Example of company route section with departure procedure (SID and TRANS) and airway
segments.

 THALES AVIONICS 2012

J61334BB - 00
 T FMS220 - USER'S MANUAL
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Page 337

Example of company route section with arrival procedure (TRANS, STAR, VIA and APP).

PRESS the Lsk beside an element of the route to display its characteristics
(Standard Airport/Navaid/Waypoint/NDB page) or access to the procedure page.

Note:
a) Each company route may contain up to 50 elements.

b) There is no discontinuity in a company route.

c) If a company route contains inconsistent data (fixes, airways or procedures that do not exist in
the used standard database), the route identifier and the concerned inconsistent data are
displayed in amber.

CAUTION: If a company route contains airway and/or procedure portions, the crew must
check that it is compliant with flight plan capacity (100 legs).
This document and any data included are the property of Thales Avionics. They cannot be reproduced, disclosed or utilized without the company’s prior written approval.

If “< - - - -” or “- - - - >” is displayed, a PRESS on the corresponding Lsk enables to

scroll left or right the element list of the company route.

To select this company route, PRESS ROUTE SELECT Lsk to go to the ROUTE SEL
page.

7.2.3 EDITING A COMPANY ROUTE

PRESS DATA key.

PRESS DATABASE Lsk.

PRESS CO-ROUTE Lsk.

The STD DATA page (CO-ROUTE) is displayed.

ENTER access code "1111" in CODE - - - - Lsk.

CAUTION: Company route data edition must be performed by authorized staff only. The
following features are protected by an access code.
Company route edition can be performed on ground only.

Note:
a) Edition mode ends after a long power interruption or when A/C transitions to flight.

b) In case the access code inserted is not correct, the following message is displayed in the
scratchpad line:
INCORRECT PASSWORD

 THALES AVIONICS 2012

J61334BB - 00
Page 338
FMS220 - USER'S MANUAL
TABLE OF CONTENTS
T

7.2.3.1 Deleting a company route

On STD DATA page (CO-ROUTE), PRESS CLR key, then PRESS the Lsk beside the
desired route identifier, and PRESS EXEC key to confirm this deletion.

On CO-ROUTE page, PRESS CLR key, then PRESS IDENT Lsk, and PRESS EXEC
key to confirm this deletion.

7.2.3.2 Modifying a company route

This document and any data included are the property of Thales Avionics. They cannot be reproduced, disclosed or utilized without the company’s prior written approval.

On STD DATA page (CO-ROUTE), PRESS Lsk beside the desired route identifier.

Perform the modifications (insertions/deletions of fixes, airways, procedures).

All the pilot route procedures apply, refer to "MULTI PHASE RELATED PROCEDURES / Other
functions / Database operation / Modifying a pilot route".

To display or to select this route, PRESS ROUTE SELECT Lsk to go to the ROUTE
SELECT page.

 THALES AVIONICS 2012

J61334BB - 00
 T FMS220 - USER'S MANUAL
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Page 339

7.2.3.3 Creating a company route

On STD DATA page (CO-ROUTE), PRESS NEW Lsk.

ENTER the route identifier on IDENT Lsk.

Note: The insertion of the departure and arrival airport of the standard database is optional
This document and any data included are the property of Thales Avionics. They cannot be reproduced, disclosed or utilized without the company’s prior written approval.

(FROM/TO Lsk).

INSERT fixes, airways, departure and arrival procedures as described in the "Pilot
route creation" paragraph.

Note: To create a route as a copy of another route, display this route (CO-ROUTE page) then enter
the new name preceded by "+" in the IDENT field.

PERFORM a data save: PRESS RETURN Lsk twice to return to the DATA page and
PRESS SAVE Lsk.

Note:
a) Only fixes from standard database can be inserted in a company route. Any other insertion will
be rejected with the following message displayed in the scratchpad line:
NOT ALLOWED

b) After modifications, in order to recover the same company route after a power off, the DTA
alert is triggered to perform a save of data.

c) When the maximum route capacity is reached, the following message is displayed in the
scratchpad line:
MEMORY FULL

 THALES AVIONICS 2012

J61334BB - 00
Page 340
FMS220 - USER'S MANUAL
TABLE OF CONTENTS
T

7.3 USER DATA MAINTENANCE

7.3.1 ERASING USER DATA

PRESS DATA key.

PRESS ERASE Lsk.

This document and any data included are the property of Thales Avionics. They cannot be reproduced, disclosed or utilized without the company’s prior written approval.

PRESS EXEC key.

This action is irreversible and erases the content of the Pilot database and secondary flight plan, on
both FMC (internal memory and compact flash).

Note: To allow the deletion, the active flight plan, the temporary flight plan and the secondary flight
plan are cancelled.

Note: If for some reasons the data erase fails (no Compact flash plugged in, damaged data...), the
following message is displayed in the scratchpad line:

XFER FAIL

 THALES AVIONICS 2012

J61334BB - 00
 T FMS220 - USER'S MANUAL
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Page 341

8 ACRONYMS AND ABBREVIATIONS

A/C Aircraft
ACARS Arinc Communication Addressing and Reporting System
ACS Autopilot Coupled Side
ADC Air Data Computer
ADF Automatic Direction Finder
AF Arc to Fix (ARINC-424 leg)
AFCS Auto Flight Control System
AGL Above Ground Level
AHRS Attitude and Heading Reference System
ALT Altitude
ALTN Alternate
ALT SEL Selected Altitude
This document and any data included are the property of Thales Avionics. They cannot be reproduced, disclosed or utilized without the company’s prior written approval.

AMLCD Active Matrix Liquid Crystal Display

ANP Actual Navigation Performance
AP Auto Pilot
APCP Auto Pilot Control Panel
APT Airport
AWY Airway
BCP Best Computed Position
BITE Built In Test Equipment
BRG Bearing
CA Course to an Altitude (ARINC-424 leg)
CARP Computed Air Release Point
CAS Computed Air Speed
CD Course to DME distance (ARINC-424 leg)
CF Course to Fix (ARINC-424 leg)
CI Course to Intercept (ARINC-424 leg)
CLR Clear
CMS Communication Management System
CMU Communication Management Unit
CO-ROUTE Company Route
CR Course to Radial interception (ARINC-424 leg)
CRC Cyclical Redondancy Check
CRS Course
CRZ Cruise
DA Drift Angle
DC Data Concentrator
DCF Data Concentrator Function
DEST Destination
DF Direct to Fix (ARINC-424 leg)
DIST Distance
DME Distance Measuring Equipment

 THALES AVIONICS 2012

J61334BB - 00
Page 342
FMS220 - USER'S MANUAL
TABLE OF CONTENTS
T

DTK Desired Track angle

DTO Direct-To
DVS Doppler Velocity System
EFCP EFIS Control Panel
EFIS Electronic Flight Instrument System
EFOB Estimated Fuel On Board
EIA Enhanced Interrupted Alignment
EPE Estimated Position Error
ETA Estimated Time of Arrival
ETE Estimated Time En route
EXEC Execute
FA Fix to an Altitude (ARINC-424 leg)
FAF Final Approach Fix
FC Fix to distance on Course (ARINC-424 leg)
FCM Flight Control Module
FD Fix to DME distance (ARINC-424 leg)
FDE Fault Detection and Exclusion

This document and any data included are the property of Thales Avionics. They cannot be reproduced, disclosed or utilized without the company’s prior written approval.
FDS Flight Display System
FF Fuel Flow
FGCP Flight Guidance Control Panel
FL Flight Level
FM Fix to Manual termination (ARINC-424 leg)
FMC Flight Management Component
FMS Flight Management System
FOB Fuel On Board
FOM Factor Of Merit
FPA Flight Path Angle
FPLN Flight Plan
FPS Flight Planning System
FREQ Frequency
FRQ Frequency
FTE Flight Technical Error
GA Go Around
GCA Gyrocompass Alignment
GPIRS Global Positioning + Inertial Reference System
GPS Global Positioning System
GS Ground Speed
GW Gross Weight
HA Hold to an Altitude (ARINC-424 leg)
HARP High Altitude Release Point
HDG Heading
HELI Heliport
HF Hold to Fix (ARINC-424 leg)
HFOM Horizontal Figure Of Merit
HGT Height
HIL Horizontal Integrity Limit
HM Hold to Manual termination (ARINC-424 leg)

 THALES AVIONICS 2012

J61334BB - 00
 T FMS220 - USER'S MANUAL
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Page 343

HSFOM Horizontal Speed Figure of Merit

IAD Integrated Avionic Display
IAS Indicated Air Speed
ICAO International Civil Aviation Organization
IDENT Identification / Identifier
IF Initial Fix (ARINC-424 leg)
IFA In Flight Alignment
IFC Integrated Flight Cabinet
IFR Instrument Flight Rules
IGRF International Geomagnetic Reference Field
ILS Instrument Landing System
INS Inertial Navigation System
IRS Inertial Reference System
IRU Inertial Reference Unit
KM Kilometer
KH Kilometer(s) per hour
KT Knot
This document and any data included are the property of Thales Avionics. They cannot be reproduced, disclosed or utilized without the company’s prior written approval.

LAT Latitude
LB Pounds
LCD Liquid Crystal Display
LNAV Lateral Navigation
LNG Length
LOC Localizer
LONG Longitude
LSK Line Select Key
MAG Magnetic
MAG VAR Magnetic Variation
MCDU Multifunction Control and Display Unit
MCT Maximum Continuous Torque
MDA Minimum Descent Altitude
MFD Multi Fonction Display
MGRS Military Grid Reference System
MOT Mark On Target
MRK Mark
MSG Message
NAV Navigation
NAVAID Navigation Aid
ND Navigation Display
NDB Non Directional Beacon
NRP Non Return Point
NM Nautical Mile
OFST Offset
PBD Place Bearing Distance
PEE Position Estimation Error
PFD Primary Flight Display
PI Procedure turn to Intercept (ARINC-424 leg)
POS Position
PPOS Present Position

 THALES AVIONICS 2012

J61334BB - 00
Page 344
FMS220 - USER'S MANUAL
TABLE OF CONTENTS
T

PPS Precise Positioning Service

PRAIM Predictive RAIM
PRNAV Precise RNAV
PROG Progress
PSE Path Steering Error
RA or R/ALT Radio Altimeter
RAIM Receiver Autonomous Integrity Monitoring
RCR Runway Condition Reading
RF Radius to Fix (ARINC-424 leg)
RFI Rolling Condition Index
RMS Radio Management System
RNAV Radio Navigation
RNP Required Navigation Performance
R/P Resume Point
RTA Required Time of Arrival
RTE Route
RWY Runway

This document and any data included are the property of Thales Avionics. They cannot be reproduced, disclosed or utilized without the company’s prior written approval.
SAR Search And Rescue
SAT Static Air Temperature
SEC Secondary flight plan
SEL Altitude Selected
SHA Stored Heading Alignment
SID Standard Instrument Departure
SPD Speed
SPS Standard Positioning Service
STAR Standard Terminal Arrival Route
TAC TACAN
TAS True Air Speed
TAT Total Air Temperature
TERM Terminal
TF Track to Fix (ARINC-424 leg)
TGT Target
TKE Track angle error
T/O Take-Off
T/P Turn Point
TOC Top Of Climb
TOD Top Of Descent
TRANS ALT Transition Altitude
TSE Total System Error
TTG Time To Go
UTC Universal Time Coordinated
UTM Universal Transverse Mercator
VA Heading to an Altitude (ARINC-424 leg)
VAPP Approach speed
VAR Variation
VCLS Climb Speed
VCP Virtual Control Panel
VD Heading to DME distance (ARINC-424 leg)

 THALES AVIONICS 2012

J61334BB - 00
 T FMS220 - USER'S MANUAL
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Page 345

VFR Visual Flight Rules

VI Heading to next leg Interception (ARINC-424 leg)
VM Heading to Manual termination (ARINC-424 leg)
VNAV Vertical Navigation
VNE Velocity Never Exceeded
VOR VHF Omnidirectional Range
VORDME VOR/DME
VORTAC VOR/TACAN
VR Heading to Radial interception (ARINC-424 leg)
VRC Recommended Climb Speed
WGS World Geodesic System
WND Wind
WPT Waypoint
XTK Cross track error
Z Zulu time, UTC time
ZC Barometric corrected altitude
ZFW Zero Fuel Weight
This document and any data included are the property of Thales Avionics. They cannot be reproduced, disclosed or utilized without the company’s prior written approval.

ZP Standard altitude

 THALES AVIONICS 2012

J61334BB - 00
 25, rue Jules Védrines
26027 VALENCE Cedex - FRANCE
Tel. : +33 (0) 4.75.79.85.11